PROJECT MANUAL Leonard Wood... · 2017-08-07 · project manual toc – table of contents table of contents toc-1 convert church's chicken to popeye's ft. leonard wood, missouri aafes

PROJECT MANUAL

CONVERT CHURCH'S CHICKEN TO POPEYE'S FT. LEONARD WOOD, MISSOURI AAFES PN: 3308-14-000005

CONTRACTS: COMBINED WORK – ALL TRADES

BY:

DATE: 24 JUNE 2016 SOLICITATION SPECIFICATIONS

Illinois Design Firm License Number 184-002661 Post Office Box 820 600 West Main Street ▪ Suite 2 Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5709 Fax 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5638

A R C H I T E C T S

CONVERT CHURCH'S CHICKEN TO POPEYE'S

FT. LEONARD WOOD, MISSOURI AAFES PN: 3308-14-000005

ARCHITECT

h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS 600 West Main Street Suite 2

Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 457 5709 Fax 457 5638

E-mail [email protected]

PROFESSIONAL CONSULTANT

FIRE PROTECTION/MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc. 413 West Main Street Post Office Box 581

Mt. Vernon, Illinois 62864 618 242 0473 Fax 242 2330

E-mail [email protected]

hmb PROJECT NO. 1604.0

24 JUNE 2016

© 2016 h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS



ARCHITECT: h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS Project Manual: Section 00860 All Sections of Division 1 All Sections of Division 2

Section 03300

Section 05500

All Sections of Division 6


Section 08305




SIGNATURE

CURRENT DATE 24 June 2016

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2016 Drawing Sheets: All T-Sheets, DCA-1.00, CA-1.00, All D-Sheets, All A-Sheets, FS-1.01

MECHANICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 15

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2017

Drawing Sheets: M-1.01, P-1.00

FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: Section 13851

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Sep 2016

Drawing Sheets: FA-1.01

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 16

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2017

Drawing Sheets: CE-1.00, All E-Sheets

PROJECT MANUAL TOC – Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1



BIDDING REQUIREMENTS PAGES

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

List of Drawings 00860-1

SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Requirements of Ft. Leonard Wood 01000-8 Summary of Work 01010-11 AAFES Furnished & Installed Equipment 01017-3 AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment 01018-3 Substitution Procedures (with CSI Form Attached) 01030-3 Cutting & Patching 01045-2 Grades, Lines & Levels 01051-1 AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures 01060-3 AAFES Safety Regulations & Codes 01090-8 Phasing 01140-2 Schedule of Values 01210-2 AAFES Progress Meetings 01220-2 Progress Payments 01230-3 Project Management & Coordination 01310-3 Construction Progress Schedule 01320-3 AAFES Weather Table 01331-2 Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals 01340-10 Quality Control 01400-2

Testing Laboratory Services 01410-3 AAFES Environmental Protection 01420-10

Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls 01500-9 Temporary Utilities 01510-5 Field Offices & Sheds 01590-3 Material & Equipment 01600-2 Storage & Protection 01620-3 Systems Start-up 01650-3 Project Closeout (with DoD Form 1354 Attached) 01700-28 Cleaning 01710-2 Project Record Documents 01720-2

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

Selective Demolition 02070-6 Termite Control 02282-2 Earthwork 02300-9

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE WORK

Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-8

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY (Not Used)


DIVISION 5 – METALS

Metal Fabrications 05500-9

DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS

Rough Carpentry 06100-5 Finish Carpentry 06200-6 Pre-Finished Paneling-No Formaldehyde 06250-4 Architectural Woodwork 06400-7

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

Firestopping 07270-6 Modifications to Warranted EPDM Roof System 07559-8 Flashing & Sheet Metal 07600-4 Building & Paving Joint Sealers 07920-5

DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS

Access Doors 08305-3

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

Gypsum Drywall 09250-8 Tile 09300-8 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09510-4 Painting 09900-9 Fiberglass Reinforced Panels 09986-3

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Wall Surface Protection Systems 10265-3 Specialty Signs 10440-4

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

Food Service Equipment 11400-7 Used Cooking Oil Equipment 11800-6

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (Not Used)

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Fire Alarm 13851-10

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Not Used)

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

General Provisions - Mechanical 15010-5 Cleaning, Testing & Adjusting 15013-2 Basic Materials & Methods 15050-7 Testing Piping Systems 15067-2 Piping Insulation 15250-3 Ductwork Insulation 15290-3 Plumbing 15400-5 Plumbing Fixtures & Trim 15450-2 Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units 15782-6 Metal Ducts 15815-4 Duct Accessories 15820-2 Food Service Ventilation Systems 15825-3 Diffusers, Registers & Grilles 15855-2 Fans 15872-3 Air System Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing 15993-3


DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

Electrical Demolition for Remodeling 16060-2 Conduit 16111-5 Building Wire & Cable 16123-3 Boxes 16130-4 Wiring Devices 16141-4 Manufactured Wiring Systems 16150-2 Cabinets & Enclosures 16160-2 Grounding & Bonding 16170-2 Supporting Devices 16190-2 Identification 16195-2 Interior Luminaires 16510-4 Testing 16950-3

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Section 00860 – LIST OF DRAWINGS

LIST OF DRAWINGS 00860-1

SHEET NO. TITLE

T-1.00 Title Sheet/Index of Drawings T-1.01 General Information Sheet DCA-1.00 Demolition Site Plan CA-1.00 Site Plan D-1.00 Demolition Floor Plan/Exterior Elevations D-5.00 Demolition Roof Plan/Reflected Ceiling Plan/Equipment Plan D-6.00 Demolition Interior Elevations A-1.00 Floor Plan/Exterior Elevations A-5.00 Roof Plan/Reflected Ceiling Plan A-6.00 Interior Elevations A-9.00 Wall & Floor Finish Plans, Room Finish Schedule & Interior Finish Material

List FS-1.00 Food Service Equipment Plan & Schedule M-1.01 Demolition Plans & Floor Plans-Mechanical P-1.00 Demolition Plans & Floor Plans-Plumbing FA-1.01 Demolition Plan & Floor Plan-Fire Alarm CE-1.00 Site Plan-Electrical E-1.00 Demolition Plan & Floor Plans-Electrical E-1.01 Schedules & Symbols Legend-Electrical All drawings dated: 24 JUNE 2016 END 00860.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01000 – REQUIREMENTS OF FT. LEONARD WOOD

REQUIREMENTS OF FT. LEONARD WOOD 01000-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. FLW Excavation Permit.

B. FLW Hot Work Permit.

C. FLW Safety Requirements.

D. Work Schedule.

E. Covering of Debris.

F. Utility Line Marking.

G. Environmental Protection.

H. Waste Recycling and Disposal.

I. Contractor Installation Identification Credentials.

J. FLW Special Requirements.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01010 – Project Summary.

B. Section 01420 – Environmental Protection.

C. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

D. Technical Sections of the Specifications.

E. Army & Air Force Exchange Service - General Provisions.

1.3 FLW EXCAVATION PERMIT

A. No excavation shall be done prior to receiving a Ft. Leonard Wood Excavation Permit.

1. Permits shall be obtained from Ft. Leonard Wood DPW. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining utility locates prior to performing any

excavation work at Ft. Leonard Wood. 3. If excavation is started without obtaining a permit, the contractor shall be held liable

for repairs of any broken utility lines and other damage resulting from the broken lines.

B. Excavation Permit information – Ft. Leonard Wood DPW:

1. Phone: (573) 596-0900.


C. The Contractor shall request a permit a minimum of 30 days prior to scheduled start of digging.

D. Hand digging shall be required to locate utilities shown on the contract drawings or 3 feet on either side of locations identified by Ft. Leonard Wood.

1.4 FLW HOT WORK PERMIT

A. No hot work shall be done outside of an approved shop area prior to receiving a Ft. Leonard Wood Hot Work Permit.

1. Permits shall be obtained from Ft. Leonard Wood Fire and Emergency Services at Fire Station #1, Building 580.

2. Contractor shall be liable for any fire loss to Ft. Leonard Wood property attributable to negligence on the part of the Contractor.

3. Comply with all fire prevention measures prescribed by Ft. Leonard Wood.

B. Hot Work Permit information – Ft. Leonard Wood Fire and Emergency Services:

1. Phone: (573) 596-0883.

C. The Contractor shall request a permit a minimum of 30 days prior to scheduled start of any torch cutting, welding, soldering or other open flame work is performed.

1.5 FLW SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. General Safety:

1. During progress of work, the Contractor shall protect all personnel, whether Government or civilian, from any and all safety hazards caused by the construction operations.

2. Contractor shall follow all Federal, State and local laws in accordance with 29 CFR 1910 (General Industries Standards), and 29 CFR 1926 (Construction Standards).

B. Fire Prevention:

1. The current version of FLW Regulation 420-2 “Post Fire Regulations” is by this reference made a part of this solicitation and resultant contract.

2. The Contractor’s operation shall conform to all applicable portions of this document. All Contractor’s employees and subcontractors shall be instructed in the fire prevention program of the Post and shall be advised of the requirement of the Post Fire Regulations as they pertain to this particular contract.

C. Traffic Control:

1. Contractor shall provide all temporary signs and markers as necessary to maintain safety in the worksite.

2. Contractor shall ensure road user movement is inhibited as little as practical. 3. The Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain all required barricades as directed

by the DPW Safety Office and the Contracting Officer. 4. Access drives and roadways shall remain clear at all times. 5. If road/lane closures-traffic interruption becomes necessary during the course of work:

a. Contractor shall submit for approval, 15 days prior to commencing work, a barricade and sign plan clearly showing work area, location, and type of sign to be placed for rerouting traffic.


b. Part VI, The Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, latest edition, shall be used for traffic signing and barricades and shall be coordinated with, and approved by DPW.

6. The Contractor shall conduct his operations to offer the least possible obstruction and inconvenience to public traffic.

a. All traffic shall be permitted to pass adjacent to work with as little delay as possible.

b. Where the nature of construction operations in progress, equipment, and machinery in use are of character to endanger passing traffic, the contractor shall provide lights and signs, erect fences or barriers, and station guards necessary to give adequate warning to avoid damage or injury to passing traffic.

c. Signs, flags, lights, warning and safety devices shall conform to applicable Post, City, County, and State requirements.

1.6 WORK SCHEDULE

A. All work at Ft. Leonard Wood shall be accomplished during normal working hours 0700 to 1600 hours exclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, and federal holidays unless other times are approved by the Contracting Officer, or otherwise stated in the contract.

1. Coordinate the work schedule with the Contracting Officer. 2. Work may be expanded to 0600 and 1800 hours if approved by the Contracting

Officer.

1.7 SITE USE

A. Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain temporary construction to separate construction areas from entry by unauthorized personnel including, but not limited to:

1. Construction trailer(s) if required by Contractor. 2. Temporary storage trailers, sheds and lay-down areas. 3. Equipment parking areas. 4. Other areas subject to construction work under this Contract.

B. Proposed lay down, storage, equipment and parking areas are indicated on Drawing Sheet CA-1.00.

1. No exterior construction activity, including location of construction or storage trailers and sheds or equipment parking, shall be allowed outside defined area unless authorized in writing by Ft. Leonard Wood DPW and Contracting Officer.

2. All site usage, whether within or outside of defined area, shall be coordinated with Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Environmental and be reflected on submitted site use plans defined below.

C. Contractor shall coordinate all site use areas with Ft. Leonard Wood DPW and Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1. Submit detailed site plan for approval indicating all areas to be temporarily fenced and indicate specific use proposed for all areas within fencing at least 21 days prior to commencing work.

a. Indicate proposed location of all temporary construction trailers, storage trailer, sheds, trash dumpsters and recycling containers.

b. Provide temporary utility needs and proposed source for each.


2. Obtain written approval of proposed site use plan from Ft. Leonard Wood DPW and Contracting Officer prior to construction of temporary fencing or utilities.

1.8 COVERING OF DEBRIS

A. Contractor and all subcontractors shall be required to cover all loads of debris before hauling them from the Site.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for clean up of all incidental debris that inadvertently falls onto pavements or other properties during hauling operations.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall abide by the environmental requirements of Ft. Leonard Wood and the State of Missouri and the Federal Government.

1. Detailed requirements are set forth in Section 01420, AAFES Environmental Protection.

B. Vehicles and other powered equipment shall meet local air quality regulations for emissions.

1. Vehicles and equipment shall be mechanically sound and have all seals, grease rings, and other containment systems in place to ensure against leakage.

2. Drip pans shall be maintained such that overflow and spills do not occur. 3. There shall be no activities for equipment maintenance including oil changes, filter

replacements, or hydraulic equipment repair performed on Ft. Leonard Wood Property.

C. Whenever a spill of oil or hazardous material is discovered, Contractor shall take immediate action to:

1. Stop the flow of product 2. Advise personnel of the incident. 3. Immediately shut down equipment and minimize sources of ignition. 4. Contain the spill. 5. Notify Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Environmental immediately for further instruction.

D. Contractor shall also prepare a formal “Spill Report” chronicling the events leading to the spill and the efforts to contain it.

1. This Spill Report shall be submitted to the Ft. Leonard Wood Environmental Division representative investigating the spill.

E. Contractor shall submit monthly report of fuel consumption for each fuel burning unit, whether permitted or not, for all operational time throughout construction until Substantial Completion or when that unit is retired from service on this Project, whichever is longer.

1. Make monthly submittals to Ft. Leonard Wood DPW. 2. At Substantial Completion submit the total amount of fuel used for each unit to Ft.

Leonard Wood DPW substantiating monthly reports.

1.10 RECYCLING

A. Ft. Leonard Wood promotes recycling of demolished materials and construction waste and requires that the Contractor recycle as many materials as are feasible under this Contract.

B. Recycling of Construction waste shall be mandatory in an effort to reduce the amount of solid waste deposited in landfills and shall follow procedures outlined in various Sections of the Project Manual.


C. All construction debris, demolition debris and refuse shall be recycled to the maximum extent possible and not less than 50% per the Ft. Leonard Wood Environmental Management System (EMS).

1. All refuse and recycle disposal shall be reported to Ft. Leonard Wood DPW on a monthly basis with submittal and coordination of this requirement shall be through EMS.

2. The disposal and recycle report shall include:

a. Quantity, measured in weight by pounds, and material disposed. b. Quantity, measured in weight by pounds, and material recycled. c. Date upon which material was disposed or recycled. d. Final destination of material disposal or recycling.

3. Per AR 200-1, or Ft. Leonard Wood equivalent Form, all manifest or shipping papers that require the Installation EPA ID number must be signed by authorized a responsible party of the Environmental Division, Ft. Leonard Wood, Missouri.

4. Recyclable or Hazardous Materials shall be coordinated and/or reported by calling (573) 596-0882.

1.11 DISPOSAL

A. Contractor shall refer to applicable paragraphs in Section 01420, Environmental Protection for details pertaining to waste disposal including:

1. Hazardous waste generation, handling and disposal. 2. Non-hazardous waste disposal. 3. Normal construction debris.

B. All excess soils and organic matter shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of in approved landfill and in accordance with Section 01420.

C. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.10 above, or hazardous waste, all other solid waste shall be collected and recycled when applicable or disposed of off Ft. Leonard Wood Property.

1. There shall be no accumulation of solid waste unless properly containerized or put within a fenced area to prevent wind blown pollution.

2. No materials shall be put into dumpsters owned or managed by Ft. Leonard Wood.

D. Only empty paint cans shall be allowed in Contractor furnished trash receptacles.

1. Paint cans are considered empty if paint comprises less than 1 inch or 3% by weight of the total capacity of the container, whichever is less.

2. If the residue in the container exceeds these limits, contact the Contracting Officer for disposal instructions.

E. All concrete floor slab construction scheduled for removal shall be recycled.

F. All underground piping scheduled for removal shall be recycled when appropriate or, where allowed by Section 01420, removed from the site and legally disposed of in accord with that Section, off Ft. Leonard Wood property.

G. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.10 above, or technical Sections of the specifications, all solid waste not specifically indicated shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of off Ft. Leonard Wood property.


1.12 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL INSTALLATION IDENTIFICATION CREDENTIALS

A. Contractor shall comply with the following procedures for obtaining Installation identification passes for the Contractor’s personnel and subcontractors.

1. Contractor shall submit a written request on company letterhead stationary to the Ft. Leonard Wood sponsoring entity (identified at the Pre-construction Meeting) specifying:

a. Contract number. b. Location of work site. c. Date entry to the Installation must begin and contemplated termination date of

entry. d. Names, date of birth (DOB) and social security numbers (SSN) of Contractor

and subcontractor employee requiring access to the Installation. e. The name of the individual who will submit the Request for Identification

Credentials for each employee for whom identification credentials are needed.

2. The Ft. Leonard Wood sponsoring entity will submit information to authority having jurisdiction and that authority may:

a. Endorse the request. b. Attach a copy of the contract cover page and any other pages that provide

performance information, such as the need for and duration of access to the work site.

c. Forward this request to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office of the installation where the work is to be performed.

d. Provide appropriate blank Form to the Contractor. 3. The Contractor shall be required to complete and submit Form and request for

identification credentials, for each of the firm’s employees and for each subcontractor employee who must have access to the installation.

4. The Contractor shall also request appropriate Form for vehicle decals when the request for identification credentials is submitted.

5. To obtain the vehicle decal from the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office, the Contractor shall produce:

a. A valid driver's license. b. Proof of financial responsibility or insurance c. Current vehicle registration.

B. Contractor employees, at all times while on a military installation shall wear visible identification either as a part of, or attached to, their outer clothing.

C. The identification shall clearly identify the individual as being a Contractor employee.

D. During performance of the contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining required identification for newly assigned personnel, and for prompt return of credentials and vehicle registration decals to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office, for any employee who no longer requires access to the work site.

E. At the termination or completion of the contract, or upon expiration of credentials (if any such expirations are specified), the Contractor shall return all installation identification credentials and vehicle registration decals for all Contractor and subcontractor employees to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office.


1.13 FLW SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Use of Fire Hydrants:

1. The temporary use of fire hydrants as sources of water is not authorized without prior approval by the Fire Department, 596-0886.

a. Fire hydrant connections shall include an approved backflow preventer. b. Use of backflow preventers must comply with Missouri Department of Natural

Resources, Division 60, Public Drinking Water Program, Chapter 11 – Backflow Prevention, Title 10CSR60-11.

c. Government furnished backflow preventers shall be utilized and are available at Bldg. 1601, Water Treatment Plant on a first come basis.

2. Contractor shall be required to sign a hand receipt prior to obtaining a backflow preventer.

a. Contractor shall be accountable to return the checked out backflow preventer equipment undamaged and as soon as possible.

b. Contractor shall furnish and use an approved fire plug wrench to open and close the hydrant.

1.) Pipe wrenches shall not be used. 2.) When the hydrant is not being used it shall be shut off.

3. When the need for the hydrant is finished, the hydrant shall be shut off, the temporary connection and backflow preventer shall be removed, the fire hydrant caps shall be replaced and the Fire Department shall be notified that the hydrant will no longer be used.

B. Antiterrorism (AT) Level I Training:

1. All contractor and sub-contractor employees requiring access to Army installations, facilities and controlled access areas shall complete AT Level I awareness training available at https://jkodirect.jten.mil.

2. Users need to enroll in "Course #JS-US007-14" to receive credit for the training within 10 calendar days of contract award or within 10 working days of beginning performance on Contract.

3. Contractor shall submit certificates of completion for all personnel to DPW within five calendar days of completion of the training.

C. iWatch Training:

1. Within 10 calendar days of contract award and within 10 calendar days of new Contractor employees or subcontractors commencing work on this contract, all Contractor and sub-contractor employees shall review the FLW Directorate of Emergency Services (DES) web link for iWatch training located at http://www.wood.army.mil/LEC/iWatch/iWatch.htm.

2. This locally developed training will inform employees of the types of behavior to watch for and how to report suspicious activity.

3. Suspicious activity shall be reported to DPW and Security.

D. OPSEC Training:

1. Contractor employees must complete Level I OPSEC training within 30 calendar days of their reporting for work in accordance with AR 530-1.


2. All contractors shall complete annual OPSEC Awareness training if the Contract duration is longer than 30-days.

a. MSCoE OPSEC Officer will provide training. b. Coordination of training shall be through the DPW Inspection Branch.

3. Proof of training, including a detailed listing of attendees, shall be provided to DPW. 4. A nominal fee of $30.00 shall be charged to the Contractor for this training equal to 1-

hour of Government time. 5. Include all costs associated with employee training and review in Contractor proposal

to AAFES.

2 PRODUCTS (Not Used).

3 EXECUTION (Not Used).

END 01000.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 STATEMENT OF WORK

A. Scope: The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all plant, supervision, labor, equipment, materials necessary to perform all operations required to convert an existing Church's Chicken food concept into a new Popeye's food concept, all in accordance with these specifications, applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

B. Location: The work to be performed is in the AAFES Express located at the intersection of Constitution Avenue and 4th Street/Replacement, Ft. Leonard Wood, Missouri.

C. Principal Features:

1. Disconnect, remove, salvage and deliver existing exterior drive-thru equipment, site and building signage as indicated to AAFES designated storage facility on Post including, but not limited to:

a. Drive thru equipment. b. Site directional signage. c. Building mounted signage.

2. Selective Demolition of designated exterior site, building and roof elements:

a. Site related items:

1.) Partial and complete removal of designated steel pipe bollards at drive-thru equipment.

2.) Saw cutting and selective demolition of asphalt site paving for demolition of existing foundation systems and new construction foundation systems at:

a) Existing drive-thru equipment. b) Existing steel pipe bollards. c) New drive-thru equipment. d) New steel pipe bollards.

3.) Anchor bolt projections to below surface of concrete pedestal foundations and preparation of pedestal surfaces for patching at site directional signage.

4.) Electrical work commensurate with demolition of existing drive-thru equipment and site directional signage and preparation of existing conduits for extensions and new wiring.

b. Building related items:

1.) Building mounted brand signage wall anchorages. 2.) Preparation of building surfaces for patching at building mounted

signage. 3.) Electrical work commensurate with demolition of existing building

mounted brand signage and preparation of existing conduits for extensions and new wiring.

4.) Entrance hole in brick masonry/metal stud and gypsum board wall for routing piping and conduit for used cooking oil grease from fryers to used cooking oil disposal tank.


c. Roof related items:

1.) Kitchen hood exhaust fan and curb. 2.) Supply air fan and curb. 3.) Designated portions of EPDM roofing system to facilitate removal of

equipment curbs, roof deck patching, roof system patching and installation of new equipment curbs.

4.) Designated portions of steel roof deck to receive reinforcing angles, deck patches, installation of new ductwork penetrations and installation of new equipment curbs.

5.) HVAC work commensurate with demolition of roof mounted equipment.

6.) Electrical work commensurate with demolition of roof mounted equipment.

3. Disconnect, remove, salvage and deliver existing food service equipment, fixtures, furnishings and electronic signage as indicated to AAFES designated storage facility on Post including, but not limited to:

a. All hardwired, hard piped, plug-in and quick connect food service equipment. b. Menu boards and miscellaneous other food concept signage. c. Serving equipment and accessories. d. Preparation equipment and accessories. e. Drive-up Window serving equipment and accessories. f. Central cook line equipment and accessories. g. Wall mounted and free standing stainless steel shelving units. h. Walk-in refrigeration shelving and raw/uncooked food handling equipment. i. Scullery equipment, sinks and accessories. j. Utility area equipment, mop sink, water filter unit and accessories. k. All miscellaneous food service equipment items, fixtures, furnishings and

accessories that require special skills and/or lifting equipment to remove from premises.

4. Selective demolition of interior building elements indicated:

a. Electrical items including power, lighting, wiring devices, conductors, conduit and special systems devices/wiring.

b. Designated sprinkler, plumbing and HVAC system components for removal or modification.

c. Wood door with lite, HM frame and hardware. d. All acoustical tile ceilings and suspension system. e. Kitchen hood and grease duct to roof exhaust fan equipment. f. All built-in countertops, casework, related accessory items and trim. g. Wood window stools and chair rails. h. Fiberglass reinforced wall paneling and backer to face of metal studs. i. Ceramic tile and quarry tile floor finishes and wall base. j. Designated portion of gypsum drywall, metal stud menu board header

between Serving and Preparation area. k. Designated gypsum drywall, metal stud knee wall between Dining and

Serving area. l. Designated gypsum drywall header finishes to face of metal studs. m. Designated gypsum drywall, metal stud partitions or portions thereof. n. Sawcut and remove designated concrete slab-on-grade construction for

under slab piping. o. All other miscellaneous building components to facilitate new construction.


5. Temporarily remove, salvage, store and protect for reinstallation in new construction:

a. Bracket mounted fire extinguishers and wall brackets. b. Power panel cover plate/doors for demolition of existing and installation of

new wall finishes.

6. Renovation of existing construction for:

a. Under slab piping and bedding. b. Patching concrete slab-on-grade. c. Cold-formed metal stud partition walls. d. Electrical power and lighting circuits, wiring devices, light fixtures, conductors

and conduit. e. Special electrical systems and fire alarm components commensurate with

work. f. Natural gas, water supply and waste piping. g. HVAC ductwork, exhaust systems and kitchen exhaust hood. h. Sprinkler system components commensurate with work. i. Rough-ins for hard piped and hard wire equipment connections. j. Gypsum drywall and finishes including, but not limited to:

1.) Paint, stain and varnish. 2.) Fiberglass reinforced panels (FRP). 3.) Tongue and groove wood paneling (Car Siding). 4.) Stainless steel wall panels. 5.) Acoustical tile ceiling and grid systems.

k. Architectural millwork counter and counter frontal system with finishes including, but not limited to:

1.) Solid surface counter. 2.) Glass tile. 3.) Ceramic tile base.

l. Wall surface protection systems. m. Quarry and ceramic tile floor finishes and base. n. Acoustical ceiling suspension system, grid, HVAC diffusers, lighting fixtures

and ceiling pads. o. Final equipment connections and initial start up for testing and adjusting new

food service equipment. p. All other miscellaneous building components indicated new construction.

D. General Provisions

1. The Contractor is advised to take note of the following General Provisions of the Contract:

a. Cleaning up. b. Material and Workmanship. c. Accident Prevention. d. Existing structures on and surrounding site. e. Utilities and improvements. f. Operation and storage areas. g. Site investigation. h. Permits. i. Other responsibilities indicated in General Provisions.


2. A copy of the Army & Air Force Exchange Service - General Provisions is included in the Solicitation Package.

1.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Project will be constructed on an occupied Military Installation in and around an occupied facility.

B. Work performed under this Contract will require coordination with AAFES and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW personnel to ensure the health, safety and welfare of AAFES employees, customers and Post personnel.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for the construction of temporary barricades, barriers and services as indicated to:

1. Protect occupants and pedestrians from injury. 2. Protect vehicles and existing construction to remain from damage. 3. Maintain security of the Site and the Building at all times.

D. Refer to paragraph 1.27 of this Section and provisions of Section 01420, Environmental Protection for information pertaining to encounter of potentially hazardous materials.

1.3 SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General working hours on Post are from 0700 to 01600 hours.

B. No streets or driveways will be blocked without DPW and AAFES approval.

C. Contractor shall immediately clean up any debris tracked onto streets resulting from this construction operation.

D. Construction areas, including equipment, temporary office and storage areas, shall be kept clean and neat.

E. No burning is permitted on the Post.

1.4 UTILITIES (WATER, SEWER, GAS AND ELECTRICITY)

A. Refer to Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.

B. AAFES will pay for utilities consumed within the building and related exterior construction work.

C. Contractor will be required to pay designated utility companies the prevailing rate for connection fees and utilities consumed for this Project as needed for temporary offices and storage sheds (water, sewer, gas and electricity).

D. Ft. Leonard Wood utilities information will be made available by contacting (573) 596-0073 for Water, Sanitary Sewer, Natural Gas, Power and Communications.

E. Contractor shall contact the phone number above whenever:

1. It is unavoidable to interrupt a utility service. 2. Connecting to an existing utility. 3. Construction work commences. 4. An incident occurs that could impact an existing utility.


1.5 LAYING OUT WORK

A. Layout:

1. Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of work shall be verified by Contractor.

2. Discrepancies between Drawings, specifications, and Conditions shall be referred to the Contracting Officer in writing for adjustment before work affected is performed.

3. Failure to make such notifications shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry out work in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for the location and elevation of all the construction contemplated by the construction documents.

C. Prior to commencing work, Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Architectural, Mechanical, Fire Protection and Electrical drawings, each with the other, that in any way affect the locations of elevation of the work to be executed by him.

1. Any discrepancy shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer or designated representative for verifications and adjustment.

2. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on Contractor's part to comply with this function shall be done at his expense.

D. Field Dimensions:

1. The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate the general design and arrangement of all apparatus, fixtures, accessories, etc. necessary to complete the work required.

2. Exact location or arrangement of equipment may be subject to minor changes necessitated by field conditions and shall be made as required without additional cost to AAFES.

3. Measurements shall be verified by actual observations at the construction site, and Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner meeting the approval of the Contracting Officer.

1.6 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK

A. Carefully check the site where project is to be constructed and observe any overhead wires and equipment.

1. Any such work shall be temporarily or permanently moved, replaced, or protected as required to facilitate construction, whether or not shown or specified.

B. Attention is directed to the existence of pipe and other underground utilities and improvements.

1. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect all such utilities and improvements at all times during construction of this project.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for determining locations of underground lines that could be damaged by construction of this project including:

1. Underground utility lines, special systems and branch circuit wiring beyond existing building footprint.

2. Piping, conduit and special systems located under slab-on-grade within existing building.


1.7 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES

A. Contractor shall make utility connections “Hot/Live” whenever possible.

B. When “Hot/Live” connections are not feasible, Contractor shall perform the work under this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities.

1. Contractor may be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service.

2. Interruption shall be by written approval from utility owner. 3. Existing utility services may only be interrupted when approved, in writing, by the

Contracting Officer and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW.

C. When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW facilities engineer in writing at least ten (10) business days in advance of the time he desires the existing service to be interrupted.

1. Interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. 2. Depending upon the activities at the facility that require continuous service from

the existing utility, an interruption may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor.

a. In such cases the interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum requirement of demand for the utility including nights, weekends or holidays.

b. The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing utility services shall be as approved, in writing, by the Contracting Officer and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW.

1.8 EXCAVATION

A. Prior to commencing any excavation work the Contractor shall obtain a valid Excavation Permit from Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Offices.

B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain the necessary signatures and coordination for the permit.

C. Forms shall be obtained from Ft. Leonard Wood DPW by contacting phone number listed in Section 01000.

1.9 HOT WORK PERMIT

A. Prior to commencing any welding, soldering or other open flame work, Contractor shall obtain a hot work permit from Ft. Leonard Wood Fire and Emergency Services phone number listed in Section 01000.

1.10 BARRICADES AND WARNING DEVICES

A. Contractor shall provide barricades and lighting devices, in accordance with Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices by Department of Transportation, latest Edition, at all points of excavation and construction in vehicle traffic areas.


1.11 PROTECTION FOR OPEN FLAME DEVICES

A. When open flame and/or spark producing devices, i.e., acetylene oxygen welding equipment, electric arc welding, sweat soldering, etc., are employed for job accomplishment, the following procedures are mandatory:

1. Inspect all surroundings and equipment to insure that combustible substances are not present in any area where contact of metal at a temperature above the flashpoint of any compound is possible.

2. Ensure that no open containers or spills of combustible substances are present. 3. Ensure that ignition is not possible by conduction, convection, radiation, or

dispersion of molten metal. 4. Proper protection equipment and practices will be used, i.e., fireproof blankets,

wetting of surrounding area, removal o combustible materials where practicable, earth filled backing and portable fire extinguishers of proper type on hand.

5. When the above devices are being used notify the Post Fire Department POC listed above, 24 hours ahead of usage.

1.12 FIRE PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage.

B. All scrap materials, rubbish, and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.

C. Suitable storage space shall be provided 50 feet minimum outside the building area for storing flammable materials and paints.

1. No storage will be permitted within the building.

D. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containers and removed from the building during unused periods.

E. Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA Nos. 10 and 241, however, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall be available for each building.

F. Fire Codes: Contractor shall obey all requirements of the National Fire Codes, Army Fire Regulations and Post Fire Regulations, as they relate to his work on Post.

G. Contractor shall provide a fire extinguisher at each location where cutting and welding is being performed.

1. Where electric or gas welding or cutting is done, interposed shields of noncombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot metal.

1.13 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Work not included: Except for such auxiliary work as is shown or specified or is necessary as a part of the construction, the following work is not included in the Contract:

1. Any work shown, but marked "NOT IN CONTRACT" (N.I.C.). 2. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Vendors or

Concessionaires. 3. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by AAFES.


B. AAFES personnel will remove all existing miscellaneous food service equipment items such as cooking utensils, condiment trays and portable equipment that does not require special skills or lifting equipment to relocate.

1.14 AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. See Specification Section 01017, AAFES Furnished and Installed Equipment.

1.15 AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. See Specification Section 01018, AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment.

1.16 LINING OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor, wall, and ceiling materials that:

1. The joints line through in a straight line and in both directions wherever possible. 2. The joints relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically

placed wherever possible including:

a. Grills and registers. b. Lighting fixtures. c. Equipment. d. Miscellaneous items not specifically address but requiring alignment for

aesthetic purpose.

3. If, because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings, etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer or designated representative to determine the most satisfactory arrangement.

4. The Contractor shall establish centerlines for all trades.

1.17 INTEGRATING WORK

A. All streets, buildings, and other improvements shall be protected from damage.

B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the project work and shall not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from street or adjacent property.

C. If new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to disturb or damage the existing work more than necessary.

D. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired, and restored to its original condition at no cost to the Army and Air Force Exchange Service.

1.18 HEADROOM UNDER PIPES

A. All horizontal runs of plumbing and heating pipes and/or electrical conduit suspended from ceilings shall provide for a maximum headroom clearance, but in no case shall this clearance be less than 8'-0" without written consent from the Contracting Officer.

B. Where piping or conduit is left exposed within a room, the same shall run true to plumb, horizontal or intended planes.


C. Where possible, uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.

1.19 PATCHING GOVERNMENT-OWNED FACILITIES

A. Government-owned structures, facilities, streets, curbs, walks, etc., that are damaged or removed due to required excavations or other construction work, shall be patched, repaired or replaced, and be left in their original state of repair by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.20 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

A. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., are diagrammatic and job conditions may not always permit installation in the location shown.

B. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Contracting Officer or designated representative’s immediate attention and the relocation determined in a joint conference.

C. The Contractor will be held responsible for relocating any items without first obtaining the Contracting Officer's approval.

D. Contractor shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.21 OVERLOADING

A. The Contractor shall be held responsible for excessive overloading of any part or parts of structures beyond their safe calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery, or any other item thereon.

B. No loads shall be placed on floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safe strength.

1.22 STANDARDS

A. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard such as Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similar standard shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof, and any amendment or supplement thereto, in effect on the date of invitation for proposals, except as limited to type, class, or grade, or modified in such reference, and except as otherwise indicated.

B. The standard referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these specifications.

1. Where Federal Specifications are referred to as a measure of quality and standard, they refer to Federal Specifications established by the Procurement Division of the United States Government and are available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office.

2. Where Federal Specification numbers are used, they refer to the latest edition including amendments thereto.

3. Where Commercial Standards are referred to as a measure of quality, standard, and method of fabrication, they refer to Commercial Standards issued by the U.S. Department of Commerce.

4. Where A.S.T.M. Serial Numbers are used, they refer to the latest tentative specifications, standards specifications, standards methods, or standard method of testing issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials.


1.23 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

A. Except where tests and/or inspections in connection with materials are specified or required by applicable laws, rules, and regulations, manufacturer's certificate covering conformance with the requirements of the above mentioned Federal Specifications and Commercial Standards may be acceptable in lieu of such items.

B. Such certificates shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer and designated representative for all items so specified.

1.24 OCCUPANCY BY THE EXCHANGE

A. AAFES shall reserve the right and privilege of partial occupancy during progress of the work.

B. Access shall be allowed at all times to AAFES and its own Contractors in the endeavor.

1.25 TESTS AND REPORTS

A. See Specification Section 01410: Testing Agency Services.

1.26 REFERENCES

A. All references to the word "Government" in the specifications shall mean Army and Air Force Exchange Service (AAFES).

B. Wherever the word "provide" is used in the Contract Documents as a directive, it shall be interpreted as meaning "provide and install completely and ready for use".

C. Definitions:

1. Vendor: Person or persons selling any material item. 2. Post, Base or Installation: Location on which Project is being constructed. 3. Concessionaire: Person who is directly responsible for the lease of and operation

of the concessions such as Barber Shop or Laundry/Dry Cleaners. 4. Architect-Engineer: That person or firm responsible for preparing the working

drawings and specifications.

a. h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS 600 West Main Street, Suite 2 Post Office Box 820 Carbondale, Illinois 62901

618.457.5709

5. AAFES or Exchange: Army and Air Force Exchange Service. 6. Inspection Agency: Project Inspector contracted by AAFES.

1.27 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Coordinate with Ft. Leonard Wood Environmental report discovery of potentially hazardous materials or for potentially hazardous materials spills including oils, hydraulic fluids and other equipment lubricants by phoning the number listed in Section 01000.

B. Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos, lead-based paint, PCB’s or other hazardous materials.

C. Removal or disposal of toxic materials or asbestos is not included in this contract.


D. Ft. Leonard Wood has or will provide AAFES with Environmental Clearance for existing construction materials anticipated to be disturbed in this building with exception to the possibility of encountering the following:

1. Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) lighting ballasts. 2. Mercury containing lamps. 3. Ozone depleting substances including refrigerants.

E. PCB ballasts and mercury containing lamps shall be disposed of as potentially hazardous waste.

1. Do not break lamps or seals on ballasts. 2. Do not remove these items off Ft. Leonard Wood property.

a. Package units in code compliant leak proof containers or packaging. b. Deliver containers to Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Environmental for disposal.

F. Contractor shall use caution during demolition operations to prevent disturbance of any unknown hazardous materials assumed to contain asbestos, lead based paint or other suspect materials that encountered as work progresses.

G. Should the Contractor, during performance of work on this Project, encounter suspect hazardous materials not anticipated to be disturbed that require removal prior to progressing with work, Contractor shall:

1. Stop work immediately in that area, notify the Contracting Officer, designated representative and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW in writing stating the following prior to disturbance of such material(s):

a. Type and location of suspect material encountered. b. Extent of suspect material(s). c. Need for disturbance of such material(s). d. Options to avoid disturbing material(s).

2. Do not proceed with construction in areas of suspect hazardous materials without written direction from Contracting Officer.

H. Refer to provisions of Section 01420, Environmental Protection for additional information and procedures.

1.28 SUBMISSION OF PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer photographs taken on or about the first of every month, showing the general conditions of the work as viewed from the north, south, east, west where applicable and interior.

B. Photographs shall be digital (minimum of 1200 pixels x 1600 pixels [2 MB]) with a minimum of twenty (20) 3" x 5" standard prints accompanying each Application for Payment.

C. Each print shall be identified by date of exposure, project title, and AAFES Project Number, location and direction taken.

D. The Contractor may also submit a video of the above requirements as an option to photographs.

2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END 01010.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01017 – AAFES FURNISHED & INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

AAFES FURNISHED & INSTALLED EQUIPMENT 01017-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PROPERTY (AF/AI), (AF/VI), (VF/AI) or (VF/VI)

A. Definitions:

1. For the purposes of this Section the term AAFES shall mean the Army and Air Force Exchange Service (A) and Exchange and/or its Vendors (V).

2. For the purposes of this Section the party responsible for furnishing the product shall be designated (A) or (V) followed by (F) representing AAFES Furnished (AF) or Vendor Furnished (VF).

3. For the purposes of this Section the party responsible for installing the product shall be designated (A) or (V) followed by (I) representing AAFES Installed (AI) or Vendor Installed (VI).

B. Property: Property is indicated on the drawings.

C. Schedule: Contractor shall schedule phased completion of designated areas for beneficial occupancy by AAFES for their use prior to completion of entire project.

D. AAFES or others, including vendors and concessionaires, will furnish and install property as indicated and subject to the following performance duties set forth below:

1. Contractor's Duties:

a. Provide security of designated areas. b. Obtain equipment cut sheets, templates and/or shop drawings from AAFES

necessary to accurately provide rough-in work for power and piping for AAFES furnished and installed equipment.

c. Scheduling and advanced notification to AAFES of when property will be needed.

d. Coordination of property deliveries and temporary storage facilities for ill-timed scheduling on the part of the Contractor.

e. Provide access for AAFES and Vendor personnel. f. Coordinate work and cooperate with the installers of the property so that

installation can be accomplished in accordance with Construction Schedule. g. Provide blocking and backing rough-ins required for mounting fixtures,

equipment and signage. h. Provide new penetrations in existing building for routing piping, ductwork and

conduit to AAFES furnished equipment. i. Provide mechanical and electrical rough-ins in coordination with AFFES

furnished shop drawings, property and building systems. j. Provide final hard wired and piped connections between property and rough-

ins as indicated. k. Provide all initial property start-up and testing to ensure design functionality

prior to delivery of completed work for demonstration training by AAFES. l. Provide written notification to and coordination with Contracting Officer or

designated representative for final equipment start-up and training conducted by AAFES.


2. AAFES Duties:

a. Inspect designated area prior to use and issue statement of acceptance of area for installation of property.

b. Furnish equipment cut sheets, templates and/or shop drawings to Contractor for accurate dimensional spacing and sizing of power and piping rough-in work.

c. Deliver or arrange deliveries of property based on Contractor furnished schedule.

d. Uncrate, assemble and set property in Contractor coordinate locations. e. Make plug-in or quick couple connections between property and building

systems and Contractor provided rough-ins and devices as indicated. f. Provide all final start-up, employee demonstration training and training

documentation for equipment furnished. g. Provide custodial services for designated areas during use after beneficial

occupancy.

1.2 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 30 days in advance of the designated delivery date.

B. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished property the Contractor shall be responsible for storage and/or redelivery cost.

C. Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under this contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.

1.3 AAFES ACTIVITIES AFFECTING PROGRESS OF WORK:

A. Popeye's Food Serving and Preparation Areas: Schedule date of use and possession of these areas for installation of millwork, equipment, accessories, fixtures and signage with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays.

1.4 ACCEPTANCE OF AREAS FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

A. Construction in each area at date scheduled for its use and possession by AAFES:

1. Shall be sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so that AAFES may occupy the area for the use for which it is intended.

2. Comply with Contract Clauses titled Inspection of Construction, and Use and Possession Prior to Completion.

B. Inspection: Prior to acceptance by AAFES of an area for beneficial occupancy:

1. The Contracting Officer will conduct an inspection of the specific area. 2. A list of deficiencies will be provided to the Contractor.

C. Acceptance: If the Contracting Officer determines the specific area is sufficiently complete for beneficial occupancy by AAFES:


1. The area will be accepted in writing with the exception of the deficiencies listed. 2. The deficiencies listed shall be completed or corrected prior to final acceptance at

the completion of the project.

D. Damage: Damage resulting from AAFES' use will not be considered the Contractor's responsibility.

E. Refer to clause entitled "Final Inspection and Acceptance" of the AAFES "General Provisions".

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 POPEYE'S SERVING/PREPARATION AREA:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Serving/Preparation Area Items: AAFES will furnish, install, provide final start up and employee training for the items indicated (AF/AI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination and rough-ins, hard-piped and hard-wired services and final connections, initial start-up, operational testing and adjustment for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless noted otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

2.2 POPEYE'S WALK-IN UNIT AREA:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Walk-in Cooler/Freezer Unit Items: AAFES will furnish, install shelving unit items indicated (AF/AI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination for installation of items furnished and installed by AAFES unless noted otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.


END 01017.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01018 – AAFES FURNISHED/ CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

AAFES FURNISHED/ CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT 01018-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (AF/CI):

A. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed (AF/CI) and Vendor Furnished/Contractor Installed (VF/CI) equipment shall be handled in accordance with the "Army and Air Force Exchange Service General Provisions" clause entitled "AAFES Furnished Property".

B. Definitions:

1. For the purposes of this Section the term AAFES shall mean the Army and Air Force Exchange Service (A) and Exchange and/or its Vendors (V).

2. For the purposes of this Section the party responsible for furnishing the product shall be designated (A) or (V) followed by (F) representing AAFES Furnished (AF) or Vendor Furnished (VF).

3. For the purposes of this Section the party responsible for installing the product shall be designated (C) representing Contractor Installed (CI).

C. Property: Property is indicated on the drawings.

D. AAFES will furnish equipment indicted for installation by the Contractor.

E. Contractor shall furnish:

1. Coordination and confirmation of exact equipment dimensions and rough-in requirements for all equipment furnished by AAFES.

2. Provide all rough-ins, final connections to hard-piped and hard-wired equipment and initial property start-up and testing to ensure design functionality prior to delivery of completed work to AAFES for demonstration training.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DINING AREA:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Signage and Accessory Items: AAFES will furnish the lighted Food Concept identification signage and logo on Dining Room face of Serving Line wall for installation by Contractor (AF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Complete installation of lighted signage, including appropriate rough-ins, services, final connections, initial start-up and operational testing for items furnished by AAFES unless noted otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these specifications.

2.2 POPEYE'S SERVING/PREPARATION AREA:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Serving/Preparation Area Equipment: AAFES will furnish the equipment, fixtures and signage indicated for installation in the Popeye's Serving/Preparation Areas by the Contractor (AF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Complete installation of equipment, fixtures and signage, including appropriate rough-ins, services, final connections, initial start-up, operational testing for items furnished by AAFES unless noted otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these specifications.


2.3 POPEYE'S WALK-IN UNIT & EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT AREA:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Walk-in Cooler/Freezer Unit and Exterior Area Equipment: AAFES will furnish the equipment, fixtures and used cooking oil tank/shroud assembly indicated for installation in the Popeye's Walk-in Cooler/Freezer Unit and Exterior Equipment Area by the Contractor (AF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Complete installation of equipment, fixtures and used cooking oil tank/shroud, including appropriate rough-ins, services, final connections, initial start-up, operational testing for items furnished by AAFES unless noted otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these specifications.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES

A. Designate required delivery date for each product.

1. Notify the Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing at least 60 days in advance of the date that AAFES furnished equipment and furnishings will be needed.

2. Shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all plumbing and electrical rough-ins will be furnished by AAFES.

B. The equipment, fixtures and furnishings will be received at the job site by a representative of AAFES who will jointly, with the Contractor, verify condition and quantities.

1. The representative will then effect receipted transfer of custody of the equipment, fixtures and furnishings to the Contractor.

2. After receipt of equipment, fixtures and furnishings Contractor shall:

a. Coordinate all aspects of equipment, fixture, furnishings, signage and graphics installations with AAFES and/or AAFES supplier/vendor for location, mounting and/or placement into construction.

b. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, provide rough-ins and make final hard wired and hard piped connections to equipment and fixture items.

c. Installation of shall be performed in accordance with the specifications, equipment, fixture and furnishing plans and schedules shown on the Drawings and the rough-in drawings provided by AAFES.

d. Construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure AAFES furnished equipment in place.

e. Repair or replace items damaged as a result of Contractor's operations. f. Apply finish indicated, if any. g. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, provide rough-ins and make final

hard wired connections to signage and/or remote power supply units where required.

1.) Most electronic AAFES signs require installation of remote power supplies (transformers) in accessible locations and routing of wiring between sign and power supply units.

2.) Due to limitations in distance between sign and power supply units, location of units shall be coordinated prior to installation.


3.) Contractor shall make all provisions for routing wiring from sign to power supply units and provide line voltage power to power supply units as part of their Contract.

a) Provide 12" x 12" access panel(s) wherever power supply units must be located above an inaccessible ceiling space such as gypsum drywall.

b) Provide J-box for mounting power supply unit(s) at all locations, whether accessible or inaccessible conditions are encountered.

c) Provide 3/4" conduit from back of sign panel or individual letters to J-box for routing wiring at all locations, whether accessible or inaccessible conditions are encountered for AAFES routing of wiring between.

d) Provide line voltage circuit to J-box at each location requiring a power supply unit and make final connections to power supply.

3. The installation shall be complete in all respects, including mechanical and electrical hook ups, and put into good operating condition.

C. AAFES Duties:

1. Deliver all AAFES furnished items to the job site. 2. Uncrate, assemble, set in final position, align, join and level all equipment and

fixtures. 3. Uncrate, assemble, set in final position, level, install power supply units and route

wiring between sign and power supply units in conduit furnished by Contractor. 4. Schedule delivery date with supplier in accordance with Progress Chart. 5. Provide Contractor with installation drawings and instructions. 6. Provide Contractor with shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all

plumbing and electrical rough-ins.

3.2 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES:

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 60 days in advance of the designated delivery date.

B. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished equipment the Contractor shall be responsible for storage and delivery cost.

C. Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under his contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.

END 01018.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01030 – SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES

SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES 01030-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE

A. Substitution submission procedures.

B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. AAFES Solicitation/Proposal/Award Form, contained in the AAFES solicitation package.

B. AAFES Instructions to Offerors and Conditions of Proposal/Awards form, contained in the AAFES solicitation package.

C. Individual specification Sections relevant to the work required under each product.

1.3 GENERAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. List proposed substitutions on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form.

B. Substitutions listed on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at AAFES's discretion.

C. Accepted substitutions will be identified by Solicitation Amendment.

D. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each option.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING SOLICITATION

A. Prior to solicitation closing, Contracting Officer will consider written requests to amend Solicitation Documents to ADD products not specified provided such requests are received with sufficient advance time to issue an Amendment, which must be issued 10 days prior to proposal date.

1. Requests received without sufficient advance time to review and be incorporated into an Amendment will not be considered with timing as determined by Contracting Officer.

2. If a request is approved, an Amendment will be issued indicating approval.

B. No substitutions will be considered after award of Contract except under one or more of the following conditions:

1. Required for compliance with final interpretations of code requirements or insurance regulations.

2. Unavailability of specified product, through no fault of Contractor. 3. Subsequent information discloses inability of specified product to perform properly

or fit designated space. 4. Manufacturer or fabricator refusal to certify or guarantee performance of product

as specified for intended use.

SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES 01030-2

1.5 SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS

A. In the event a material substitution is to be submitted, the Offeror will follow the procedure outlined in Paragraphs A1 thru 3 below and Paragraph B1 thru 6:

1. Proposing Offeror shall submit three copies of request for substitution. 2. Request shall be accompanied by complete data on proposed substitution

substantiating compliance with Contract Documents including product identification and description, performance and test data, references and samples where applicable, and an itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified.

3. Request shall be accompanied by accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product specified, whether or not modification of Contract sum is to be a consideration.

B. Requests for substitution based on the above, when forwarded by Offeror to Contracting Officer, are understood to mean that Offeror:

1. Represents that he/she has personally investigated proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to product specified.

2. Represents that he/she has coordinated the substitute product with subcontractors for compatibility of installation into Project and that no additional costs will be incurred due to acceptance of the substitution.

3. Will provide same guarantee for substitution that he/she would for specified product.

4. Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution.

5. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution, making such changes as may be required for work to be completed in all respects.

6. Product substitutions price increases will not be considered, only price decreases.

C. Substitutions will not be considered if:

1. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing submittals without formal request required above.

2. For implementation they require a substantial revision of Contract Documents in order to accommodate use.

3. They are unacceptable to the Contracting Officer.

D. NO FURTHER SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE PERMITTED AFTER CONTRACT AWARD.

E. Refer to AAFES Proposal Substitution Form (CSI) attached to the end of this Section.



END 01030. ATTACHMENT:

CSI PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION FORM (1 page)

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01045 – CUTTING & PATCHING

CUTTING & PATCHING 01045-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.


A. Section 01010 – Summary of Work.

B. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

C. Section 07270 – Firestopping.

D. Individual Product Specification Sections:

1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. 2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of AAFES or others.

B. Include in request:

1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed Work and Products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of AAFES or others. 7. Written permission of affected entity. 8. Date and time work will be executed.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.

CUTTING & PATCHING 01045-2

C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work.

B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

C. Provide protection from elements for areas that may be exposed by uncovering work.

3.3 CUTTING

A. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work.

B. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.

C. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.

D. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

E. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of Fire Protection, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communications and Alarms and Surveillance work.

F. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and elements where finish surfaces will be exposed.

G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.

1. Pneumatic tools shall not be allowed without prior approval from Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.4 PATCHING

A. Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.

B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.

C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

D. Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

H. Refinish surfaces:

1. Match adjacent finish. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. 3. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END 01045.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01051 – GRADES, LINES & LEVELS

GRADES, LINES & LEVELS 01051-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Contractor provide:

1. Lay out of Work. 2. Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements.

B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:

1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 2. Section 01010 –Summary of Work. 3. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 4. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor shall provide:

1. Coordination, supervision and layout of overall Work between various components and systems of Work that must fit together in a neat and orderly manner to complete design intent of the Project.

a. Coordination, supervision and layouts of own Work. b. Coordination, supervision and of layouts of subcontractors. c. Coordination, supervision and layouts of AAFES Furnished/AAFES

Installed equipment by AAFES and/or its Vendors. d. Coordination, supervision and layout of AAFES Furnished/Contractor

Installed equipment. 2. Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements for Work. 3. Identify any conflicts between various components or systems and coordinate order of

installation progression to avoid potential conflicts so that work can progress in an orderly manner.

4. Submit RFI's where identified conflicts cannot be resolved through Contractor coordination and obtain written direction from Contracting Officer or designated representative prior to progressing with unresolved issues.

5. Contractor shall not receive additional compensation for changes required to resolve conflicts due to failure on his part to provide coordination, supervision, layout and identification of potential conflicts between items and systems of Work.

6. Employ qualified personnel to perform coordination, supervision and layout Work.

1.3 Contracting Officer will furnish:

1. Locations, dimensions and data pertaining to other improvements so far as known (shown of drawings).

2. Information and contact person for the purpose of Contractor coordination and supervision of AAFES furnished equipment and work.

END 01051.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01060 – AAFES SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES

AAFES SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES 01060-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor required health and safety plan.

1. Contractor is responsible for risk assessment plan. 2. Contractor shall maintain OSHA permissible exposure limits related by the risk

assessment of 25 ppm (170 mg/cubic meter) during any 8 hour work shift for a 40-hour week

B. Construction Hazard Plan.


A. Submittals – Section 01340 (Construction Hazard Plan, Job Safety and Health Plan, Emergency Response Plan).

B. AAFES Environmental Protection – Section 01420.

C. Project Record Documents - Section 01720.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Publication:

a. EM 385-1-1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual (Oct. 92)

2. OSHA 1910 R.E.G. - 29CFR, OSHA 1910.120

B. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for AAFES approval: The following items shall be submitted for AAFES approval:

1. Designation of Safety Representative - The Contractor shall designate in writing a qualified employee OSHA Trained under 1910.120 responsible for the overall supervision of all accident prevention activities.

a. Duties shall include ensuring applicable safety requirements are incorporated into work methods and inspecting the job site to ensure that safety measures and instructions are actually being applied.

b. This person shall be on site at all time that work is in progress.

2. The Contractor shall be trained/certified in OSHA 1910.120 procedures. 3. All other employees performing site work will meet OSHA 1910 training

requirements for their job capacity.

B. Submittals for Information Only - The following items shall be Contractor certified:

1. Job Hazard Analysis: Contractor shall develop a job hazard analysis for presentation at the pre-construction conference.


a. The Contractor's job hazard analysis shall list potential hazards that could arise during the course of the work.

b. For each hazard, the applicable paragraph of EM 385-1-1 shall be cited.

2. Job Safety and Health Plan.

a. The Contractor shall develop a Job Safety and Health Plan for presentation at the Pre-construction conference.

b. The Contractor's Safety Plan shall make whatever provisions are necessary to conduct his work in accordance with current OSHA standards.

c. The safety and health plan must specifically address the excavation portion of construction and will be specific to all Hazardous Materials (Haz-Mats), and incorporate decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment, continuous vapor monitoring, a prohibition against eating in proximity to the site, and a prohibition against the smoking of tobacco products in the proximity to the site.

d. The following are minimum requirements for the health and safety plan:

1.) The Contractor is responsible for all compounds and degradation products addressed by the Risk Assessment Plan.

2.) Specialized Designs: Specialized designs will be provided when the situation requires.

a) Examples of such designs include, but are not limited to, vapor barriers in areas of known vapor hazard.

3.) Safety Plans: Safety Plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor for construction areas identified by the installation and/or AAFES as areas of known hazards only.

a) These plans are required by 29 CFR 1910 and are the responsibility of the Contractor.

b) This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.

4.) Minimum Requirements for the Health and Safety Plan are as follows:

a) Must be kept on site, and must be written. b) Will contain a hazard analysis (safety and health risk) for each

site task and operation (to be supplied by the installation). c) Will include employee training (per paragraph (3) of 1910.120). d) Will include personal protective equipment to be used by

employees for each of the site tasks and operations (paragraph (g) (5) of 1910.120).

e) Will include provision for medical surveillance (paragraph (f) of 1910.120).

f) Will include the frequency and types of air monitoring, personal monitoring, environmental sampling techniques and instruments to be used (their maintenance and calibration).

g) Will include a site control program (per paragraph (d) of 1910.120) to be coordinated with the installation.

h) Will include a decontamination procedure (per paragraph (k) of 1910.120).

i) Will include an emergency response plan (per paragraph (1) of 1910.120).

j) Will include a confined space entry procedure (per 1910.146, 147 or program equivalent).


k) Will include provision for spill containment (per paragraph (j) of 1910.120).

l) Will include pre-entry briefings (prior to each site task activity) for all employees involved in the task, supervision, or emergency response.

m) Written verification of adherence to the "plan" by a Safety and Health Supervisor is required (the supervisor must meet the 1910.120 training requirements for supervisors).

n) Deficiencies will be corrected immediately upon discovery and after consultation with the AAFES Contracting Officer.

e. Hazard Response Plan: The planned, unplanned or non-predicted discovery of such hazards as transite pipe, contaminated soils, and other possible hazards will be addressed within an Emergency Response Plan (ERP) by Contractor.

f. This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.

g. Material Safety Data Sheets will be maintained at the site for all hazardous materials in use.

1.5 MONTHLY SAFETY MEETINGS

A. Schedule safety meetings with Contractor and subcontractor personnel on a monthly basis in conjunction with Progress/Pay Meetings.

1. Minutes of safety meetings shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor. 2. Concurrence signed by Inspection Section and the original submitted to the

Contracting Officer for inclusion in the contract file.

1.6 ACCIDENT REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPING

A. Reporting and record keeping shall be in accordance with Section 2, EM 385-1-1.

B. Telephonic reports of injuries or property damage will be made as soon as possible after the incident and will be followed by a copy of U.S. Army Investigation Accident Report (DA Form 285).


3 EXECUTION

3.1 LIFE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall comply with EM 385-1-1 and all provisions of this section during the life of the contract.

3.2 HEAD PROTECTION (HARD HATS)

A. All work sites under this contract are designated Hard Hat Areas.

B. Contractor shall post the area in accordance with Paragraph 7.C.03, EM 385-1-1 and shall ensure that all personnel, vendors and visitors use hard hats while within the limits of the work site.

END 01060.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01090 – AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES

AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES 01090-1

1 GENERAL


A. Reference Standards.

B. Licenses and Permits.

C. Safety.

D. Affirmative Procurement Program.

E. Ozone Depleting Substances.

F. Lead Based Paint.

G. Cleaning & Debris Control.

H. Nuisance Dumping & Polluting Activities.

I. Stormwater Pollution Prevention.

J. Excavation at IRP Sites.

K. Contaminated Soil.

L. Suspected Hazardous Materials.

M. Oil-Filled or Impregnated Electrical Components.

N. Spill Response and Reporting.

O. Waste Disposal and Environmental Protection.


A. Section 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Leonard Wood.

B. Section 01010 – Summary of Work.

C. Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures.

D. Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.

E. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

F. Section 01400 – Quality Control.

G. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services.


H. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

I. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

J. Section 01590 – Field Offices & Sheds.

K. Section 01600 – Material & Equipment.

L. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Federal, State and Local Codes and Ordinances take precedence over these Specifications and Drawings where conflicts occur, unless the Drawings or Specifications call for more stringent requirements.

1. Notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative of conflicts in writing.

B. Comply with all applicable laws, building and construction codes, OSHA Safety and Health Regulations and applicable requirements of any governmental agency under whose jurisdiction this Work is being performed.

C. Obtain a copy of standards referenced in the various Specification Sections.

1. Maintain copy at the jobsite during execution of Work to which the standard applies.

D. Construction that is not governed by the contract specifications will be governed by the more stringent provisions of the latest published edition or statute adopted edition, of the following applicable codes, regulations and standards.

1. ACI – American Concrete Institute.

a. ACI 318-11 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. b. ACI 530-11 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.

2. ADAAG – Americans With Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.

3. AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction.

a. AISC 360-10, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

4. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute,

a. AISI S100-07, Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members, with Supplement 2.

5. ANSI – American National Standards Institute. 6. ASCE/SEI – American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute.

a. ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

7. ASHRAE – American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.

a. Energy Conservation in New Buildings Design (ASHRAE 90.1). b. Standard for Natural and Mechanical Ventilation (No. 62).

8. ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 9. ASPE – American Society of Plumbing Engineers. 10. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials, Standards and Certifications. 11. ATBCB – Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.


12. AWS – American Welding Society.

a. AWS D1.1-1.4, Structural Welding Code, latest edition. b. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum, latest edition.

13. CFR – Code of Federal Regulations. 14. CPSP – Consumer Products Safety Commission.

a. Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Material.

15. CRSI – Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.

a. Manual of Standard Practice, 2009 edition.

16. EPA – Environmental Protection Agency.

a. Oil Pollution Prevention, 40 CFR, Ch.1, Part 112, 1July 2004 Edition.

17. FM – Factory Mutual, Standards and Certifications. 18. IBC – International Building Code, 2015 Edition. 19. IECC – International Energy Conservation Code, 2012 Edition. 20. IMC – International Mechanical Code, 2012. 21. IPC – International Plumbing Code, 2012. 22. MIL-STD-3007F – Standard Practice for unified Facilities Criteria and Unified

Facilities Guide Specifications, 15 February 2006. 23. NCMA – National Concrete Masonry Association.

a. Specifications for the design and Construction of Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry.

24. NESHAPS – National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. 25. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association.

a. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2015. b. NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, 2013. c. NFPA 13, Wet Pipe Sprinkler Standard, 2013. d. NFPA 17A, Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2013. e. NFPA 54, ANSI Z223.1-2015 National Fuel Gas Code, 2015. f. NFPA 58, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code, 2011. g. NFPA 70, National Electric Code, 2014. h. NFPA 72, Fire Alarm Code, 2013. i. NFPA 96, Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations, 2014.

26. NLMA – Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association.

a. National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings.

27. OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

a. Occupational Safety and Health Act.

28. PCA – Portland Concrete Association.

a. Concrete Floors on Grade.

29. PCI – Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. 30. UFAS – Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, U.S. Architectural and

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 31. UFC – Unified Facilities Criteria.

a. UFC 1-200-01, General Building Requirements, 1 July 2013 (including Change 2, 1 November 2014).

b. UFC 1-300-08, Criteria for Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real Property, 16 April 2009 (including Change 2, August 2011).


c. UFC 3-120-10, Interior Design 15 June 2006 (including Change 1, July 2007).

d. UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering, 1 June 2013. e. UFC 3-202-02, Landscape Architecture, 23 February 2009 (including Change

1, November 2009). f. UFC 3-310-01, Structural Load Data, 25 May 2005. g. UFC 3-310-04, Seismic Design for Buildings, 1 June 2013. h. UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical Engineering, 1 July 2013. i. UFC 3-410-01, Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems, 1 July

2013 (including Change 1, October 2014). j. UFC 3-420-01, Plumbing Systems, 25 October 2004 (including Change 8, 27

October 2009). k. UFC 3-501-01, Electrical Engineering, 3 February 2010 replaces 3-500-10

(draft) and 3-500-10N (draft) (including Change 2, 1 July 2012). l. UFC 3-600-01, Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities, 26 September 2006

(including Change 3, 1 March 2013). m. UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, 09

February 2012 (including Change 1, 01 October 2013). n. UFC 4-010-02, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff Distances for Building

(FOUO), 09 February 2012.

32. UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Standards and Certifications. 33. Other applicable codes and standards as applicable or as referenced by the

individual specification Sections.

1.4 LICENSES AND PERMITS

A. Contractor shall obtain and maintain current for the duration of this Contract, all required Federal, State and local licenses and permits.

1. All associated fees and taxes shall be paid by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

B. Obtain from Base security all required vehicle and entry permits as specified in Section 01010, Project Summary.

C. Obtain any additional permits as required by Ft. Leonard Wood DPW at no additional cost to the Government.

1.5 SAFETY

A. Comply with all Federal and State regulations concerning safety of personnel and equipment.

1. All Contractor personnel shall wear hard hats and steel toe safety shoes while on the project site.

2. All Contractor personnel shall wear hearing protection (ear muffs or ear plugs) when required by OSHA regulations.

B. Ensure that lock out, tag out procedures are established and used as directed by 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Comply with all safety, traffic and protection requirements in effect on Ft. Leonard Wood.

D. Provide safety barriers around open excavations, openings in floors and other hazards created by the Contractor’s activities.


E. The Contracting Officer may direct the Contractor to cease activities that are deemed unsafe.

1.6 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT PROGRAM

A. These standards apply to all new construction, demolition, rehabilitation, alteration, modification, repair, and maintenance of existing facilities.

B. In an effort to comply with the affirmative procurement requirements of Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) and Executive Order 13101, the government strongly promotes the use of the recycled and recovered materials and products identified in the Environmental Protection Agency’s Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines.

C. Recycled and recovered materials and products shall be used throughout the project in quantities as set forth in the technical Sections of the specifications and subject to compliance with performance requirements of these specifications.

1.7 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

A. No ozone depleting substances (refrigerants or any other compounds) shall be used in any capacity on this project.

1.8 LEAD BASE PAINT

A. No paint with a lead content of 0.06 percent or greater shall be used in any capacity on this project.

1.9 CLEANING AND DEBRIS CONTROL

A. During the term of this Contract, the Contractor shall remove any materials and equipment that are not required for the completion of the work as promptly as possible.

1. All debris shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. 2. The Contractor shall take particular care to eliminate any hazards created by his

operations.

B. The Contractor is responsible for any damage caused by his debris without additional cost to the Government.

C. The Contractor shall maintain at all times during his work at this Project Site a strict windblown debris control program.

1. This program shall ensure no windblown debris or other debris from his work shall contaminate or interfere with any access to or operation of any facility or any parking area, road or street.

1.10 NUISANCE DUMPING AND POLLUTING ACTIVITIES

A. Polluting, dumping, or discharging of any harmful, nuisance, or regulated materials (such as concrete truck washout, vehicle maintenance fluids, residue from saw cutting operations, solid waste or hazardous substances) into building drains, site drains, streams, waterways, holding ponds or to the ground surface is not permitted.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damages resulting from dumping or discharges.


2. Contractor shall conduct activities in such a fashion to avoid creating any legal nuisance, including but not limited to, suppression of noise and dust, control of erosion, and implementation of other measures as necessary to minimize off site impacts of work activities.

B. Fugitive dust emissions (airborne dust generated by vehicles operating on unpaved surfaces, transfer or transport of dust producing materials, etc.) shall be controlled at the construction site, along haul routes and at staging areas.

1. Water spraying shall be conducted as necessary to minimize fugitive dust generation.

1.11 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION

A. Prior to clearing, grading or excavating, the Contractor shall notify the Maryland Department of the Environment, Water Management Administration (WMA) as indicated on Civil Drawings.

B. Coordinate required onsite Pre-Site Construction Meeting a minimum of seven (7) days prior to commencement of any site work.

C. If contaminated ground water should be encountered during excavation activities Contractor shall notify Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Environmental immediately and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

1.12 CONTAMINATED SOIL

A. If unexpected contaminated soil is encountered while performing work, stop work immediately, notify Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Environmental and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

B. Do not resume work until approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.13 SUSPECTED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Any suspect hazardous materials encountered during demolition or construction shall immediately be brought to the attention of Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Environmental and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

B. Work shall not resume until the Contracting Officer is satisfied that the materials are not hazardous.

C. Should suspect materials be found to be hazardous, Contractor shall immediately take steps to contain the material, so further damage and contamination does not occur.

D. Contractor shall then submit a proposal for removal.

1.14 OIL-FILLED OR IMPREGNATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Notify Base Environmental Safety Office before demolition or installation of any oil-filled electrical equipment.

B. All transformers and light ballasts, unless labeled “No PCBs”, shall be disposed through the Base Hazardous Material and Waste Handling facility.


1.15 SPILL RESPONSE AND REPORTING

A. Spills of hazardous waste, hazardous materials or non-regulated substances such as oils, antifreeze, grease, latex paint, hydraulic fluid, etc. shall immediately be reported.

1. If a spill occurs after normal working hours, or on a weekend or holiday, report spills to the Installation Fire Department.

B. Contractor is encouraged to have a supply of absorbent pads on-site to aid in immediate clean-up of smaller spills, such as oil, coolant or hydraulic fluid leaks from vehicles or equipment.

C. Spill notification placards are to be placed on the job site prior to construction.

D. Contractor shall develop a spill plan.

E. The format for the plan shall be approved by Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Environmental prior to construction.

1.16 WASTE DISPOSAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall comply, and ensure that all subcontractors comply, with all Federal, State, local laws, and regulations, ordinances and standards related to environmental pollution control and abatement in effect and the specific requirements stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. All hazardous wastes as defined in 40 CFR, Part 261, shall be collected and disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR, Parts 260-268.

C. The Contractor is responsible for properly storing, marking, labeling, securing and transporting hazardous wastes.

D. All hazardous wastes shall be collected in contractor furnished DOT/UN approved containers and taken to Ft. Leonard Wood Hazardous Waste Facility for disposal.

1. Call the Hazardous Waste Facility prior to transporting wastes to the facility to coordinate delivery of the waste materials.

2. The Contractor shall not store hazardous waste on Post for more than 30 days.

E. Any previously unidentified suspected hazardous materials encountered during performance of the work of the contract shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

F. All general construction wastes, other than those specifically allowed, or required, to be disposed of on the Post shall be legally disposed at an off-base sanitary landfill.

G. Contractor shall refer to Waste Disposal Form attached at the end of this Section.



END 01 13 00.


(POST OR BASE) WASTE DISPOSAL Contractor shall obtain all permits required by federal, state and local laws for the construction activities involved.

Contractor shall perform all work in such a manner as to minimize the polluting of air, water or land and shall, within reasonable limits, control noise and the disposal of solid waste materials, as well as other pollutants.

Contractor shall ensure that all construction, repair, maintenance operations and practices and waste disposal performed under this contract shall be in strict compliance with all applicable city, county, state and federal environmental laws and regulations.

1. Hazardous and Non-hazardous Waste Disposal: There are no known existing sources of hazardous waste involved with this project. If the Contractor generates or discovers suspected hazardous waste it shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for review and direction on how to proceed with handling and disposal. As part of the proposed implementation above and prior to on-site construction, the Contractor shall submit for approval, a plan for storing, characterizing and disposing of hazardous and non-hazardous waste materials resulting from the work under this contract. Waste includes, but is not limited to, paint waste, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers. If any waste material is dumped in unauthorized areas, the Contractor shall remove the materials and restore the area to the condition of the adjacent undisturbed areas. Where directed and approved by the Contracting Officer, contaminated ground shall be excavated, characterized, stored, disposed of and replaced with suitable fill material at the expense of the Contractor. All waste disposal shall be in strict accordance with local, state and federal requirements and regulations. Waste paint, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers shall be disposed of off base by the Contractor, at the Contractors’ expense. Any soil contaminated through spillage shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Soil that is required to be removed shall be replaced by similar soil approved by the Contracting Officer.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01140 – PHASING

PHASING 01140-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


1. Coordination. 2. Barriers. 3. Temporary Utilities. 4. Notifications. 5. Schedule revisions.


A. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

B. Section 01010 –Summary of Work.

C. Section 01045 – Cutting & Patching.

D. Section 01051 – Grades, Lines & Levels.

E. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules.

F. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

G. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

H. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

I. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

J. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.


A. Construction phasing shall serve as a guide in managing the construction progress.

B. In preparing construction phasing system, scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Construction shall be phased and coordinated with the Contracting Officer in order to keep to a minimum, any disruption of, or interference with, the operation of the existing retail facility.

1. Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative within 15 days of notice to proceed if any problems or conflicts concerning indicated construction phasing are evident.

2. The Exchange will be in operation, throughout this contract.

a. Contractor shall submit Contractor prepared Construction Progress Schedule in accordance with Section 01320.

b. Submittal shall illustrate a detailed schedule of work utilizing the priority and sequence of work shown on the Construction Phasing Plan.

3. The Contractor shall keep the Contracting Officer and designated representative advised of any anticipated changes in the work schedule in sufficient time to permit adjustment of store operations, without adversely affecting the ability of the Express to function as required.

B. Phasing as shown on the drawings is the required sequence.

PHASING 01140-2

1. The Contractor must submit the schedule, for review, to the Contracting Officer within 15 days after execution of a contract.

2. Items specified herein are complementary to work items shown on the drawings schedule.

C. Beneficial occupancy inspection of finishes only will be made at the end of each work item to allow early access for fixture installations.

D. All phases shall be included in the contract performance period.

1.5 BARRIERS

A. Building areas adjacent to areas to be renovated will not be vacated by the Exchange.

B. Temporary barriers shall be erected by the Contractor as work progresses as specified in Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

C. Temporary Barriers shall be construction generally in the locations and type indicated as required.

1. Dust Barriers and Opaque Dust Barriers shall be installed from floor to ceiling, or from floor to underside of roof deck, to seal operational portions of the retail facility from areas of construction.

2. Security Barriers shall be installed similarly and secured up to the bottom of roof deck without puncturing deck or roofing materials and shall be weather-tight where separating interior and exterior spaces.

3. Temporary Opaque and Security barriers exposed to customer view shall be painted with two coats of color as indicated or required by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.6 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain temporary or permanent power, water, HVAC, fire alarm and sprinkler systems in areas under construction and areas occupied by the Exchange.

1. Provide all isolation valves in piping and temporary ductwork necessary to keep systems on line in occupied areas for mechanical systems at no additional cost to AAFES including, but not limited to:

a. Air-handling units. b. Supply piping. c. Water lines. d. Sprinkler system and other similar items.

2. Provide all temporary modifications required to existing electrical systems to maintain these systems in occupied areas at no additional cost to AAFES including, but not limited to:

a. Power. b. Lighting. c. Communication. d. Data. e. Fire Alarm and other special electrical systems.

B. Permanently reroute sanitary sewer lines in areas where lines are affected by construction in order to maintain sanitary facilities in operational condition prior to demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END 01140.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01210 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01210-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Preparation of required documents.

B. Submittal procedures

C. Review procedures.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01220 – AAFES Progress Meetings. 3. Section 01230 – Progress Payments. 4. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 5. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Contractor shall submit Schedule of Values (CSV) to Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer for review within (15) days after notification of award of Contract.

B. Contractor, upon request by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, shall support any values given with data that will substantiate value correctness.

C. Contractor shall use approved CSV as a basis of periodical progress application for payment.

1.4 FORM OF SUBMITTAL

A. CSV Submittal format:

1. Typewritten, on Application and Certificate for Payment (AIA Form G-702) and Continuation Sheet for G-702 (AIA Form G-703) available from the AIA Bookstore, 911 Washington Avenue - #225, St. Louis, Missouri 6310, (314) 231-4252.

2. Contractor’s form, similar to the AIA Forms specified above, may be substituted as long as all information is formatted identically to AIA format.

B. Contractor shall use specification index as a basis of example and format for listing and itemizing costs of work.

1.5 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.

1. Itemize so that amounts shown for individual items do not exceed $5,000.00 wherever possible.

a. Break large items of work into smaller items, groups or phases to achieve specified amounts.

b. Individual items of equipment may be itemized in lump sum amounts for each piece of equipment.

c. Itemize demolition into separate line item or items. d. Labor and materials shall be separate line items if Contractor intends to request

payment for stored materials. e. List all subcontractors and supplier contracts that exceed $500.00.

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01210-2

2. Format to indicate separate line items for:

a. Overhead and profit. b. Bonds. c. Insurance. d. General Requirements and mobilization. e. Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose

subcontract exceeds $500.00. f. Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.

3. Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from Labor.

B. Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.

C. Contractor shall prepare CSV in sequential order of accepted construction practice.

1.6 REVIEW AND SUBMITTAL

A. If required after review by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, revise and resubmit Schedule of Values in accordance with initial submittal requirements.

B. Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer will approve final submittal.

C. Architect-Engineer will distribute approved copies to AAFES and Contractor for use in preparing Pay Requests.

END 01210.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01220 – AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS

AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS 01220-1

1 GENERAL


A. AAFES Progress Meetings.



B. Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.

C. Section 01210 – Schedule of Values.

D. Section 01230 – Progress Payments.

E. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

F. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents.

1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The AAFES representative shall schedule and preside at monthly progress meetings.

B. The AAFES representative shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants.

C. Location of Meetings: Construction office, or as directed in the notice.

D. Attendance Required:

1. AAFES representatives. 2. Architect-Engineer. 3. Architect-Engineer’s on-site representative. 4. Contractor's project manager. 5. Contractor's superintendent. 6. Major sub-contractors and suppliers. 7. Ft. Leonard Wood representative(s).

E. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Coordination of projected progress.

AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS 01220-2

10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to work.

F. Meeting Minutes: AAFES designated representative or Architect-Engineer shall record meeting minutes, and distribute copies to the participants and Contracting Officer within five (5) business days of the meeting.



END 01220.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01230 – PROGRESS PAYMENTS

PROGRESS PAYMENTS 01230-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 COST BREAKDOWN

A. After the Notice to Proceed is issued, the Contractor shall be required to provide a breakdown of work as indicated in Section 01210, Schedule of Values.

B. Each item of work must also indicate the subcontractor who will perform this work.

1.2 PREPARATION OF PAY REQUEST

A. Upon execution of the Notice to Proceed and prior to scheduling the first Progress/Pay Meeting the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Schedule of Values (CSV) to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer for review and approval in accord with requirements of Section 01210.

B. Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.

1. Itemize so that amounts shown for individual items do not exceed specified maximum amount indicated.

2. Format to indicate separate line items for overhead and profit, bonds, insurance, general requirements and mobilization as described.

a. Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose subcontract exceeds limits set forth.

b. Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.

3. Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from Labor.

C. Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.

1.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS

A. Format and Data Required:

1. Submit pencil copy applications to Architect-Engineer for review at least 5-days in advance of scheduled Progress/Pay Meeting.

2. Applications shall be itemized on forms and in format required for CSV with values broken down as specified above.

B. Preparation of Pencil Copy Application for Each Progress Payment:

1. Application form:

a. Fill in required information, including that for change orders executed prior to date of submittal of application.

b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets.

c. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of contracting firm.

2. Continuation sheets:

a. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item.


b. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored.

1.) Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of Values.

c. List each change order executed prior to date of submission at end of continuation sheets.

1.) List by change order number and description the same as for an original component item of work.

3. Architect-Engineer will use submitted pencil copy of application for payment as a basis for evaluating completed work upon arrival to Site for monthly scheduled Progress/Pay Meetings.

a. Architect-Engineer will review progress of work with Contractor’s on-site Superintendent and make any changes in amounts requested.

b. The Architect-Engineer will present reviewed and initialed pencil copy of pay request to Contractor at Progress/Pay Meeting for formal preparation and presentation to Contracting Officer for payment.

C. Preparation of Formal Application for Each Progress Payment:

1. The Contractor shall prepare formal typewritten copy of application for payment, edited as determined and agreed to on initialed pencil copy at the Progress/Pay Meeting.

2. Submit one (1) signed/notarized copy to Architect-Engineer via e-mail for formal approval, signature and presentation to the Contracting Officer.

a. Architect-Engineer will forward approved, signed application to Contracting Officer via e-mail within two (2) days of receipt from Contractor.

b. Upon acceptance of e-mailed application, payment to Contractor will be processed by AAFES subject to General Provisions of the Contract.

3. Submit one (1) additional hard copy to Architect-Engineer for formal approval and transmittal to Contracting Officer.

a. Attach current Construction Photos per requirements of Section 01010. b. Attach revised Progress Schedule per requirements of Section 01310. c. Attach Summary Report of progress since last request for payment and

anticipated progress until next request for payment.

D. Each request for payment shall be accompanied by the certification contained in Exhibit A, Clause 45b(2)(b) with Invoice number included.

E. If requested by AAFES, Contractor shall submit receipts or other vouchers showing his payments for material and labor, including payments to subcontractors.

1.4 STORED MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT NOT INCORPORATED IN THE WORK

A. Progress Payments will be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work provided that:

1. Such materials and equipment have been delivered to and suitably stored at site or some other location approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.


a. Provide list of stored materials for which payment is being requested for Contracting Officer and designated representative.

b. Store in like lots for ease of inventory by Contracting Officer or designated representative

2. All materials stored off-site shall be marked or tagged with identification of project to which they are assigned and shall be accessible for inspection.

3. Contractor submits evidence of title to such materials and equipment in the form of detailed receipts to Contracting Officer.

4. Care and custody of such materials and equipment and all costs incurred for movement and storage shall be responsibility of Contractor.

B. Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Insurance showing AAFES as an additional insured and showing amount of insurance coverage for the stored items or suitable proof that material and equipment are stored in a Bonded Warehouse.

C. Payment for stored materials will be subject to all conditions and approval of Contracting Officer.

1.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD

A. The KO may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect AAFES from loss on account of:

1. Defective work not remedied. 2. Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. 3. Failure of the GC to make payments properly to subcontractors or for materials

or labor. 4. A reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the balance then

unpaid. 5. Damage to another Contractor or to some third party. 6. Failure to maintain milestones in accordance with the approved construction

progress schedule specified in Section 01310, Construction Progress Schedules.

7. Failure to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials. END 01230.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01310 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION 01310-1

1 GENERAL


A. Request For Information (RFI’s).

B. Pre-construction Meeting.

C. Pre-installation Conferences.

D. Other Coordination Meetings applicable to work at any given time.

1.2 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI's)

A. RFI Forms: Software-generated form acceptable to Architect-Engineer and AAFES Project Manager.

B. Architect-Engineer's Action: Allow seven working days for Architect-Engineer's response for each RFI.

C. RFI Log:

1. Maintain a tabular log of RFIs. 2. Submit log weekly.

1.3 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Use Contractor's Project Web site for project communication and documentation.

B. Contractor shall provide a minimum of ten Project Web site user licenses for use of, AAFES, Contractor, Architect-Engineer, and Architect-Engineer's Consultants.

1. Contractor shall provide up to two hours of software training to Project Web site users.

C. Project Web site software package:

1. Prolog – Converge, or equal Construction Management Software.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. The Contracting Officer will schedule and preside at Pre-construction meeting.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Contracting Officer, Project Manager and other AAFES HQ representatives. 2. Local and regional AAFES representatives. 3. Architect-Engineer 4. Installation representatives (Engineering, Fire Chief, Security, Environmental, etc.) 5. Contractor 6. Major Sub-contractors

C. Agenda:

1. Execution of Notice to Proceed. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents.

PROGRESS MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION 01310-2

3. Submission of list of sub-contractors. 4. Review of AAFES checklist of contract requirements. 5. Discussion of Contractor’s Schedule of Values. 6. Discussion of Construction Schedule. 7. Discussion of critical sequencing. 8. Designation of responsible personnel. 9. Processing of field decisions and change orders. 10. Submission of applications for payment. 11. Submittal of shop drawings. 12. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 13. Fire, safety and spill procedures. 14. Security procedures. 15. Accident prevention and reports. 16. Housekeeping procedures. 17. Use of premises

a. Office and storage locations. b. Personnel parking.

18. Major equipment deliveries. 19. Other issues pertinent to completing the contract.

D. Meeting minutes: Minutes will be taken by the A/E and distributed to AAFES, Contractor and Installation Engineer.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. The Contractor shall schedule and preside at other project meetings when required.

B. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a Pre-installation conference at Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting.

a. Advise Architect-Engineer, AFFES Contracting Officer and AAFES Project Manager of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules.

PROGRESS MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION 01310-3

l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

a. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

C. Coordination Meetings: At weekly intervals, in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, conduct Project Coordination Meetings to resolve routine issues.

END 01310.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01320 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01320-1

1 GENERAL


A. Format.

B. Content.

C. Revisions to schedules.

D. Submittals.




C. Section 01210 – Schedule of Values.

D. Section 01230 – Progress Payments.

E. Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.

F. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

1.3 SCOPE

A. Exhibit "A" - General Provisions of the AAFES Contract for Construction, Article entitled: "Schedule and Progress"

B. The Contractor prepared scheduling progress chart system shall serve as a guide in managing the construction progress and scheduling.

1.4 GENERAL

A. The scheduling progress chart system shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall consist of a Critical Path bar chart as described in this Section.

B. In preparing this system, the scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be developed in accordance with construction phasing shown on the construction drawings where applicable.

C. The requirement for the system is included to assure adequate planning and execution of the work and to assist the Contracting Officer in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and evaluating progress of the work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a preliminary scheduling progress chart to the Contracting Officer or designated representative defining the Contractor's proposed operations for the first sixty (60) of the contract within ten (10) days after date of Notice to Proceed.


1. Indicate the Contractor's general approach for the balance of the project. 2. Include the cost of the activities expected to be completed or partially completed

before submission and approval of the complete progress schedule.

B. Upon approval of the preliminary scheduling progress chart by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, and within thirty (30) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit the complete progress chart with copy to the Architect-Engineer.

C. Contractor shall also submit a narrative report with the updated bar chart, including a description of problem areas (current and anticipated) delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.

D. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires plus four (4) copies that will be retained by Contracting Officer and one (1) copy to be retained by the Architect-Engineer.

1.6 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES

A. Submit revised progress chart system with each monthly Application for Payment.

1. Copy of the complete bar chart with the current activity progress clearly indicated. 2. Current cost of each activity completed and each partially completed shall be

updated and included.

B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal and revised projected completion date of each activity.

C. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other identifiable changes that could affect the overall schedule.

D. Provide revised narrative report with each submittal describing work accomplished during the previous period, the work scheduled for the next period, anticipated problem areas and delays and impact on the Schedule.

E. Report corrective action taken or proposed.

1.7 PROGRESS CHART SYSTEM

A. The system consists of keeping a record of the time allotted for each activity and the actual progress of the activity.

B. Activities shall be listed vertically and shall include the units of work required for the project.

1. All activities of AAFES, which affect progress and Contract required dates for completion shall be shown.

2. Include activities for AAFES FURNISHED/AAFES INSTALLED and AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS.

C. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the Contracting Officer's approval.


1.8 FORMAT

A. Prepare schedules as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation, identifying first workday of each week.

1. A scale of time, from date of the beginning of the contract work to the date of completion of the contract work, shall be indicated horizontally on the chart.

2. The units of time indicated shall be days. 3. Indicate time allotted for each major activity, the actual progress of the activity and

the time spent to date or to the finish of the activity.

B. The format shall be such to enable the Contracting Officer or designated representative to evaluate the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and to determine if the actual construction is on schedule.

1.9 CONTENT

A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.

B. Identify each item by specification section number.

C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item and total percentage of Work completed as of the first day of each month.

D. Indicate delivery dates for AAFES furnished products.

1.10 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to project site file, subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.



END 01320.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01331 – AAFES WEATHER TABLE

AAFES WEATHER TABLE 01331-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 INFORMATION AND DATA

A. Information and data furnished or referred to in the weather table is furnished for the Contractor's information.

B. The Contractor is responsible for submitting a written request for time extension under this specification Section.

1. The Contractor request shall include backup justification for each written request for time extension.

2. Any time extension granted under this specification Section shall be at no cost to AAFES.

1.2 CONTRACT TIME LIMITS

A. The contract time limits include weather conditions that are shown in the table listed herein.

1.3 TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER

A. This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather affecting exterior work in accordance with the Contract.

B. The following listing defines the monthly anticipated adverse weather for the contract period and is based on NOAA data for the geographic location of the project.

MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER CALENDAR DAYS

Ft. Leonard Wood, Missouri (Pulaski County)

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEPT OCT NOV DEC

04 04 04 05 04 04 02 04 04 05 03 04

C. This listing of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line monthly weather time evaluations.

1. Throughout the contract each month, actual adverse weather days will be recorded on a calendar basis (including weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthly anticipated adverse weather in this listing.

a. The term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather.

b. The number of actual adverse weather days affecting exterior work shall be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month.

2. Adverse weather days must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the contractor's work day and delay work critical to the timely completion of the project.

3. If the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of days anticipated in the above listing, then the Contracting Officer will determine the time extension for the Contractor.

AAFES WEATHER TABLE 01331-2

4. The Contracting Officer will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days and issue a modification in accordance with the contract.



END 01331.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01340 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS 01340-1

1 GENERAL


A. Submittal procedures.

B. Construction progress schedules.

C. Shop Drawings.

D. Samples.

E. Product Data.

F. Certificates.



B. Section 01060 – Safety Policies & Procedures.

C. Section 01310 – Construction Progress Schedules.

D. Section 01350 – Schedule of Values.

E. Section 01420 – Environmental Protection-AAFES.

F. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

G. Technical Sections of the Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810.

B. Sequentially number the transmittal form.

C. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.

D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate.

E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

1. Stamp Text shall be as follows:


a. By approving and submitting these Shop Drawings, Product Data and Submittals, we represent that we have determined and verified all materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and that we have checked and coordinated information contained within submittal with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

CONTRACTOR

DATE BY

2. A-E nor his Consultants will review Shop Drawings, Product Data or Submittals unless Contractor’s stamp is affixed to documents submitted, signed and dated.

F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and in accordance with the List of Required Submittals in this section.

1. Transmit submittals to Contracting Officer or Designated Representative and Architect-Engineer.

2. Coordinate submission of related items.

G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

1. Failure to identify such variations will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for completing the work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Review/approval by the Contracting Officer does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for completing work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Review by the Architect-Engineer does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for completing work in full compliance with the Contract Documents.

H. Prior to approval of the material/product submitted:

1. Contractor shall include with the submittal a written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos.

2. This certificate is mandatory before review will be made and/or Contracting Officer approval issued.

I. Provide space for Contractor, Contracting Officer and Architect-Engineer review stamps.

J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate.

L. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit preliminary Progress Schedule within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed.

B. Submit complete (final) Progress Schedule within thirty (30) days of the Notice to Proceed.

C. Submit monthly revisions of Progress Schedule.

D. Refer to Section 01310 - Construction Progress Schedules, for submittal information.


1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawings For Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer or designated representative for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

2. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer. 3. Minimum sheet size for shop drawings shall be 8 1/2" x 11". 4. After review, distribute copies in accordance with Submittal Procedures article

above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.

B. Shop Drawings For Project Close-out:

1. Submitted for AAFES's use after project completion.

C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service and for functional equipment and appliances.

1. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus six (6) copies, three (3) of which to be retained by Contracting Officer and three (3) to be retained by Ft. Leonard Wood DPW.

1.6 SAMPLES

A. Samples For Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

2. Submitted to Architect-Engineer for review and coordination with Tyndall Air Force Base for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents

3. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.

B. Samples For Information:

1. Submitted for the Contracting Officer's knowledge as project administrator or for AAFES.

C. Samples For Selection:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer or designated representative for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.

2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, or in custom colors (if so stated in the product specification section), textures, and patterns for Contracting Officer or designated representative selection.

3. After review, distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.

D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.


E. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

F. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two of which will be retained by Contracting Officer.

G. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sections.

H. Coordinate sample submittals with respective shop drawings.

1.7 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, specifications, illustrations, and other descriptive data.

B. Product data that relates to shop drawings or samples must be submitted with the respective shop drawings or samples.

1.8 CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or the Contractor to Contracting Officer, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Certify that material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, test results, affidavits, and/or certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.9 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. General Construction:

1. Section 01000, Requirements of Ft. Leonard Wood:

a. Schedules. b. Drawings. c. Forms. d. Permits. e. Documentation.

2. Section 01045, Cutting & Patching:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation.

3. Section 01060, AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation. c. Hazard, Health/Safety, Response Plans.

4. Section 01210, Schedule of Values:



5. Section 01320, Construction Progress Schedule:

a. Preliminary Schedule. b. Complete Schedule. c. Revised Schedules.

6. Section 01340, Submittals:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

7. Section 01400, Quality Control:

a. Test Reports.

8. Section 01410, Testing Laboratory Services:

a. Test Reports.

9. Section 01420, Environmental Protection:

a. Environmental Protection Plan.

10. Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Documentation.

11. Section 01620, Storage & Protection:


12. Section 01710, Cleaning:

a. Instructions. b. Product Data.

13. Section 01720, Project Record Documents:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Manuals. c. As-built Drawings. d. As-built Specifications.

14. Section 02070, Selective Demolition:

a. Schedules.

15. Section 02282, Termite Control:

a. Instructions. b. Test Reports. c. Certifications. d. Product Data.

16. Section 02300, Earthwork:

a. Samples. b. Test Reports. c. Documentation.


17. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete:

a. Design Mix. b. Test Reports. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data.

18. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings.

19. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Product Data.

20. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Samples.

21. Section 06250, Pre-Finished Paneling-No Formaldehyde:

a. Product data. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Samples.

22. Section 06400, Architectural Woodwork:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples.

23. Section 07270, Firestopping:

a. Certifications. b. Product Data.

24. Section 07559, Modifications to Warranted EPDM Roof System:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples. e. Documentation. f. Warranty Validation.

25. Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Samples.


26. Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealers:

a. Product Data. b. Samples. c. Documentation.

27. Section 08305, Access Doors:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data.

28. Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems:


29. Section 09300, Tile:

a. Certifications. b. Product Data. c. Samples.

30. Section 09510, Acoustical Panel Ceilings:

a. Certifications. b. Product Data. c. Samples.

31. Section 09900, Painting:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

32. Section 09986, Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels (FRP):

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

33. Section 10265, Wall Surface Protection Systems:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Samples.

34. Section 10440, Specialty Signs:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

35. Section 11400, Food Service Equipment:

a. Instructions. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data.


36. Section 11800, Used Cooking Oil Equipment:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data.

B. Special Construction:

1. Section 13851, Fire Alarm:

a. Design Data. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Test Reports. e. Operation and Maintenance Data.

C. Mechanical Construction:

1. Section 15010, General Provisions-Mechanical:

a. Test Results.

2. Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods:


3. Section 15067, Testing Piping Systems:

a. Reports.

4. Section 15250, Piping Insulation:

a. Product Data.

5. Section 15290, Ductwork Insulation:

a. Product Data.

6. Section 15400, Plumbing:

a. Product Data. b. Certificates.

7. Section 15450, Plumbing Fixtures & Trim:

a. Product Data.

8. Section 15782, Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units:

a. Product Data. b. Operation & Maintenance Data.

9. Section 15815, Metal Ducts:

a. Product Data

10. Section 15820, Ductwork Accessories:

a. Product Data.

11. Section 15825, Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units:



12. Section 15855, Diffusers, Registers & Grilles:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data.

13. Section 15872, Fans:


14. Section 15993, Air Systems Testing, Adjusting & Balancing:

a. Qualifications. b. Reports.

D. Electrical Construction:

1. Section 16060, Electrical Demolition for Remodeling:

a. Schedules.

2. Section 16111, Conduit:

a. Product Data.

3. Section 16123, Building Wire and Cable:

a. Product Data. b. Manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Section 16130, Boxes:

a. Product Data.

5. Section 16141, Wiring Devices:

a. Product Data.

6. Section 16150, Manufactured Wiring Systems:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Section 16160, Cabinets and Enclosures:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data.

8. Section 16170, Grounding and Bonding:

a. Product Data. b. Manufacturer’s instructions.

9. Section 16190, Supporting Devices:

a. Product Data. a. Manufacturer’s instructions.

10. Section 16195, Identification:

a. Product Data.


11. Section 16510, Interior Luminaires:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Manufacturer’s instructions.

12. Section 16950, Testing:

a. Test results.



END 01340

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL

QUALITY CONTROL 01400-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of his subcontractor(s) to ensure conformation to applicable specifications and drawings with respect to the materials, workmanship, construction, finish and functional performance.

1. Tests of materials and/or special inspections will be made, when required by these specifications or by applicable law, rules and regulations, in accordance with respective Sections of the specifications.

2. Examples of such services are tests of backfill materials, concrete materials and concrete mix design.

B. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all services and testing for this Project unless specifically indicated.

1. Testing Agency requirements are outlined in Section 01410, Testing Agency. 2. Specific testing procedures and frequencies are specified in the Technical

Sections of the Project Manual.

C. All testing shall be approved by AAFES.

D. If a material is not required to be field tested, the Contracting Officer may require the supplier to furnish with each delivery of such material:

1. A certificate bearing legal signature of said supplier, stating that such material complies with specification requirements.

2. Maintain certificates and submit with final close-out documents at end of Project.

E. If any work or materials requiring tests and inspections is executed, enclosed or covered before tests are made, or test reports distributed:

1. Contractor shall, at his own expense, uncover such part of this work or material and keep it uncovered until such tests and inspections have been made and test reports distributed.

2. If work or material so tested and inspected shall not be found to conform to the requirements of the Construction Documents, it shall be deemed and construed to be defective materials or faulty workmanship and the Contractor, at his own expense, shall replace work or material removed and repair all work disturbed thereby.

F. Contractor shall coordinate with Testing Agency that shall report results of all tests in writing simultaneously to the following:

1. Contracting Officer 1 copy 2. AAFES PM 1 copy 3. Contractor 1 copy 4. Architect-Engineer 1 copy 5. A-E Consultant 1 copy

G. Reports shall state that tests were made under responsible charge of a Testing Engineer, holding a license to operate in the state where the project is being constructed, and that material or materials were tested in accordance with provisions of these specifications, and that material and/or materials tested, passed or failed to pass such requirements.

QUALITY CONTROL 01400-2

H. Contractor shall provide testing and quality control for materials and systems including, but not limited to:

1. Termiticide Application Rates: Section 02282. 2. Soils Compaction Control: Section 02300. 3. Cast-in-place Concrete: Section 03300. 4. Fire Alarm System: Section 13851. 5. Food Service Ventilation Systems: Section 15825. 6. Plumbing Piping Testing: Section 15400. 7. Air Systems Testing, Adjusting & Balancing: Section 15993. 8. Electrical Testing: Section 16950.

1.2 RELATED WORK



C. Section 01410 – Testing Agency.

D. Technical Sections of the Specifications.

1.3 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY

A. Cooperate with the Contracting Officer and laboratory personnel and provide access to work and to manufacturer’s operations.

1. Provide samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities. 2. Furnish casual labor and facilities required to provide access to work to be tested;

to obtain and handle samples at the site; to facilitate inspections and tests; and for laboratory’s exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.

3. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for its assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

B. The use of Contractor’s independent testing services shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the plans and specifications.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate with both AAFES and his own testing laboratories so that the work will be inspected and tested according to contract requirements including:

1. Notification of when tests should be taken. 2. Easy access to the work. 3. General cooperation in every way to insure proper control of the work.

D. Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall submit a signed certificate stating tests for this work were made in accordance with provisions of these specifications.

1. Certify that all such tests and reports made were reported as required. 2. This certificate shall list all tests and dates when work was completed.


A. Required Submittals Section 01340.

B. Related requirements and tests specified in Division 2 through 16.



END 01400.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01410 – TESTING AGENCY

TESTING AGENCY 01410-1

1 GENERAL


A. Selection and payment.

B. Agency responsibilities.

C. Agency reports.

D. Limits on testing authority.

E. Contractor responsibilities.

F. Schedule of tests.


A. Section 01400 – Quality Control.

B. Section 02282 – Termite Control.

C. Section 02300 – Earthwork.

D. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

E. Division 15 – Mechanical.

F. Division 16 - Electrical.

1.3 SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. Subject to approval by AAFES, Contractor shall select, employ and pay for all services of an independent testing agency or laboratory to perform testing as specified in the individual Sections listed in Article 1.2 above.

B. Contractor shall provide testing and quality control for systems including, but not limited to:

1. Testing, documentation and certification of application rates of termiticide on compacted backfill prior to patching floor slab.

2. Testing, documentation and certification of compaction for pipe bedding at under slab pipe installations.

3. Testing, documentation and certification of compaction for base course backfill materials under concrete floor slab patches.

4. Testing, documentation and certification of all cast-in-place concrete. 5. Testing for Special Construction including, but not limited to:

a. Fire alarm system. b. Kitchen hood fire suppression system(s).

6. Testing, documentation and certification of pressure tests for piping systems. 7. Testing, adjusting, balancing and documentation of the building air systems. 8. Testing, documentation and certification of all electrical systems.

C. Employment of testing agency or laboratory in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.


1.4 AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

B. Provide qualified personnel at site.

C. Cooperate with Contracting Officer and Contractor in performance of services.

D. Perform specified sampling and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.

E. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Promptly notify Contracting Officer, Architect-Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products.

G. Perform additional tests required by Contracting Officer.

H. Provide Contracting Officer, Project Manager, Architect/Engineer, Architect/Engineer's Consultants and Contractor each with one (1) copy of each written test report.

I. Each report shall include:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing Laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by the Contracting Officer.

J. Upon completion of the project, the testing agency shall prepare a certificate, certified in the presence of a Notary Public, stating testing for this work was conducted in accordance with the provisions of these specifications, and further, all tests and reports were provided for this job were reported as required.

1.5 LIMITS ON TESTING AUTHORITY

A. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

C. Agency or laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

D. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.


A. Deliver to agency or laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.

C. Provide incidental labor and facilities:


1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested. 3. To facilitate tests. 4. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

D. Notify Contracting Officer and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing services.

E. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements:

1. For Contractor's convenience. 2. When initial tests indicate work does not comply with contract documents. 3. When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, additional tests or inspections are

required because of the manner in which the Contractor executes his work. 4. Examples of such tests and inspections are:

a. Tests of materials substituted for previously approved substituted or specified materials.

b. Retests made necessary by failure of materials to comply the requirements of the specifications.

c. Load tests made necessary because of portions of the structure not fully meeting specifications or drawings requirements.

1.7 SCHEDULE OF TESTS

A. Test required and standards for testing are specified in the individual specification Sections.

B. Inspection, sampling and testing is required to be performed by professional engineers, licensed in the State in which this Project is constructed, for the following individual components or systems of Work as arranged, coordinated and paid for by Contractor:

1. Soils compaction control in accord with specification Section 02300; ASTM D-1557, Standard Proctor Test.

2. Concrete Work, Section 03300.

a. Testing and evaluation of concrete strength shall conform to latest edition of American Concrete Institute Standard 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".

b. Tests for compressive strength of concrete cylinders, minimum of 1 test for each 10 cubic yards of concrete or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day with each test comprised of 4 cylinders.

3. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air systems as specified in Division 15.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for inspection, testing and provision of written certification of the following individual components or systems of Work:

1. Termiticide application rates as specified in Section 02282. 2. Special Construction systems as specified in Division 13 related to fire alarm and

sprinkler systems. 3. Testing of piping systems as specified in Division 15. 4. Kitchen hood fire suppression systems as specified in Division 15. 5. Testing of electrical components and systems as specified in Division 16.



END 01410.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01420 – AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 01420-1

1 GENERAL


A. Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and performing all work required for the prevention of environmental degradation during and as a result of construction operations under this contract.

B. These requirements are in addition to any environmental protection requirements elsewhere in these specifications.

C. For the purpose of this specification, environmental pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents, not naturally occurring at the site, which adversely affect:

1. Human health or welfare. 2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances important to human life. 3. Other species of importance to humans. 4. Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic and recreational purposes.

D. The control of environmental pollution by the Contractor requires consideration of air, water, and land, and involves noise control, solid waste management and management of radiant energy and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants.

E. This section also requires the protection of cultural and historic resources.

F. Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with the work called for under the various sections of Division 2.

1.2 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS

A. Work under this contract is to be performed on a government facility.

B. All environmental rules applying to Contractor operations elsewhere will also apply on the government facility.

C. Contractor (and any subcontractor, agent or representative) shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations providing for environmental protection and pollution control and abatement.

D. Contractor has the duty to determine for himself where such laws and regulations apply.

E. These regulations include but are not limited to:

1. Clean Air Act. 2. Clean Water Act. 3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. 4. Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA). 5. Toxic Substances Control Act. 6. Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 7. Coastal Zone Management Act.


8. Endangered Species Act. 9. National Historic Preservation Act. 10. Safe Drinking Water Act. 11. Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act. 12. Oil Pollution Act. 13. Archeological Resources Protection Act. 14. Pollution Prevention Act. 15. National Environmental Policy Act.

F. Although the Contractor may request assistance from the Contracting Officer in delineating applicable environmental laws and regulations, Contractor has an independent responsibility to make its own determination and to do so in a timely fashion.

1.3 FINES OR PENALTIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL NON-COMPLIANCE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying any fines or penalties assessed against AAFES or the installation or the Army or the Air Force for violations of environmental laws or regulation resulting from acts or omissions of the Contractor or its employees, subcontractors, or agents.

B. This obligation is in addition to any fines or penalties that may be assessed against the Contractor for the same conduct.

C. Contractor may either reimburse these fines or penalties through the Contracting Officer, or with the consent of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor may pay such fines or penalties directly to the regulatory agency or agencies concerned.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGES

A. Contractor agrees to hold harmless and indemnify AAFES (which includes the Army, Air Force, or other Department of Defense component, as appropriate) for any and all damages of any kind resulting from environmentally harmful activities by the Contractor, Contractor’s employees or agents or subcontractors.

B. “Damages” includes but are not limited to personal injury, property damage (including diminution of value) or death, environmental restoration and response costs, natural resource damages, expert witness and attorney’s fees, and reimbursement of any and all expenses incurred to obtain permits as a result of Contractor’s failure to identify or obtain permits for itself or AAFES.

1.5 CONTACTS WITH ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY OFFICIALS

A. Contractor shall immediately advise the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office of the content of all contacts with Federal, State, or local environmental regulators, before, during, and after the performance of this contract concerning the performance of this contract.


2 PERMITS

2.1 PERMITS FOR EQUIPMENT USED BY CONTRACTOR IN PERFORMING AAFES CONTRACTS

A. For equipment used in the performance of this contract, Contractor shall obtain in Contractor’s name and at no additional expense to AAFES, all permits, coordination, certifications or other regulatory authorization necessary to perform and complete the work required by this contract under applicable environmental laws and regulations.

B. “Applicable environmental laws and regulations” includes but is not limited to:

1. Clean Air Act. 2. Clean Water Act. 3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. 4. Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA). 5. Toxic Substances Control Act. 6. Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 7. Coastal Zone Management Act. 8. Endangered Species Act. 9. National Historic Preservation Act. 10. Safe Drinking Water Act. 11. Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act. 12. Oil Pollution Act. 13. Pollution Prevention Act. 14. State, County, and Local laws and regulations on the same subjects. 15. National Environmental Policy Act.

2.2 PERMITS NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, EXCAVATION, MODIFICATION, RENOVATION, DEMOLITION, INSTALLATION, OR OTHER ALTERATION OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATIONS, REAL PROPERTY OR SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall identify all Federal, State, County, or local, permits, coordination, certifications or other regulatory authorization requirements under all applicable environmental laws and regulations as defined in (A.) above.

B. Contractor shall then prepare and submit in draft all applicable permit applications, coordination, notices, or other required filings, together with all supporting data to the Contracting Officer for review.

C. Permit applications or notifications or other documents that must be submitted by AAFES will be submitted by AAFES, and any documents that must be submitted by the Contractor will be returned after review to the Contractor for submission.

D. No work requiring permit or other written authorization shall proceed before the Contractor has the permit or authorization or a copy thereof in its possession.


3 MATERIALS

3.1 RECYCLED MATERIALS

A. Materials used in this contract shall be, to the greatest extent practicable and consistent with financial prudence, made of recycled materials or of materials that are recyclable.

B. Where construction debris such as concrete or asphalt or wood can be recycled, this alternative will be considered.

3.2 ASBESTOS

A. Asbestos will not be used or included in this project.

3.3 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL’S (PCBS)

A. PCBs will not be used or included in this project.

3.4 LEAD-BASED PAINT

A. Lead-based paint will not be used or included in this project.

3.5 OZONE-DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

A. “Class I substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class I by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to chlorofluorocarbons, halons, carbon tetrachloride, and methyl chloroform.

B. “Class II substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class II by EPA (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to hydorchlorofluorocarbons.

C. As required by 42 USC 7671j(b), c, and (d) and 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart E, the Contractor shall label products which contain class I or class II ozone-depleting substances or are manufactured with a process that uses class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, or containers of class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, as follows:

“WARNING: Contains (or manufactured with, if applicable) _________*_________, (a) substance(s) which harm(s) public health and the environment by destroying ozone in the upper atmosphere.”

(*The Contractor shall insert the name of the substance(s).)

D. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 608 and 609 of the Clean Air Act (42 USC 7671g, National Recycling Emission Reduction Program and 7671h, Servicing of Motor Vehicle Air Conditioners) as each or both apply to the contract.

3.6 PESTICIDES

A. Except as may be specified elsewhere in this contract, Contractor will not use or apply pesticides (such as herbicides or weed-killers, insecticides, or rodenticides) without the specific written prior approval of the Contracting Officer.


4 EXECUTION

4.1 GENERAL: SITE DISTURBANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITES

A. Contractor shall use industry-recognized best management practices to avoid creation of fugitive dust emissions and to avoid and control storm water runoff from the construction site and any temporary roads that may be used for access to it.

1. Water sprinkling may be used to control dust.

B. Contractor shall perform all work under this contract in such a manner that no pollutants of any kind are released into ditches, storm drains, streams, lakes, or other surface waters on or connected to the site.

4.2 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES

A. General:

1. The Contractor shall not pollute storm drainage, streams, lakes, or reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids, construction wastes or other harmful materials or pollutants.

2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and comply with all applicable Federal, State, Regional, Municipal, and other regulations.

B. Spillage:

1. The Contractor shall take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils, greases, bituminous materials, waste washings, herbicides, cement, and surface drainage from entering public waters.

2. In the event of a spill, the Contractor must make all required notifications to Federal, State or local authorities and will notify the Contracting Officer immediately.

C. Washing and Curing Water:

1. Water used in aggregate processing, concrete curing, foundation, and concrete lift clean-up and other waste water shall not be allowed to enter the storm drainage system.

4.3 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES

A. General:

1. It is intended that the land resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work performed under this contract be preserved in their present condition or be restored to a condition after completion of construction that will appear to the natural and not detract from the appearance of the project.

2. The Contractor shall limit his construction activities to areas defined by the Drawings or Specifications.

B. Prevention of Landscape Defacement:

1. Except in areas marked on the plans to be cleared, the Contractor shall not deface, remove, cut, injure or destroy trees or shrubs without specific written authority.

2. Trees designated to be saved shall be protected from either excavation or filling within the root zone.

3. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened or attached to any existing trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the Contracting Officer.


4. The Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such use.

C. Restoration of Landscape Damage:

1. Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged by the Contractor’s equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to the original condition at the Contractor’s expense.

2. The Contracting Officer will decide what method of restoration shall be used, and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of under requirements for clearing and grubbing (Section 02102).

3. All scars made on trees not designated on the plans to be removed by equipment construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1-inch in diameter shall be coated immediately with an approved tree wound dressing.

4. All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced landscape personnel.

5. Tree trimming with axes shall not be permitted. 6. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are

subsequently damaged by the Contractor and are beyond saving in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, shall be immediately removed and replaced with a nursery-grown tree of the same species.

4.4 CONTROL OF AIR EMISSIONS

A. Contractor’s actions shall conform to all Federal, State, and local requirements for the control of air emissions during work under this contract.

B. Trucks leaving the site will be brushed or washed to remove all practicable amounts of dust or other material that may become airborne.

C. Contractor will ensure that all internal construction vehicles and equipment used will have the lowest practicable emissions characteristics and be maintained in optimum operating condition for the reduction of air emissions.

D. Where use of electric motors instead of internal combustion engines is feasible, electric motors will be used during construction.

5 WASTE DISPOSAL

5.1 POLLUTION PREVENTION & WASTE DISPOSAL

A. The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.

B. Recycling shall be implemented at every practicable stage of the project.

5.2 WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Pollution Prevention:

1. The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials and work practices that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.

B. Hazardous Waste Generation, Handling, and Disposal.

1. Work done under this contract is to be performed on a government facility.


2. According to rules and procedures of the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the federal facility is required to have a generator identification number under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and to be responsible for wastes (as defined under RCRA) produced, managed, stored, disposed on, or transported from the facility.

3. Accordingly, Contractor will, to the greatest extent practicable, use materials, processes, and techniques that will avoid the creation of hazardous waste.

4. Contractor shall prepare and follow a written waste management and disposal plan for all hazardous wastes generated on the site.

5. Prior to generation of any hazardous wastes, Contractor will coordinate planned activities regarding hazardous materials and hazardous waste with the Contracting Officer.

6. Contractor shall submit a written waste management plan, through the Contracting Officer, to installation environmental office.

a. Contractor shall follow this plan after approval by the Contracting Officer.

7. Under no circumstances will Contractor bring onto the site hazardous waste that has been generated elsewhere.

8. All hazardous waste will be properly disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements.

C. Disposal of Non-RCRA Wastes.

1. All non-hazardous wastes generated on the site as a result of this contract must be disposed of properly, in accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements.

2. Materials will be recycled whenever practicable. 3. Prior to creation of such wastes, the Contractor shall submit to the installation

environmental management function, through the Contracting Officer, a plan for disposal of wastes. Such plan shall include the types of waste to be created, how they shall be stored, managed and disposed. Contractor shall follow this plan once it has been approved by the installation and Contracting Officer.

4. Such wastes will not be created until approved by the Contracting Officer.

D. Construction Debris.

1. Debris from demolition of existing structures will ordinarily be removed to a location on the installation or as designated by the installation authorities.

2. If a location on the installation is not available, other sections in this contract may require the Contactor to remove clean construction debris from the site to a location of the Contractor’s choosing off the installation. (Site soil or other site media are not covered by this paragraph.)

3. Debris will be recycled or disposed of in accordance with Seymour Johnson AFB CES and all applicable Federal, State and local rules.

a. Such debris must be free of all contamination, including but not limited to, lead paint, asbestos, and insecticides.

4. Prior to removal of any construction debris, that debris must be certified by the installation to be free of contamination and of no value to the United States, and this certification must be provided to the Contracting Officer.

a. To expedite work, this may be accomplished by e-mail or other suitable electronic means, however, the original certification form must be provided to the Contracting Officer.


b. No form is prescribed for this certification so long as all necessary information is provided and the document is signed by an authorized installation representative.

c. However, an example is provided at page 01420-9 and this form may be used.

5. All construction debris removed from the installation must be covered by a certification.

6. The Contractor must arrange with the installation POC whether all debris will be covered by one certification or if several certifications will be required.

E. Consolidated Waste Disposal Plans:

1. Contractor may, at Contractor’s option, submit for approval as specified above one consolidated plan for handling hazardous and non-hazardous wastes.

F. Earthwork and Removal of Potentially Contaminated Media:

1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, the site has been inspected and is, consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution.

a. However, work under this contract will be performed on a military installation, where the history of prior military and industrial activities is not necessarily completely known.

b. The following provisions prohibit the removal from the installation of soil or other materials found on site and are included, in an abundance of caution, for the protection of AAFES, the installation, and the Contractor.

2. Notwithstanding any other clause in this contract, including but not limited to all standard site work general provisions (02010-02900); no media by-product resulting from site preparation, construction or excavation shall be moved off the post, base, or installation where the construction is occurring.

a. If the construction is off the post, base or installation, no media by-product shall be moved off the construction site.

3. The Contractor shall:

a. Leave the media in place at the site, subject to appropriate erosion control or; b. Haul the media to and place it at a location on the installation that has been

designated either in this contract or in writing by the Contracting Officer; and c. If unforeseen difficulties arise, such as excessive quantity of media is generated,

the Contractor shall advise the Contracting Officer and shall not remove media from the site without written authorization from the Contracting Officer.

4. Definitions.

a. Media – Any soil, water, or air, moved, disturbed or released from a site. b. The terms hazardous, waste, pollutant, contaminate, substance have the same

meanings and usage here as they commonly do in CERCLA, RCRA, FWPCA, CAA, TSCA, and SDWA respectively.


INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FOR CLEAN CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS TO BE REMOVED FROM AAFES PROJECT SITE As representative of ___________________________ (insert name of installation), I am authorized to certify, and hereby do so certify, that the construction debris to be removed from the AAFES project site at ______________________ ____________________________________________ (describe project and list address, for example Main Exchange Project, 111 Road A, X installation) has been inspected and is of no value to the United States and is free of all contamination, including but not limited to: lead paint, asbestos, PCBs, and pesticides. CERTIFICATION: Signed: ______________________________________________ Date: ____________________ Printed Name, Rank or Grade, and Duty Title: ___________________________________________ ORIGINAL OF THIS FORM MUST BE PROVIDED TO CONTRACTING OFFICER


6 UNEXPECTED SITE CONDITIONS

6.1 CONTAMINATED SOIL OR GROUNDWATER

A. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, site has been inspected and is, consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution. However, unexpected conditions can always arise.

B. Contractor or subcontractor personnel may encounter soil or groundwater that is suspected to be contaminated, either because of odors, colors, free liquids, unexpected construction debris, or other suspicious conditions.

C. Should this occur, Contractor will immediately notify the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office and take necessary initial measures to protect workers, the site, and other personnel.

6.2 UNEXPECTED ARTIFACTS OR RELICS

A. Should Contractor employees in the course of site preparation or other work on this contract find unexpected historic or archeological remains, such as bones, arrow points, pottery remnants, foundations, or other evidence of previous uses of the site, Contractor will cease further site-disturbing activity and immediately notify the Contracting Officer and installation environmental office.

END 01420.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01500 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES, BARRIERS & CONTROLS

TEMPORARY FACILITIES, BARRIERS & CONTROLS 01500-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE.

A. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls, including construction aids and equipment for common use and to facilitate execution of the work:

1. Chutes. 2. Cranes. 3. Hoists. 4. Platforms. 5. Railings. 6. Ramps. 7. Runways. 8. Stairs.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary barriers and enclosures to separate phased construction areas and areas occupied for use by AAFES.

C. Contractor shall provide all other construction aids required to complete work:

1. Temporary devices and equipment. 2. Temporary protection coverings.

D. Contractor shall provide Site security program at mobilization:

1. Enforce site security program. 2. Implement installation rules and regulations for all work at Ft. Leonard Wood. 3. Enforce supplemental security program specified in the Section. 4. Coordinate and cooperate with Contracting Officer, AAFES General Manager,

AAFES Store Manager and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW in establishing, maintaining and enforcing security program during construction.

5. Protect work, stored materials and construction equipment from theft and vandalism.

6. Prevent access to construction areas by unauthorized persons. 7. Protect Installation and AAFES property at site from theft, vandalism or damage

from Contractor’s work or employees.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Leonard Wood. 2. Section 01010 – Project Summary. 3. Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures. 4. Section 01140 – Phasing. 5. Section 01400 – Quality Control. 6. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services. 7. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities. 8. Section 01590 – Field Offices and Storage Sheds. 9. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.


B. Installed but specified elsewhere:

1. Structural cold-formed metal framing members related to work under this Section are specified in Section 05400, Cold-formed Metal Framing.

2. Wood framing, plywood, fasteners and other wood materials related to work under this Section are specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

3. Hollow metal doors frames and hardware requirements related to work under this Section are specified in Section 08100, Metal Doors & Frames and Section 08710, Finish Hardware.

4. Non-structural cold-formed metal drywall framing members and gypsum drywall are specified in Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

5. Other technical Sections of the specifications as related to work under this Section.

C. Temporary facilities, barriers and controls must comply with NFPA 241, EM-385-1-1 and UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Coordinate and comply with requirements established by Ft. Leonard Wood DPW.

B. Obtain all permits and inspections required.

C. Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of bidding documents.

1. National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241. 2. Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1. 3. Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7. 4. National Electric Code (ANSI C1). 5. National Electrical Safety Code. 6. Federal and State Requirements.

D. Comply with applicable provisions of 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 15 September 2010 and UFAS to maintain accessible paths of travel and means of egress during construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls Plan for coordination that indicates dust/debris control measures, security measures, proposed locations and proposed time frame of necessity for such items.

1. Submit Plan(s) at a minimum scale of 1/8” = 1’-0”. 2. For each Phase of work indicate:

a. Locations of all temporary partitions. b. Proposed partition types. c. Door locations and door types to be provided. d. Other information to describe means of protecting occupied areas of the

building from dust, debris and personal injury.

3. Schematically indicate temporary isolation of HVAC system on plan.


a. Indicate location of proposed air filtration system, make-up air and air filtration discharge.

b. Other dust control measures.

4. Schematically indicate temporary isolation of building sprinkler system zones and duration of isolation during construction.

5. Schematically indicate waste management plan.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide the following under the Work of this Section:

1. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 6-mil minimum thickness, with flame spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84, black color where required in Section 02082.

2. Dust Barrier Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by polyethylene sheet manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations.

3. Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats of 36” x 60” minimum size at exits from work areas and wherever necessary to control the spread of dust from foot traffic.

4. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool or rock wool with maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.

5. Cold-formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 645, 40 ksi, of profile, size and base metal thickness required to produce assemblies complying with structural performance requirements.

6. Gypsum Board: Gypsum wall board, ASTM C 36, Type “X”, ½” or 5/8” thickness. 7. Doors and Frames: Hollow metal door frames with hollow metal or solid core doors

and hardware as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Material may be new or used.

C. Materials shall be adequate for purposes intended,

D. Materials shall not create unsafe or unsanitary conditions.

E. Materials shall be furnished in compliance with specified codes and standards.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide the following minimum equipment items under work of this Section:

1. Spring-Loaded Poles, Ceiling and Wall Rails and Side Wall Clamps: Dust barrier system for fast setup and breakdown dust barrier systems that consist of spring-loaded support poles that extend from 4’-7” to 12’-0” or 6’-9” to 21’-0” and hold plastic sheet in position as a curtain barrier equal to system manufactured by Zipwall, 37 Broadway, Arlington, MA 02474, (800) 718-2255, (www.zipwall.com).

2. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated with class and extinguishing agent as required by specified Code and the Ft. Leonard Wood Fire Department for locations and classes of fire exposure.

3. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter equipped portable units with four stage filtration.


a. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. b. Configure to run continuously.

2.3 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Temporary Walls, Closures, Security Enclosures and Barricades:

1. Provide and maintain all barricades or enclosures required to protect the work in progress from outside elements, dust, interior construction dust and noise, and other disturbances as a result of work under this Contract.

2. Such protection shall be positive, shall meet the approval of the Contracting Officer, and shall be maintained for the duration of the construction period, or as required to provide for the protection as specified.

B. Provide weather protection for materials and allow for effective construction heating and to prevent entry of unauthorized personnel.

C. Maintain site and work areas in secure, enclosed condition at end of each workday.

1. Provide temporary enclosures or barriers of substantial construction. 2. Provide temporary opening protections where areas cannot be closed and secured

at the end of each workday.

2.4 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS

A. Contractor coordinate installation of temporary protective coverings with work of various trades.

B. Contractor provide temporary protective coverings over finishes that could be damaged by construction activities.

C. Protective coverings shall be maintained throughout the duration when construction activities require surface protection or until the Contracting Officer authorizes removal.

D. Regularly clean areas and protective coverings as construction activities require in order to prevent damage to new finishes and substrates.

E. Upon completion of work remove temporary protective coverings, clean and repair any damage to new construction surfaces.

2.5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTION

A. Provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work, all temporary rigging, scaffolding, hoisting equipment, ladders to roof, barricades around openings, and all other temporary work as required to complete all work of the Contract.

B. Contractor shall coordinate the use and furnishing of scaffolds with his subcontractors.

C. Provide, maintain and remove upon completion of the work, or sooner if authorized by the Contracting Officer, all fences, barricades, lights, shoring, pedestrian walkways, and other protective structures or devices necessary for the safety of workmen, AAFES employees, equipment, the public, and property.


D. All temporary construction and equipment shall conform to all regulations, ordinances, laws and other requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, including insurance companies, with regards to safety precautions, operation and fire hazard.

E. Pumping: Provide and maintain pumping facilities, including power, for keeping the site, excavations and structures free of accumulations of water at all times, whether from underground seepage, rainfall, drainage or broken lines.

2.6 MAINTENANCE OF SECURITY

A. Initiate security program in compliance with Installation’s directions prior to mobilization.

B. Maintain security program throughout construction period until AAFES acceptance precludes need for Contractor security.

C. Vehicle use shall be enforced as follows:

1. Keep all vehicles, mechanized or motorized equipment locked at all times when parked or unattended on site.

2. Do not leave vehicle unattended with engine running or with ignition key in place. 3. Parking will be permitted only in areas designated by Ft. Leonard Wood DPW. 4. All traffic control shall be subject to Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Safety Office and

Traffic Control approval.

D. Comply with requirements set forth in Paragraphs 2.3 and 2.4 for secure closure of all window openings during window replacement operations.

2.7 ENTRANCE CONTROL

A. Provide control of all construction personnel and vehicles entering and leaving project site and building.

B. Unauthorized Entry:

1. Maintain provision for closing and locking the building as soon as possible. 2. When exterior work is in process such as concrete finish work, the Contractor shall

maintain a night watchman on the premises until such time that the work cannot be harmed or damaged.

C. Damage or Theft:

1. Protect the work and material to be used on the project, from damages or loss due to the elements, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, or other causes.

2. Contractor shall be held responsible for such damages, or loss, which he shall remedy at his expense.

2.8 TOOL AND EQUIPMENT SECURITY

A. Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of tool and equipment storage security program prior to commencement of work.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with tool and equipment security program and shall inform all workers of specific requirements affecting each craft.

C. Storage of tools and equipment will be allowed within the facility.


2.9 PROJECT BULLETIN BOARD

A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain, during the life of the project, a weather tight bulletin board approximately 3 feet high by 5 feet wide, having not less than two hinged or sliding glass doors with provisions for locking.

1. The bulletin board shall be mounted where, and as approved by the Contracting Officer, in a prominent place, accessible to employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors, and to applicants for employment.

2. The bulletin board shall remain the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed by him upon completion of the contract work.

B. The following information, which will be furnished by AAFES to the Contractor (except safety posters), shall be posted on the bulletin board, and shall be maintained by the Contractor in an easily readable condition at all times for the duration of the Contract:

1. The Equal Employment Opportunity Poster and Notice of Nondiscrimination of Employment (Standard Form 38).

2. Wage Rate Information Poster (Form SOL 155), with the contract schedule of minimum rates as required by the Davis-Bacon Act.

3. Safety posters.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Consult with Contracting Officer, review site conditions and factors that affect construction procedures and construction aids, which may be affected by execution of the work.

B. Coordinate requirements for enclosures and installation procedures with Ft. Leonard Wood DPW representative(s).

3.2 INSTALLATION-GENERAL

A. Provide temporary facilities, barriers and controls for use when necessary to avoid delay in performance of Contract and maintain until no longer necessary or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent construction.

B. Locate temporary facilities, barriers and controls where they will suitably serve Project, result in minimum interference with performance of Work and least interfere with AAFES operations.

C. Relocate and modify temporary facilities, barriers and controls as Work progresses to maintain criteria set forth above.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Maintain support facilities until Contracting Officer schedules Substantial Completion inspection.

2. Remove before Substantial Completion.


3. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and maintain Project site, excavations and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Sections for requirements pertaining to waste disposal and recycling, including disposal of materials controlled by Ft. Leonard Wood.

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed new opening cuts in exterior of existing building.

1. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

2. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

C. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through or adjacent to areas of Work where overhead hazard exists.

1. Coordinate with entrances, other temporary facilities, barriers, controls and obstructions.

2. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and requirements indicated on Drawings.

3. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage.

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and after completion from the following:


1. Exposure, inclement weather, other construction operations and similar activities. 2. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

F. Temporary Barriers: Provide floor-to-roof deck dustproof barriers to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by AAFES and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required, provide a single layer of 6-mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet.

a. Tape all joints and provide fire resistive treated 2 x 4 wood or metal stud top and bottom runners and verticals 4 foot o.c. with polyethylene sheet wrapped and taped to the runners.

b. Seal Joints and Perimeter:

1.) Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required.

2.) Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining specified exiting requirements.

c. At Contractors option the specified Zipwall temporary barrier system may be used in lieu of field constructed temporary dust barriers.

2. Opaque Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required and where indicated for long duration separation of construction operations from AAFES and tenant spaces provide braced metal stud framing:

a. Cover framing on construction side with 6-mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet with taped joints and perimeter.

b. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire taped on the AAFES/tenant side from floor to ceiling.

c. Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from unconditioned construction areas.

d. Seal Joints and Perimeter:

1.) Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required.

2.) Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining specified exiting requirements.

3. Security Weather-tight Barrier: Where a secure weather-tight barrier is required and where a temporary exit enclosure through surrounding and overhead construction is indicated, provide braced metal stud framing:

a. Cover framing on construction or exterior side with ½ inch plywood. b. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire-taped on the AAFES/public side on entire

enclosure. c. Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from the

exterior, unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to sales, food service or office areas.

d. Panelize framing for ease of removal and relocation.

G. Temporary Opening Protection: Provide temporary rated and non-rated hollow metal doors and frames or suitable equivalent of substantial construction as approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.


1. Dust Barriers and Opaque Dust Barrier Doors:

a. Construct at each access through the barrier. b. Doors shall be hinged with latches and provided with padlocks in accordance

with AAFES security. c. Maintain adhesive surfaced foot mats in door locations.

2. Security Barrier Doors:

a. Construct at each exterior opening through barrier. b. Doors and frames shall be hollow metal and of substantial gauge and

anchorage to provide secure enclosure. c. Set doors and frames to swing in the direction of exit travel. d. Provide hinges, exit devices and closers with exit devices always operable in

the direction of exiting and locked on the opposite side.

H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses and in compliance with NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at Project site.

a. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures.

b. Post warnings and information.

3.5 REMOVAL

A. Upon Contracting Officer's prior written authorization, completely remove temporary materials and equipment.

B. Clean and repair all damage caused by installation.

C. Restore to original conditions.

END 01500.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01510 – TEMPORARY UTILITIES

TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor provide and maintain during construction period:

1. All temporary utilities for construction:

a. Electricity. b. Lighting. c. Heat. d. Ventilation. e. Telephone service. f. Water. g. Sanitary facilities.

2. All temporary utilities listed above for temporary field offices and storage sheds. 3. All temporary utilities in excess of those specified, or exceeding capacity of

existing or permanent systems.




C. Section 01590 – AAFES Field Offices and Sheds.

D. Section 01620 – Storage & Protection.

E. Division 15 – Mechanical.

F. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.3 UTILITY PROVIDERS

A. AAFES will pay for utilities consumed for this Project (water, sewer, gas and electricity), furnished from existing sources, for building construction purposes.

B. Contractor shall coordinate and provide services, permit fees (if required) and pay the prevailing rate for utilities consumed as required for temporary construction offices and storage needs.

C. Ft. Leonard Wood utilities information will be made available to Contractor by contacting (573) 596-0073 for Water, Sanitary Sewer, Natural Gas, Power and Communications.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Obtain and pay for all permits and inspections required by Ft. Leonard Wood authorities.

B. Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of bidding documents.


1. National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241. 2. Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1. 3. Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7. 4. National Electric Code (ANSI C1). 5. National Electrical Safety Code. 6. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Standards. 7. Federal and State Requirements.

1.5 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE FOR PROJECT CONSTRUCTION

A. AAFES will furnish source for temporary water from existing water service within the building for building construction use.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary water service from source to be used for construction needs, fire protection, cleaning and miscellaneous use throughout the construction period.

1. The temporary water service shall originate after the meter from the building water source coordinated with Contracting Officer or designated representative and AAFES Store Manager.

2. Extend piping from source to points as needed for construction in compliance with referenced Codes and regulations of Ft. Leonard Wood.

3. Size temporary water service as needed for construction operations. 4. Provide certified reduced pressure zone (RPZ) backflow protection. 5. Provide water hoses from source to point of operations.

C. Do not route temporary water piping on grade, floor or roof during construction and provide drip pans under each temporary water connection where damage to new materials could result.

D. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of water usage during construction.

E. AAFES will pay for the cost of water consumed during construction until beneficial occupancy by AAFES.

1.6 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC FOR PROJECT CONSTRUCTION

A. AAFES will furnish source for temporary power from existing power panel in the building for building construction use.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary secondary electric load center for construction needs throughout the construction period per Ft. Leonard Wood standards.

1. The temporary electric service shall be a 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 200 amp minimum service for construction operations.

2. Provide a power center at all locations needed for Construction consisting of the following:

a. Main disconnect. b. 20 amp, 120/208 volt circuits as necessary, each protected by a circuit

breaker, for use by all trades.

1.) All outlets shall be grounded. 2.) Outlets shall be located so that no extensions are more than 100 feet

in length.


3. Users shall provide grounded, Underwriters’ Laboratories approved extension cords from power center to point of operations.

C. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of power usage during construction.

D. AAFES will pay for the cost of electricity consumed during construction, including power consumed after installation of permanent service, until beneficial occupancy by AAFES.

E. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of five (5) foot candles in all work areas.

1. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

2. Provide guarded lighting sockets and lamps.

a. Use 100 watt lamps, minimum. b. Maintain socket voltage of 100 volts minimum in lighting system.

3. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 4. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction where available.

F. Standards: The temporary electric service shall comply with the National Electric Code.

1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. Contractor shall provide, install and maintain temporary heat in the construction areas throughout the construction period to facilitate the progress of work, protect work against cold, dampness, condensation, and to provide suitable ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper installation and curing of materials.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary heat meeting the following requirements:

1. As required under each individual specification Section for each product or material during storage.

2. As required under each individual specification Section for proper placement, setting, and curing of materials.

3. Maintain a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F. (5 degrees C.) for twenty-four (24) hours a day during placing, setting, and curing of cementitious materials.

4. Maintain a minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. (28 degrees C.) for twenty four (24) hours a day, seven day prior to and during placing of interior finishes, including but not limited to:

a. Gypsum drywall. b. Painting. c. Vinyl wall covering. d. Resilient flooring and base. e. Tile work. f. Acoustic ceilings. g. Finish woodwork/casework.

5. Maintain specified temperatures from the time of placement until beneficial occupancy, for installation all finish materials.

C. Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for temporary heating equipment of adequate capacity to provide temporary heat meeting the requirements of this Section.


D. Contractor may use the permanent heating system for building construction purposes under the following conditions:

1. Contractor shall obtain approval for use and operation of the system from the Contracting Officer and verify proper filters are in place.

2. Contractor shall provide and pay for maintenance and shall provide new filters and replace any damaged or worn parts immediately and until final acceptance by AAFES.

E. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of energy usage during construction.

F. AAFES will pay the cost for electricity and/or natural gas utilities consumed by the temporary and permanent heating equipment.

1.8 TEMPORARY COOLING

A. Contractor shall provide, install and maintain temporary cooling in the construction areas throughout the construction period to facilitate the progress of work, protect work against dampness, condensation, and to provide suitable ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper installation and curing of materials.

B. Contractor may utilize the permanent cooling system to maintain temperatures and humidity during construction.

1. Extend and supplement with temporary cooling devices as needed. 2. Maintain conditions during the installation of finish materials as specified in

individual specification Sections.

C. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F (26 degrees C) in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, the contractor shall obtain approval for use and operation of the system from the Contracting Officer and verify filters are in place.

E. Contractor shall provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts immediately and until final acceptance by AAFES.

F. AAFES will pay for the cost of electricity consumed by the temporary or permanent cooling equipment.

1.9 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation to:

1. Aid in curing installed materials. 2. Dispersal of humidity. 3. Ventilation of temporary sanitary facilities. 4. Prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapors, or gases in areas

occupied during construction.

B. Contractor shall employ the use of temporary ventilating equipment, adequately sized to accomplish the required ventilation.


C. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of power usage for ventilation during construction.

D. AAFES will pay for the cost of electricity consumed during construction.

1.10 TELEPHONE SERVICE

A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization.

B. Refer to Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds.

1.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Phasing of Project shall be accomplished to maintain functional toilet facilities within the building at all times for use by customers and employees but not for use by construction personnel.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities and enclosures for use by construction personnel and authorized parties throughout construction period.

1. Existing facility use in this or nearby buildings is not permitted. 2. Provide at time of project mobilization.

C. Furnish, install, and maintain adequate portable chemical toilets.

D. Provide regular maintenance service to maintain clean and sanitary conditions.



END 01510.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01590 – AAFES FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS

AAFES FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS 01590-1

1 GENERAL


A. Temporary field office and storage sheds.

B. Maintenance and cleaning.

C. Removal.




C. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities & Controls.

D. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS

A. Materials, Equipment, Furnishings: Serviceable, new or used like-new, adequate for required purpose.

B. Temporary field office and storage sheds may be furnished at Contractor’s option for this Project.

1. It is the intent of this Section to establish a minimum standard of quality for a temporary field office and storage sheds.

2. Should Contractor determine the need for such temporary facilities they shall be furnished in compliance with requirements set forth below.

C. If Contractor determines that a temporary field office and/or storage shed(s) will be necessary, Contractor shall make all arrangements with Ft. Leonard Wood for installation of temporary facilities and pay all costs associated with mobilization/demobilization and utilities in full compliance with all requirements set forth by Ft. Leonard Wood DPW, utility companies and Federal, State and Local authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Buildings: Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.

B. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office and storage spaces.

1. Maintain during progress of Work. 2. Remove at completion of Work.


C. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements.

D. Exterior Materials: Weather resistant, finished in one color acceptable to Ft. Leonard Wood DPW.

E. Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, pre-finished or painted with resilient floors and bases.

F. Lighting for Offices (At Contractor’s Option): 50 ft-C (538 lx) at desktop height and exterior lighting at entrance doors.

G. Fire Extinguishers: One 10# standard dry chemical (ABC) type fire extinguisher at each office and each storage area.

H. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of products.

2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL

A. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) heating and 76 degrees F (23 degrees C) cooling.

B. Storage Spaces (At Contractor’s Option or as Required for Materials being Stored): Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain Products in accordance with Contract Documents and adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of Products.

2.4 CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIES

A. Size:

1. To meet Contractor's needs. 2. Minimum size for office space shall be 100 square feet.

B. Telephone:

1. At Contractor’s option he shall install, maintain and pay for telephone service for the Contractor's field office including an answering device and outside bell.

2. Mobile telephones will be acceptable providing non-interrupted service can be established between the Contractor and the following:

a. Contracting Officer or designated representative. b. AAFES Project Manager. c. Post DPW. d. Architect-Engineer. e. All other relevant parties including major subcontractors and material

suppliers.

C. Fax (At Contractor’s Option): Install, maintain and pay for facsimile service for the Contractor's Field Office.

D. Furnishings: Contractor's option.

E. Equipment:


1. Four (4) adjustable band protective helmets for visitors. 2. One (1) 10 inch (250 mm) outdoor weather thermometer. 3. Weather protected bulletin board for posting information required by the contract.

2.5 STORAGE AREAS AND SHEDS

A. Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections.

B. Allow for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.

B. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not permitted on Installation property.

3.3 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

A. Weekly cleaning services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas.

B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow.

3.4 REMOVAL

A. At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas.

END 01590.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01600 – MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1

PART 1 GENERAL



1. Specified materials and equipment. 2. Coordination of delivery for materials and equipment. 3. Coordination of space allocation to receive materials and equipment. 4. Coordination and space allocation to receive materials and equipment delivered by

AAFES and AAFES Vendors. 5. Transportation and delivery. 6. Equipment and personnel at site.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Leonard Wood. 2. 01010 – Summary of Work. 3. 01017 – AAFES Furnish & Installed Equipment. 4. 01018 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment. 5. 01030 – Substitutions & Product Options. 6. 01340 – Submittals. 7. 01500 – Temporary Facilities & Controls. 8. 01510 – Temporary Utilities. 9. 01520 – Contractor Prepared Progress Schedule. 10. 01590 – Field Offices & Storage Sheds. 11. 01620 – Storage and Protection. 12. 01710 – Cleaning. 13. 01720 – Project Record Documents. 14. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.2 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation:

1. Provide three (3) copies to the Contracting Officer. 2. Transmit one (1) copy to the Architect-Engineer. 3. Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at job site during installation and until

completion. 4. Retain an additional three (3) sets of complete instructions for insertion in Operation

and Maintenance Manuals to be submitted at Final Completion.

B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.

1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Contracting Officer for further instructions.

2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.

C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK

A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2

B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by Contracting Officer.

C. Manufactured and fabricated products:

1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with best engineering and shop practices. 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be

interchangeable. 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to

unless variations are specifically approved in writing.

D. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified.

E. Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos, lead paint, PCB's or other hazardous materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site.

1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of contract documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged.

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging.

C. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of assemblies or equipment to permit easy identification of parts and to facilitate assembly.

D. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent scraping, marring or other damage to products, equipment or surrounding surfaces.

3.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. In accord with Section 01620.

END 01600.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01620 – STORAGE & PROTECTION

STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01620-1

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Contractor provide and maintain:

1. Coordination of location for storage of materials with Ft. Leonard Wood DPW. 2. Coordination of location for storage of materials with Contracting Officer, AAFES

General Manager and AAFES Store Manager. 3. Storage for materials and equipment to be installed in project. 4. Protection and security for stored materials and equipment, on and off site. 5. Maintenance and protection for products, materials and equipment after installation

and until completion of project. 6. Cooperate and assist AAFES in storage and protection of equipment.


A. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Leonard Wood. 2. 01010 – Summary of Work. 3. 01017 – AAFES Furnish & Installed Equipment. 4. 01018 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment. 5. 01030 – Substitutions & Product Options. 6. 01340 – Submittals. 7. 01500 – Temporary Facilities & Controls. 8. 01510 – Temporary Utilities. 9. 01520 – Contractor Prepared Progress Schedule. 10. 01590 – Field Offices & Storage Sheds. 11. 01620 – Storage and Protection. 12. 01710 – Cleaning. 13. 01720 – Project Record Documents. 14. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01340, submit:

1. Request for allocation of storage space, if applicable. 2. List of materials and equipment to be stored. 3. Proposed location for storage. 4. Special storage requirements. 5. Schedule of anticipated storage dates.

1.4 STORAGE

A. Obtain permission from Ft. Leonard Wood DPW and coordinate with appropriate authorities, including AAFES General Manager and AFFES Store Manager for suitable storage area on Project Site or in the vicinity of the Project Site and as indicated.

B. Store products immediately on delivery and protect.

C. Store in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weathertight enclosures.

1. Maintain temperatures within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide humidity control for sensitive products, as required by manufacturer's

instructions. 3. Store unpacked products on shelves, in bins or in neat piles, accessible for

inspection.


E. Exterior Storage:

1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking or skids to support fabricated products above ground.

a. Prevent soiling or staining. b. Cover products, subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the

elements, with impervious sheet coverings. c. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

2. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces such as paved areas, or provide plywood or sheet materials to prevent mixing with foreign matter.

a. Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rainwater. b. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious material or liquids.

F. Arrange storage in manner to provide easy access for inspection.

1. Do not inhibit use of:

a. Fire lanes and exits. b. Roadways. c. Driveways. d. Loading docks. e. Adjacent properties.

G. Store combustible materials in accordance with applicable regulations.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE

A. Maintain periodic system of inspection of stored products on scheduled basis to assure that:

1. State of storage facilities is adequate to provide required conditions. 2. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. 3. Surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected. 4. Any weathering of products, coatings and finishes is not acceptable under

requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Provide continuous maintenance for all temporary structures.

C. Repair or refinish damaged or weathered portions of structure as required to maintain in specified condition.

D. Repair or replace defective utility connections required for temporary utilities.

E. Clean storage areas at least once a week.

1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

A. Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations and remove when no longer needed, prior to completion of work.

B. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment and surfaces.

C. Provide coverings to protect finished surfaces from damage.

1. Cover projections, wall corners, and jambs, sills and soffits of openings, in areas used for traffic and for passage of products in subsequent work.

2. Protect finished floors and stairs from dirt and damage:

a. In areas subject to foot traffic, secure heavy paper, sheet goods, or other materials in place.

b. For movement of heavy products, lay planking or similar materials in place. c. For storage of products, lay tight wood sheathing in place.


D. Waterproofed and roofing surfaces:

1. Prohibit use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of any products. 2. When some activity must take place in order to carry out the contract, obtain

recommendations of installer for protection of surface.

a. Install recommended protection and remove on completion of that activity. b. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.

E. Landscaping:

1. Protect and prohibit activities that could damage new landscaping. 2. Prohibit traffic of any kind across newly planted areas.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED.

PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT USED.

END 01620.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01650 – SYSTEMS START-UP

SYSTEMS START-UP 01650-1

1 GENERAL


A. Starting Special Construction, Mechanical and Electrical systems.

B. Demonstration and instructions for Ft. Leonard Wood and AAFES personnel for Special Construction, Mechanical and Electrical systems.

C. Initial starting and operational testing for AF/AI, AF/CI equipment, fixtures and signage.

D. Coordination of testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC systems.



B. Section 01017 – AFFES Furnished/AAFES Installed Equipment.

C. Section 01018 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment.

D. Section 01400 – Quality Control. (Manufacturers field reports.)

E. Section 01720 – Project Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials.

F. Section 11400 – Food Service Equipment.

G. Division 13 – Special Construction.

H. Division 15 – Mechanical.

I. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.3 STARTING SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall coordinate and schedule start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Contracting Officer and designated representative seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Contractor shall provide:

1. Initial start-up and functional testing of all Food Service Equipment to ensure installation is complete and equipment is functionally ready for AAFES provided final start-up and training demonstrations to employees.

2. Final start-up and testing of Fire Alarm, Fire Protection, HVAC, Electrical, and Communications equipment items and training for Ft. Leonard Wood and AAFES employees for operation, adjusting and maintenance of that equipment.

D. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.


E. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

F. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

G. Execute initial start-up and functional testing under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative and/or Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

H. When specified in individual specification Sections for building equipment, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

I. Submit a typewritten report to Architect/Engineer and Contracting Officer, in accordance with Section 01340, that each piece of equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1. Provide copies of typewritten reports in O & M Manuals at Project Close-out.

1.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall provide sign-in log sheets and written meeting minutes for each unit or group of units demonstrated.

1. Obtain contact information and signature for each demonstration attendee. 2. Provide written minutes of each demonstration conducted. 3. Submit dated written record of each demonstration, along with sign-in log sheet

and meeting minutes as part of Project Closeout submittals and specifically include with Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted under Section 01700.

B. Contractor provide videotaped CD in four (4) copies of each training session and each equipment demonstration session required to be conducted by Contractor below for submittal to AAFES and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW at Final Closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01700 and as follows.

1. Training and demonstration of Food Service Equipment and other major AAFES furnished equipment items will be performed by AAFES.

2. Training and demonstration of Fire Alarm, Sprinkler, Hood Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical and Communications systems equipment items shall be provided by Contractor and shall be recorded for submittal as indicated in Paragraph 1.4, B. above.

C. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to AAFES and Installation personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection.

D. Demonstrate project equipment by a qualified representative who is knowledgeable about the project.

E. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.

F. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction.

G. Review contents of operation and maintenance manuals with AFFES and Installation personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.


H. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at designated location.

I. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

J. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual Sections but in no case less than 1-hour for each unit or group of units demonstrated.

1.5 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 15993.

C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Contracting Officer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.



END 01650.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01700 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Substantial Completion.

B. Final Inspections.

C. Closeout Submittals.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. General Provisions of the Contract, Final Acceptance and Payment.

B. Section 01340 – Submittals.

C. Section 01710 – Cleaning.

D. Section 01720 – Project Record Documents.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Contractor:

1. Submit written certification to Contracting Officer and designated representative that project, or designated portion of Project, is substantially complete.

2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.

B. Contracting Officer will make an inspection after receipt of certification.

C. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is substantially complete:

1. Architect-Engineer will prepare, and submit to Contracting Officer and Contractor, a list of items to be completed or corrected, as determined by the inspection.

2. Contracting Officer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, containing:

a. Date of Substantial Completion. b. Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified, and amended by

Contracting Officer. c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items. d. Time and date AAFES will assume possession of work or designated portion

thereof. e. Responsibilities of AAFES and Contractor for:

1.) Utilities. 2.) Operation of mechanical, electrical, and other systems. 3.) Maintenance and cleaning. 4.) Security.

f. Signatures of:

1.) Contracting Officer. 2.) Contractor.

3. AAFES occupancy of project or designated portion of project:

a. Contractor shall perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01710. b. AAFES will occupy project, under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial

Completion.


4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.

D. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is not substantially complete:

1. He will immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor: Shall complete work, and send second written notice to contracting

officer and designated representative, certifying that project, or designated portion of project, is substantially complete.

3. Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.4 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed. 2. Project has been inspected for compliance with contract documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of AAFES and Installation

personnel are operational. 5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection.

B. Contracting Officer will make final inspection after receipt of certification.

C. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is finally complete in accordance with requirements of contract documents, he shall request Contractor to make project closeout submittals.

D. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is not finally complete:

1. He shall notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send

second written notice to the Contracting Officer certifying that work is complete. 3. The Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Project Record Documents: Specified requirements of Section 01720.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Submit 8-1/2 x 11 inch text page data bound in D-ring binders with durable plastic covers.

B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Manuals", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.

C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on 20 pound white paper, in three parts as follows:

1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.

2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section.

a. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers.


b. Identify the following:

1.) Significant design criteria. 2.) List of equipment. 3.) Parts list for each component. 4.) Operating instructions. 5.) Value chart. 6.) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 7.) Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

8.) End user agreement(s) and software license(s) where applicable.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. All approved shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties. e. Training Sessions attendance roster.

E. Submit four (4) copies of the bound operation and maintenance manuals plus CD's containing all bound information as follows:

1. AAFES: Two (2) copies manuals and CD's. 2. Ft. Leonard Wood DPW: Two (2) copies manuals and CD's.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall provide, at his expense, manufacturer's representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the drawings and specifications.

B. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to, and during the initial start up.

C. After all systems are functioning properly, the representatives shall instruct Facility Maintenance Personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each item.

D. In addition to instructions given at the project, the Facility Maintenance Personnel shall be given a classroom instruction course on operation and maintenance of the systems.

1. Training sessions shall be limited to four (4) continuous hours where practical. 2. Schedule additional four (4) hour sessions as required.

1.8 WARRANTY AND EXTENDED WARRANTIES:

A. Upon completion of project and prior to final payment Contractor shall furnish warranties as required by Contract and technical Sections of Specifications.

1. Contractor shall fully warrant all labor and materials for a full year following Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance of the Project by the Contracting Officer as required by the Contract for Construction in compliance with requirements set forth in Exhibit F of the Solicitation Package.

2. All applicable products, materials, systems and equipment entering into the Work shall be warranted by the manufacturer’s standard commercial warranty for a period of not less that one (1) year.


3. In addition to the standard warranty there are products, materials, systems and equipment designated in the Technical Sections of the specifications that shall be warranted beyond one (1) year.

a. Refer to Technical Sections for extended warranties beyond one (1) year. b. Provide manufacturer’s fully executed warranty for specified period,

commencing on date of Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance, covering items listed.

4. All warranties shall be properly executed in quadruplicate (1 original and 3 copies) by Contractor and submitted in conjunction with the bound O & M Manuals and CD's at Project Closeout for distribution to AAFES and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW.

B. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under contract.

C. Submit guarantee covering entire project for one year.

D. Submit separate extended warranties and guarantees for portions of work where Technical Sections of the specifications require longer periods of time.

1. Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods on these items.

E. Guarantees shall become valid and operative upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and Acceptance by AAFES.

F. Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is a result of abuse, neglect by AAFES, or his successor(s) in interest.

1.9 DD FORM 1354:

A. Preparation of DD Form 1354 "Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property":

1. At the conclusion of the project the Contractor will compile and furnish to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer all related cost information, equipment models numbers and quantity data of materials and systems furnished and installed.

2. A list of items for which the costs, model numbers and quantity data are required will be furnished to the Contractor by the Architect-Engineer.

B. Such information shall be returned to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer within 10 days from the receipt of the list.

C. Architect-Engineer will prepare and submit a copy of DD Form 1354 to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to Ft. Leonard Wood Real Property office at completion of Project.

D. DD Form 1354 Attachments:

1. Department of Defense Instruction, Form 4165.40. 2. Suggested Instructions for Preparing DD Form 1354. 3. Checklist for Buildings Info for DD Form 1354 & Real Property Card. 4. Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property, DD Form 1354.



END 01700.

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

1


2


3

SUGGESTED INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING DD FORM 1354 (TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY)

1. The page number and the total number of pages comprising each transfer shall be shown in the space provided at the top

right-hand part of the form. 2. When two or more pages are required, Items 27 through 29 shall be completed only on the final page. In such cases, the

bottom portion of the form shall be torn off of all pages, except the final page, at the line above Items 27 and 28. ITEM 1 - Self – explanatory ITEM 2 - Primarily for Navy use, the district number will be assigned by area or district public works office in accordance with coding pattern set forth in NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 6. For Army use, enter appropriate Army Engineer district where construction is performed and/or from which the transfer is made. For transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter appropriate Army Engineer district or the district number assigned by area, or Naval district public works office from which the construction transfer is made. ITEM 4 - For Navy use only, see NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 5. ITEM 5 - Enter date of preparation. ITEM 6 – For Army use, enter appropriate Army job and directive number. For Air Force use, enter base job number, as appropriate, when form is used for transfer within the Air Force. ITEM 7 – For Army use, or for transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter separate series of numbers, by fiscal year, for each installation to which real property is transferred; e.g., for FY 1962 show 62-1, 62-2, etc. For Navy use, this serial number will be assigned by respective area or district public works office and will represent the numerical sequence of submissions by respective contract number. ITEM 8 – Insert appropriate contract number. ITEM 9 – Self-explanatory. ITEM 10 – 12: Instructions for Items 2,3 and 4 apply. (not applicable for Air For Use.) ITEM 13 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to or used by the activity named in accordance with Item 9. See NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 10. ITEM 14 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to the activity performing the official property accounting for the activity shown in Item 9. See NAVCompt Manual, Vol. 2, Chapter 5, for accounting numbers. ITEM 15 – Insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (A) to indicate whether the transfer involves new construction, existing facilities or capital improvements to existing facilities. If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. Additionally, insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (B) to indicate whether transfer is being made at time of beneficial occupancy, physical completion or financial completion (with respect to new construction). If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. ITEM 16 – Enter the code number assigned to identify the project with the appropriate construction authorization law. ITEM 17 – Each single entry will be identified as an item number and this item number will be shown in this column. ITEM 18 – 19: Category Code and Description. Enter the category code and description (see DoD Instruction 4165.3 (reference (a) ) or attachment 1 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)) that appropriately describes the primary use for which the facility (buildings, structures, utilities) is designed. Not more than one category code (Item 18) will be listed as a line item (Item 17).


4

ITEM 20 – Number of Units in terms of buildings or other structures. ITEM 21 – Type – enter type of construction; i.e., “P” for permanent, “S” for semipermanent or “T” for temporary. ITEM 22 – Enter the unit of measure abbreviation, such as “SF” for square feet, etc. (see attachment 2 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)). ITEM 23 – Enter total quantity as described In Item 22. ITEM 24 –Indicate by item number, category code, and description the appropriate cost. In those instances where a document is prepared which lists items carrying costs which, in some cases, may be final and in others may be preliminary, each cost figure by line item will carry an alphabetical suffix of (P) for preliminary or (F) for final. ITEM 25 – 31: Self-explanatory. #First amendment (Ch 1, 7/28/67)

HQ

Arm

y &

Air

Fo

rce

Exc

han

ge

Ser

vice

Des

ign

Cri

teri

a M

anu

al

EX

HIB

IT J

TR

AN

SF

ER

AN

D A

CC

EP

TA

NC

E O

F M

ILIT

AR

Y R

EA

L P

RO

PE

RT

Y

PA

GE

O

F

PA

GE

S

1.

FR

OM

: (I

nsta

llatio

n/A

ctiv

ity/S

ervi

ce)

2.

O

PE

RA

TIN

G

UN

IT

3. D

IS

TR

ICT

C

OD

E

4. O

PE

R

AT

ING

A

GE

NC

Y

5. D

AT

E

6. J

OB

NU

MB

ER

7.

SE

RIA

L N

UM

BE

R

7. C

ON

TR

AC

T

NU

MB

ER

15.

TY

PE

OF

TR

AN

SA

CT

ION

1.

F

RO

M:

(Ins

talla

tion/

Act

ivity

/Ser

vice

) 2.

O

PE

RA

TIN

G

UN

IT

11.

DIS

-T

RIC

T

CO

DE

12.

OP

ER

A

TIN

G

AG

EN

CY

13. A

C

CO

UN

TIN

GN

UM

BE

R

14. A

C

CO

UN

T-

OF

FIC

E

NU

MB

ER

NE

W C

ON

ST

R

EX

IST

ING

FA

C

CA

PIT

AL

IM

P

OT

HE

R (

SP

EC

IFY

)

B

EN

F/O

P

HY

SIC

AL

C

OM

F

IN. C

OM

O

TH

ER

(S

PE

CIF

Y)

16.

PR

OJE

CT

N

UM

BE

R

ITE

M

NO

.

17

CA

TE

GO

RT

Y

CO

DE

18

FA

CIL

ITY

(c

ateg

ory

desc

riptio

n)

19

NO

. O

F

UN

ITS

20

TY

PE

21

UN

IT

OF

M

EA

S

22

TO

TA

L Q

UA

NT

ITY

23

CO

ST

24

DR

AW

ING

N

UM

BE

RS

25

RE

MA

RK

S

26

41

65

27.

STA

TE

ME

NT

OF

CO

MPL

ET

ION

: T

he f

acil

ites

list

ed h

ereo

n ar

e in

acc

orda

nce

with

map

s, d

raw

ings

, an

d sp

ecif

icat

ions

and

cha

nge

orde

rs a

ppro

ved

by th

e au

thor

ized

rep

rese

ntat

ive

of th

e us

ing

agen

cy e

xcep

t fo

r th

e de

fici

enci

es li

sted

on

the

reve

rse

side

.

28. A

CC

EP

TE

D B

Y (

Sig

natu

re)

DA

TE

TR

AN

SF

ER

RE

D B

Y (

Sig

natu

re)

Titl

e (A

rea

Eng

r./B

ase

Eng

r/ D

PW

O)

DA

TE

TIT

LE (

Pos

t E

ngr.

/Bas

e E

ngr.

/Nav

y R

ep.)

29

. PR

OP

ER

TY

V

OU

CH

ER

NU

MB

ER

DD

FO

RM

1 N

0V 6

1 135

4

SU

PE

RS

ED

ES

EN

G F

OR

MS

290

AN

D 2

90B

AN

D N

AV

DO

CK

S F

OR

M 2

317

4165.40 (Encl 1) Nov 14, 61

5 of 11


Page 6 of 11

30. CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES

31. REMARKS

This form has been designed and issued for use in connection with the transfer of military real property between the military departments and to or form other government agencies. It supersedes ENG Forms 290 and 290B (formerly used by the Army and Air Force) and NAVDOCKS Form 2317 (formerly used by the Navy). Existing instruction issued by the military departments relative to the preparation of the three superseded forms are applicable to this form to the extent that the various items and

columns on the superseded forms have been retained. Additional instructions, as appropriate, will be promulgated by the military departments in connection with any new items appearing hereon. With the issuance of this DD form, it is not intended that the department shall revise and reprint manuals and directives simply to show the number of this DD form. Such action can be accomplished through the normal course of revision for other reasons.


Page 7 of 11

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 CATEGORY CODES: VERIFY FOR ARMY FACILITIES AND AIR FORCE FACILITIES OF THE SAME DESCRIPTION • • • (ABBREVIATION-NOMENCLATURE) * DESCRIPTION: ARMY AIR FORCE SHOPPING CENTER: (EXCH MAIN RETL) : 740-53 (EXCH SALES STORE) 740111 SHOPPETTE (EXCHANGE BRANCH) :740-50 (EXCH BRANCH) 740382 CLASS SIX (CLASS VI) :740-84 (BSE PACKAGE STORE) 740269 CAR CARE CENTER (EXCH SVC STA) :740-52 (EXCH SVC STN) 740383 BURGER KING (POST RESTAURANT) :740-64 (EXCH CAFE SNK BAR) 722345 CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST

1. BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE: A.RETAIL AREAS:___________SF B. ADMIN/EMPLOYEE AREA_________SF C. MPA:___________SF D. SERVICES ACTIVITIES: ____________________SF E. FOOD ACTIVITIES________SF. F. MALL/PUBLIC TOILETS: ___________________SF G. MERCH. EQUIP. RM______SF H. TOTAL BLDG:___________SF

2. BUILDING $ _____________________ (TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE LESS THE SUM OF THE FOLLOWING) 3. HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM $ _____________________ TOTAL:_________________TONS

(AR)826-11 OVER 100 TONS (AC PL OV 110 TN) (AF)826123 OVER 100 TONS (A/C PLT OVET 100 TN) (AR)826-12 26-100 TONS (AC PL-26-100 TN) (AF)826122 25-100 TONS (A/C PLT 25<100 TN) (AR)826-13 6-25 TONS (AC PL 6-25- TN) (AF)890121 5-25 TONS (A/C PL 5 TO 25 TN)

4. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (FIRE ALARM SYS) AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM $______________________

(AR)880-50 (AUTO SPNLKR SYS) (AF)880221 (AUTO FR DTECTN SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ FOAM FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (AR)880-60 (AUTO SPNKLR SYS) $______________________ (AF)980235 (DRY CHEM SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ (AR)843-11 FIRE HYDRANTS $______________________ (AF)843315 (FR HYDR)

5. UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (INCLUDE. METER $______________________ (AR)812-42 UNGD ELEC DISTR) (AF) (SEC DISTR LNE UG) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:___________L.F OF____IN. CONDUIT AND_____________CONDUCTOR


Page 8 of 11

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)

CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 6. ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER $______________________

(AR)813-60 (TRANSFORMER) (AF)812225 (PRIM DISTR LNE UG) PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER____________KVA

7. NATURAL GAS LINE TO BUILDING (INC. METER) $______________________ (AR)824-10 (GAS PIPE LIBE) (AF)824464 (GAS MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________)

8. UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE $______________________ (AR)..... (UNDG TELEPHONE) (AF)135583 (TEL DUCT FCLTY) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. CONDUIT

9. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)832-10 (SANITARY SEWER) (AF)932267 (SAN SEWAGE MAIN) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL: _________________)

10. GREASE INTERCEPTOR $______________________ (AR)833-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) CAPACITY ___________GALLONS

11. STORM SEWER SYSTEM

(AR)871-10 (STORM SEWER) (AF)871183 (STRM DRN DSPL) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) TOTAL NUMBER OF DROP INLETS:___________

12. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)842-10 (WATER PIPE LN P) (AF)842245 (WTR DISTR MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING :____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER)

13. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM $______________________ (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER) (AR)871-30 (IRRIGATION FAC) TOTAL NUMBET OF HEADS_________________

14. DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE $______________________ (AR)833-12 (REFUSE COLL BLD) TOTAL AREA:_____________S.F.


Page 9 of 11


CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 15. PAVING (NON ORGANIZATION VEHICLE PARKING) $______________________

(AR)852-15 (NON ORG VEH PRK) (AF)852262 (VEH PKING N/ORGN) TOTAL ASPHALT PAVING:___________S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL TOTAL CONCRETE PAVING:_________ S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL

16. CONCRETE WALKS, SLABS & PADS $______________________ (AR)852-20 (SIDEWALK) (AF)852289 (SIDEWALK) PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC TOTAL AREA:____________S.F. (EXCLUDING PAVER TILES)

17. CONCRETE CURBS & GUTTERS $______________________ (AR)851-10 (ROADS PAVED) (AF)851143 (CURBS & GUTTERS) TOTAL AREA:____________L.F.

18. EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING (EXT LIGHTING) $______________________ (AR)812-30 (EXT LIGHTING) (AF)812926 (EXTERIOR AREA LTG) TOTAL NUMBER OF POLES______________________

19. LANDSCAPING (RELATED LAND IMPROV NB) $______________________ (AR)871-75 (RELATED LAND INPROV NB)

20. GASOLINE DISPENSING SYSTEMS $______________________ (AR)411-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS: NUMBER OF TANKS:_____ SIZE:______ GALLONS NUMBER OF DISPENSERS:__________ NUMBER OF HOSES:_______________ CANOPY SIZE:______ SF $_________________ KIOSKS: NUMBER________MGFR____________ COST $ ____________________

21. CHAIN LINK FENCING (FENCE OR WALLS) $______________________ (AR)872-10 (FENCE OR WALLS) (AF)872248 (FENCE INTERIOR) TOTAL LINEAR FEET:_______________L.F.

22. TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS: $______________________


Page 10 of 11


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS H.V.A.C. UNITS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. EXHAUST FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. SUPPLY FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. CHILLER BOILER HEAT PUMP ROOFTOP A/C UNITS DOCK LEVELERS DOCK SHELTERS ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PANELS / LIGHT FIXTURES ITEM NO MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER QUANTITY DESCRIPTION PLUMBING # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ WATER HEATER WATER CLOSET WATER CLOSET (H.C.) URINAL LAVATORY LAVATORY (H.C.) FLOOR SINKS(___#) FLOOR DRAINS(___#) MOP SINK ROOF DRAINS (___#)


Page 11 of 11


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS FOR FOOD ACTIVITIES ANSUL CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM TYPE OF SYSTEM:____________ TOTAL NUMBER OF: HEADS_________ AUTOMAN RELEASE_________ REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATIONS___________ SNAP ACTION ASSEMBLIES__________________ MECHANICAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES________’

ITEMS REQUIRED IN CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S TESTING / TRAINING REPORTS: A. TEST AND BALANCE REPORT ON MECHANICAL SYSTEMS B. CERTIFICATION OF GROUNDING (RESISTANCE) POWER TRANSMISSION C. INSTRUCTION / TRAINING SESSIONS ON ALL MECH/ELEC/EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING PARTICIPANTS’ ROSTER) 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY 3. ROOF(S) WARRANTY 4. ELECTRIC WARRANTY 5. HVAC WARRANTY 6. GREENHOUSE WARRANTY 7. TERMITE PROTECTION GUARANTEE 8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT ON “NO ASBESTOS BEARING MATERIALS” USED IN CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01710 – CLEANING

CLEANING 01710-1

1 GENERAL


A. Progress cleaning.

B. Final cleaning.


A. General Provisions of the Contract.


C. Section 01045 – Cutting and Patching.

D. Section 01590 – Field Office & Sheds.

E. Other Technical Sections of the Specifications – Cleaning Requirements.

1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the following safety and insurance standards:

1. The Corps of Engineers Manual, EM 385-1-1, latest edition, entitled: "General Safety Requirements", as referred to in General Provisions, Paragraph: Accident Prevention.

B. O.S.H.A. Standards:

1. The Contractor shall be required to comply with OSHA Standards. 2. The OSHA Standards are subject to change, and such changes may affect the

Contractor in his performance under the contract. 3. It is the Contractor's responsibility to know such changes, effective dates of changes,

and comply with all requirements.

C. Hazards Control:

1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during the use of volatile or noxious substances.

D. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the installation. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm

or sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned.

CLEANING 01710-2

B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Execute cleaning to ensure that the building, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.

B. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

C. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.

D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or private dumping areas off of Government property in accordance with Sections 01420.

E. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.

1. Do not drop or throw materials from heights. 2. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted.

G. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning.

B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces.

C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, temporary labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to shine; finish vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.

E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

F. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

G. Clean all glass.

H. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction.

I. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if permanent HVAC systems are used for temporary heating and/or cooling.

J. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by AAFES.

END 01710.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01720 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Section 01340 – Submittals.

B. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at job site, one copy of:

1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Reviewed Shop Drawings. 5. Change Orders. 6. Other Modifications to Contract. 7. Field Test Records.

B. Store documents apart from documents used for construction.

C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.

D. File documents in accordance with Project Filing Format of Uniform Construction Index.

E. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition.

F. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

G. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.3 MARKING DEVICES

A. Provide red colored pencils for all marking.

1.4 RECORDING

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT" in 2-inch high printed letters.

B. Keep record documents current at all times.

C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

D. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction.

1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced

to permanent surface improvements. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced

to visible and accessible features of structure.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-2

4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by change order or field order. 6. Technical details, not on original contract drawings but determined over the course of

Construction to be necessary for clarification, that were incorporated into Work.

E. Specifications and Amendments: Legibly mark up each Section to record:

1. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. 2. Other matters not originally specified.

1.5 SUBMITTAL

A. Transmit one (1) complete edited set of As-Built Record Document mark-ups to the Architect-Engineer for review.

1. Resubmit until Architect-Engineer approves Documents for use in developing electronic copies for distribution.

B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:

1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each record document. 5. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate. 6. Signature of Contractor, or his authorized representative.

C. Architect-Engineer will correct electronic files of original Drawing and Project Manual using Contractor furnished mark-ups.

D. Architect-Engineer will deliver corrected As-Build Record Documents to AAFES and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW.

1. AAFES:

a. Two (2) hard copy sets. b. One (1) CD with .dwg and .pdf files.

2. Ft. Leonard Wood DPW:

a. Two (2) hard copy sets. b. One (1) CD of .pdf files only.

END 01720.

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02070 – Selective Demolition

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide disconnects, removal, salvage and delivery of designated exterior equipment and signage to AAFES designated on Post storage facility including, but not limited to:

a. Drive thru equipment and signage:

1.) Drive-thru equipment and accessories:

a) Pre-sell board and post/base plate. b) Order confirmation unit (OCU). c) Menu board, sheet metal skirting and post/base plate.

2.) Site directional signage:

a) Double face drive-thru sign and post/base plate at parking lot entry.

b) Double face drive-thru sign and post/base plate at drive-thru entry.

c) Thank you sign and post/base plate at drive-thru exit.

b. Building mounted signage:

1.) Church's building brand signage mounted above windows on south exterior.

2.) Church's building brand signage mounted above side entry portal on east exterior.

2. Contractor provide phased selective demolition of the following exterior equipment, signage related items and other exterior site and building elements indicated:

a. Site related elements, equipment and site signage:

1.) Steel pipe bollards:

a) Neatly cut off top end of 6" diameter steel pipe bollard directly north of Pre-sell board to 30 inches above surface of existing paving and remove concrete infill an additional 6" in preparation for recapping bollard for use in new construction.

b) 6" diameter steel pipe bollard adjacent to southwest end of Menu board.

2.) Saw cut, demolish paving and excavate to facilitate demolition of the following elements related to existing drive-thru equipment:

a) Pre-sell board foundation/footing system in entirety assumed to be ±12" x ±12" x ±4'-0" deep.

b) OCU foundation/footing system in entirety assumed to be ±12" x ±12" x ±4'-0" deep.

c) Menu board foundation/footing system in entirety assumed to be ±24" x ±24" x ±4'-0" deep.


d) Designated steel pipe bollard foundation/footing system in entirety assumed to be ±18" diameter x ±3'-0" deep.

3.) Saw cut, demolish paving and excavate to facilitate installation of the following new construction elements indicated and related to the new drive-thru equipment:

a) Clearance bar foundation/footing system. b) Pre-sell board foundation/footing system. c) OCU with canopy foundation/footing system. d) Menu board foundation/footing system. e) Pipe bollard foundation/footing system.

4.) Site directional signage:

a) Cut off anchor bolt projections in preparation of installing new epoxy embedded anchor bolts in existing concrete pedestals for new sign base plates.

5.) All Electrical work commensurate with demolition of existing drive-thru equipment and site directional signage and preparation of existing conduits for extensions and new wiring for drive-thru equipment and site directional signage.

b. Building related elements:

a) Building wall mounted sign anchorages to 3/4" minimum below face of brick and EIFS surfaces and prepare holes for permanent patching with mortar at brick and sealant at EIFS.

b) Preparation of building surfaces for patching at building mounted signage.

c) Electrical work commensurate with demolition of existing building mounted brand signage and preparation of existing conduits for extensions and new wiring.

d) Entrance hole in brick masonry/metal stud and gypsum board wall for routing piping and conduit for used cooking oil grease from fryers to used cooking oil disposal tank.

c. Roof related elements:

1.) Kitchen hood exhaust fan and curb. 2.) Supply air fan and curb. 3.) Designated portions of EPDM roofing system to facilitate removal of

existing equipment curbs, roof deck patching, roof system patching and installation of new equipment curbs.

4.) Designated portions of steel roof deck to receive reinforcing angles, deck patches, installation of new ductwork penetrations and installation of new equipment curbs.

5.) HVAC work commensurate with demolition of roof mounted equipment.

6.) Electrical work commensurate with demolition of roof mounted equipment.

3. Contractor provide disconnects, removal, salvage and delivery of existing food service equipment, fixtures and furnishings to AAFES designated on Post storage facility including, but not limited to:


a. POS stations, tea urn, cup and lid dispensers, plastic utensil dispensers, movable under counter shelving, drawer unit and safe associated with Serving counter.

b. Menu boards and miscellaneous other food concept signage. c. Serving equipment including, but not limited to reach-in side order

refrigerator, hand wash sink, soap/sanitizer/paper towel dispenser and trash can.

d. Serving and preparation equipment including, but not limited to ovens, UC refrigerators, UC shelving units, serving holding/warming unit and miscellaneous stainless steel serving/expedite station/counter equipment.

e. Drive-up Window serving equipment including, but not limited to POS station, ice maker, shelving units, tea brewer, drink station and all interior drive-through related equipment and fixtures.

f. Central cook line equipment including, but not limited to countertop ovens, counter/shelving units, miscellaneous wall and fixture mounted shelving, fryers, cook's table, raw chicken work counters, cold holding unit with cutting board, microwave oven, under counter shelving, hot well units, under counter refrigerator and coffee maker.

g. BOH shelving units including, but not limited to and cleaning supply storage shelving units.

h. Walk-in refrigeration equipment including, but not limited to storage shelving, dunnage racks, biscuit rack and chicken crate vat.

i. Scullery equipment including, but not limited to 3-compartment sink, wall mounted shelving units, free standing shelving units, hand wash sink and other related equipment.

j. Utility equipment including, but not limited to wall mounted shelving units, free standing shelving units, water filter unit, mop sink and other related equipment.

k. Miscellaneous supplies, movable equipment, fixtures and furnishings.

4. Selective demolition of interior building elements indicated:

a. Electrical items including power, lighting, wiring devices, conductors, conduit and special systems devices/wiring.

b. Designated sprinkler, plumbing and HVAC system components for removal or modification.

c. Wood door with lite, HM frame and hardware. d. All acoustical tile ceiling pads and suspension system. e. Kitchen hood and grease duct to roof exhaust fan equipment. f. All built-in countertops, casework, related accessory items and trim. g. Wood window stools and chair rails. h. Fiberglass reinforced wall paneling and backer to face of metal studs. i. Ceramic tile and quarry tile floor finishes and wall base. j. Designated portion of gypsum drywall, metal stud menu board header

between Serving and Preparation area. k. Designated gypsum drywall, metal stud knee wall between Dining and

Serving area. l. Designate gypsum drywall header finishes to face of metal studs. m. Designated gypsum drywall, metal stud partitions or portions thereof. n. Sawcut and remove designated concrete slab-on-grade construction for

under slab piping. o. All other building components to facilitate new construction.

5. Temporarily remove, salvage, store and protect for reinstallation in new construction:


a. Bracket mounted fire extinguishers and wall brackets. b. Power panel cover plate/doors for demolition of existing and installation of

new wall finishes.

B. Each Subcontractor:

a. Provide temporary shoring, bracing, underpinning and other means necessary to protect existing structure and building elements to remain during demolition of their respective parts.

b. Coordinate phasing of Work with Contracting Officer or designated representative and AAFES Store Manager to minimize disturbance of normal operation.

C. AAFES will remove and store all miscellaneous food service equipment items such as cooking utensils, condiment trays and portable equipment that does not require special skills or lifting equipment to move.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01051 – Grades, Lines & Levels. 3. Section 01060 – Safety Policies & Procedures. 4. Section 01310 – AAFES Construction Schedules. 5. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 6. Section 01420 – Environmental Protection. 7. Section 01720 – Project Record Drawings. 8. Section 02300 – Earthwork. 9. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 10. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 11. Section 07559 – Modifications to Warranted EPDM Roof System. 12. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 13. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 14. Division 13 – Special Construction. 15. Division 15 – Mechanical. 16. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule in accord with Sections 01310 and 01340.

B. Submit record drawings in accord with 01720.


A. This Project shall require coordination with AAFES Store Manager during construction.

1. This Project will be constructed at an occupied military retail facility. 2. AAFES will occupy the Burger King and Dining Room portions of the facility for the

purpose of normal operations during construction of Work. 3. Contractor shall be required to coordinate all construction in order to maintain

normal operations of the Food Concept to remain and designated areas of Dining Room at all times during construction activities.

4. Contractor shall not encumber site with equipment, vehicles, materials or construction offices other than in designated areas in order to maintain parking lot available to customers and employees during hours of normal operation.


B. Hazardous Materials (HazMats):

1. No HazMats are anticipated to be encountered in the construction of this Work. 2. Ft. Leonard Wood has or will provide AAFES with documentation confirming the

Work area to be free of any known HazMats except as listed in Paragraph C. below.

a. Contractor shall also refer to Section 01420, Environmental Protection prior to commencement of demolition operations.

C. Environmentally Controlled Materials:

1. It is anticipated that environmentally controlled materials may be encountered as follows:

a. Potential polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) lighting ballasts. b. Potential mercury containing lamps. c. Ozone depleting substances such as refrigerant.

2. Contractor shall remove and handle environmentally controlled materials as indicated in Sections 01010 and 01420 and deliver to Ft. Leonard Wood Environmental for disposal on Post.

D. Should the Contractor encounter other suspect hazardous materials not identified above during performance of the Work, including asbestos or lead based paint materials, stop Work immediately.

1. Make immediate notifications to Ft. Leonard Wood DPW Environmental and the Contracting Officer.

2. Refer to Sections 01010 and 01420 for information pertaining to encounter of potentially hazardous materials.

E. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas.

F. Maintain protected and secure egress and access to site and building at all times.

G. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices in accord with Sections 01420 and 01500.

2. PRODUCTS (Not applicable.)

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Execute cutting and patching in accordance with these Specifications.

B. Erect and maintain secure weatherproof closures for exterior openings in accord with Section 01500.

C. Protect existing items not indicated to be demolished.

D. Disconnect and remove designated utilities within demolition areas and permanently cap abandoned services as indicated on drawings.

E. Mark location of disconnected utility and branch services and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents in accord with Section 01720.


3.2 SALVAGED ITEMS

A. Salvage, store and protect designated items indicated for reinstallation in new construction.

B. Salvage designated items scheduled, protect from damage and deliver to AAFES directed storage facility on Post.

C. Reinstallation of salvaged items:

1. Reinstall all items indicated to be salvaged for reuse in new construction as indicated and with same quality of workmanship as if new items in compliance with applicable Sections of the Project Manual.

2. Salvaged items shall be free from damage due to removal and storage operations at time of acceptance by AAFES.

3.3 EXECUTION

A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner.

1. Protect supporting structural members and existing construction to remain. 2. Coordinate patching with requirements of Section 01045 and technical Sections of

the Project Manual.

B. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.

1. Deliver any PCB containing lighting ballasts to Installation for disposal. 2. Deliver mercury containing lamps to Installation for disposal. 3. Pump down refrigerants in strict coordination with Ft. Leonard Wood DPW

Environmental policies for transport containment and deliver to Installation for disposal.

C. Remove materials to be salvaged and reinstalled or retained in manner to prevent damage.

1. Protect in a manner to maintain in original condition at time of construction. 2. Store salvaged items in accord with Section 01620.

D. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered in compliance with all regulatory requirements and laws, whether referenced herein or not.

E. Do not burn or bury materials on site.

F. Upon completion of work:

1. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. 2. Leave areas in clean condition. 3. Reinstall salvaged items as indicated.

END 02070.

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02282 – TERMITE CONTROL

TERMITE CONTROL 02282-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor Provide:

a. Soil treatment for termite control at newly patched slab-on-grade construction.

b. Furnish certifications of EPA and FEPA compliance. c. Certification of application rates. d. Warranty.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. In addition to requirements of these specifications:

1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. 2. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for preparation of substrate and

application.

B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution.

C. Use only termiticides that bear a Federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions.

B. Certification: Furnish written certification certifying that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Regulations for Termiticides.

C. Testing Service: Contractor shall certify termiticide application rates and submit observation data.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.

B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather.

C. Fully comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer.

TERMITE CONTROL 02282-2

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION

A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites.

1. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent. 2. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements and

concentrations:

a. TalstarOne: 0.6 percent in water emulsion, FMC Corporation, Philadelphia, PA 19103.

b. Premise 75: 0.5 percent in water emulsion, Bayer Corporation, Kansas City, MO 64120.

c. Termidor SC: 0.6 percent in water emulsion, BASF Corporation, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.

B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative and approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities.

C. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not injurious to planting.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated.

1. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under newly patched slabs.

2. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

B. Under new slab-on-grade patches, treat soil before vapor barrier and concrete slabs are placed, using the following rates of application:

1. Apply 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet to soil in critical areas under new slab-on-grade construction, including:

a. Under slab pipe trenches prior to bedding piping.

2. Under newly patched slab areas:

a. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 square feet to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.

b. Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per 10 square feet as an overall treatment under slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel.

C. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 2 gallons per 10 lineal feet of penetration.

D. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied and remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.

END 02282

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK Section 02300 – EARTHWORK

EARTHWORK 02300-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide:

a. Excavation and backfill new drive-thru equipment footing/foundation systems. b. Excavation and backfill for selected areas of site paving for placement of new

concrete paving patches. c. Excavation and backfill for trenches within building lines. d. Drainage fill course for support of patched site paving and building slabs. e. Coordination of and payment to testing laboratory services for compaction of

fill materials.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. 01051 – Grades, Lines & Levels. 2. 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 3. 01400 – Quality Control. 4. 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services. 5. 01420 – Environmental Protection-AAFES. 6. 02070 – Selective Demolition. 7. 02282 – Termite Control. 8. 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 9. Division 15, Mechanical. 10. Division 16, Electrical.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate earthwork with other work and with stages of construction to allow a uniform, orderly sequence of operations without delay to total project and without undue interference with construction and AAFES operations.

B. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW before starting work.

1. Identify existing and new utility lines and coordinate with utility owner. 2. Coordinate items related to the work.

1.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect benchmarks and existing structures; roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs designated to remain against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic.

B. Protect existing utility mains, services and lines against damage from excavation procedures.

C. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath excavations from frost and freezing.

D. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative immediately of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in area until Architect/Engineer issues written notification, confirmed in writing, to resume work.

EARTHWORK 02300-2

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Excavation: Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent stockpiling or disposal of materials removed.

B. Unauthorized Excavation: Unauthorized Excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect/Engineer.

C. Additional Excavation: Excavation required when unsuitable subgrade conditions dictate excavating to a deeper elevation.

D. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, drainage fill or topsoil materials.

E. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, curbs or other man made stationary features occurring above or below ground surfaces.

1.6 REFERENCES & QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. American Association of State highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. AASHTO T 180 – Moisture-Density relations of Soils Using a 10-lb Rammer and an 18-in Drop.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D 1556 – Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

2. ASTM D 1557 – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 56,000 ft-lbf/ft.

3. ASTM D 2167 – Test method for Density and Unit weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.

4. ASTM D 2487 – Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. 5. ASTM D 2922 – Test methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 6. ASTM D 3017 – Test methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Site Information: Empirical data and building code minimum design values were used for the basis of the design.

1. Design based upon empirical data does not warranty of accuracy or continuity of soil at all areas of the Site.

2. The Contracting Officer, designated representative or the Federal Government will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn by Contractor.

3. Contractor may perform test borings and other exploratory operations, at his or her option and expense.

B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utility mains, services and lines in areas of excavation work.

1. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations.

2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility and Architect-Engineer immediately for directions.

EARTHWORK 02300-3

a. Cooperate with Ft. Leonard Wood DPW, the Contracting Officer or designated representative and utility company in keeping respective services and facilities in operation.

b. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and utility owner.

C. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.

1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, pavements and other construction from damage

caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, equipment and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340.

B. Samples:

1. Submit 10-pound samples of existing soil and each type of fill to testing laboratory. 2. All sample containers shall be identified with the name of the material source.

1.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Specification Section 01400 – Quality Control and specification Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services: Testing and analysis of soil materials.

B. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D2487.

C. Testing and Analysis of Topsoil Material: Composition testing as specified herein.

D. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor may use any hand or mechanical equipment and methods necessary for successful completion of work except explosives.

2.2 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Source: material classified below as Backfill, Fill Material and Select Material shall be obtained from source outside of Ft. Leonard Wood.

B. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, SP, GC, SC, ML and CL.

C. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups MH, CH, OL, OH and PT.

EARTHWORK 02300-4

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1 ½” sieve and not more that 5 percent passing a number 4 sieve.

E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, wood, cellulose, organic materials and other deleterious matter subject to termite attack.

1. Subsoil used for fill shall be a fine-grained soil 50 percent or more of which passes a No. 200 sieve with a liquid limit of 50 percent or less.

F. Aggregate Base Course Materials for Slabs-on-Grade: Artificially graded mixture of crushed stone suitable for compaction and use as drainage base course material under concrete slab-on-grade construction as approved for this use by the Missouri Department of Transportation (MDOT).

G. Bedding Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

H. Frost Resistive Stoop Backfill: Well rounded river rock, 2”-3”, suitable for frost resistive un-compacted base course placement under stoop slabs.

I. Topsoil: Friable loam free from subsoil, roots, grass, excessive amount of weeds, stones and foreign matter; acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5; containing a minimum of 4% and a maximum of 25% organic matter.

1. Use topsoil on site conforming to these specifications where necessary to make repairs to lawn areas destroyed by construction activities.

2. Import suitable topsoil for lawn repairs if stockpiled quantity is inadequate to complete work.

J. Suitable subsoil material stockpiled on site may be used for fill.

K. Unsuitable subsoil material shall be removed from site.

L. If adequate subsoil has not been stockpiled, contractor shall import suitable subsoil material for filling.

1. Source of acceptable fill material shall be responsibility of contractor. 2. Contractor shall submit material samples to Testing Laboratory for approval prior

to importing subsoil to site. 3. Testing to determine optimum moisture content and maximum density shall be

made when a barrow pit is opened or when material appears to change.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before any cuts are made, all destructive operation and demolition shall have been completed for areas where new concrete slabs are scheduled to progress.

B. Identify specified lines, levels, contours and data; coordinate with 01051.

C. Identify known below grade utilities: stake and flag locations.

D. Identify and flag above grade utilities.

EARTHWORK 02300-5

E. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area.

F. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, discontinue affected work.

1. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative immediately. 2. Confirm notification in writing.

3.2 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated and stockpile in area designated on site until required.

B. Do not excavate wet or frozen subsoil.

C. Excavation shall be scheduled and performed in a manner to allow orderly construction of building and structures indicated.

D. Excavating areas shall not impair usefulness of existing building and structures that are to remain and shall not present a hazard to persons or property.

E. Excavating areas shall not change general pattern of existing drainage and shall be drained by sloping or channeling uniformly to a drainage outlet.

3.3 EXCAVATION REMEDIATION

A. Unauthorized excavation, as defined in paragraph 1.5, as well as remedial work directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative shall be at Contractor’s expense.

1. Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect/Engineer.

B. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations notify testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer to make an inspection of conditions.

C. If testing laboratory determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered.

3.4 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations.

C. Establish and maintain temporary diversions outside excavation limits to convey rainwater and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas.

3.5 DUST CONTROL

A. Contractor shall periodically sprinkle or spray with water all areas being worked on as required to control dust.

B. Water must be uniformly applied as a spray; the use of open-end hoses will not be allowed.

EARTHWORK 02300-6

C. Extreme care shall be exercised when applying water to avoid raising moisture content beyond allowable limits.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR SITE AND BUILDING SLABS ON GRADE

A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 feet.

B. Do not disturb bottom of excavations.

1. Excavate to final grade by hand just prior to placement of reinforcing steel. 2. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other

work.

3.7 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

B. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and material not acceptable for use as backfill or fill.

3.8 UTILITY TRENCHING

A. Excavation:

1. Trenches shall be of the necessary width for proper laying of pipe, cables or ducts. 2. The banks of trenches shall be as nearly vertical as practical. 3. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stock piled in an orderly

manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins.

4. The bottom of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing for entire length, except for the portions of pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bedding bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe joints and as hereinafter specified.

a. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be dug after the trench bottom has been graded and in order that pipe rest on the prepared bottom for as nearly full length as practical.

b. Bell holes and depressions shall be only of such length, depth and width as required for properly making the particular type of joint.

5. Stone and rubble shall be removed as necessary to avoid point bearing. 6. Except as hereinafter specified for wet or otherwise unstable material, over-depths

shall be backfilled with materials specified for backfilling the lower portion of trenches.

a. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable material that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be over excavated to a depth to allow for construction of stable pipe bedding.

b. The trench shall be backfilled to the proper grade with suitable approved materials.

B. Utility Pipe Bedding:

EARTHWORK 02300-7

1. Provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4 except as specified herein.

a. Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density.

b. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe.

2. Provide ASTM D 2321 materials as follows:

a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 1.5 inches, graded stone including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone and crushed shells.

b. Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1.5 inches including various graded sans and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally granular and non-cohesive, either wet or dry.

1.) Soil Types GW, GP, SW and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487.

3.9 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits but not until completion of the following:

1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade. 2. Inspection, testing, approval and recording location and depths of underground

utilities. 3. Removal of formwork. 4. Removal of all shoring, bracing and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris.

B. Backfill areas to contours, elevations and dimensions indicated, compacting each lift prior to placement of overlying lift.

C. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement.

D. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

E. Common Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers as specified herein.

1. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with mechanical hand tampers.

2. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to satisfactory moisture content. 3. Finish to a smooth surface by raking and rolling with hand tools

F. Backfill, Fill Material and Select Material:

1. Place and compact backfill material adjacent to structure as the elements are completed and accepted.

2. Backfill against concrete only when approved by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against structures.

G. Place topsoil in equal continuous layers as specified herein and where indicated, taking care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of utilities.

H. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

I. Maintain optimum moisture content of materials to attain required compaction density.

EARTHWORK 02300-8

J. Provide a positive grade away from building a minimum of 2 inches in 10 feet unless indicated otherwise.

K. Make gradual grade changes and blend slope into level areas.

L. Remove surplus backfill materials from property and legally dispose.

M. Leave fill material stockpile areas clean and free of debris.

3.10 COMPACTION

A. Method of compaction and equipment used shall be at Contractor’s option but must produce acceptable results.

B. Compacting equipment and operations shall be coordinated with rate of placing so that required density is obtained.

C. Special care shall be exercised in compacting adjacent to structures and in sharp depressions.

1. Where such areas are inaccessible to compacting equipment being generally used, material shall be placed in 4-inch horizontal layers and uniformly compacted with suitable mechanical equipment.

D. All subgrade material shall be compacted to not less than the following percentages of maximum standard laboratory dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor) test methods:

1. Subgrade not supporting buildings or surfacing: 90 percent. 2. Subgrade supporting buildings or surfacing: 98 percent. 3. Areas requiring compaction to support buildings or surfacing shall extend a

minimum of 3 feet beyond limits of structure being supported.

E. Moisture Content: Within 2 percent of optimum moisture content determined in accord with ASTM D-1557.

1. If compaction is performed while moisture content of material is more or less than specified, additional operations as required to obtain required compaction shall be performed by Contractor.

2. No adjustment in price or contract amount will be allowed on account of any such additional work nor on account of delays occasioned thereby.

3.11 SITE AND BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE

A. Drainage course consists of placement of drainage fill material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs.

B. Place drainage fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness.

1. When a compacted drainage course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer.

2. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted.

EARTHWORK 02300-9

C. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing services shall be supervised by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Missouri.

B. Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed.

C. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon method) as applicable.

D. Site and Building Slab Subgrade:

1. Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 200 square feet of building slab, but in no case fewer than six tests.

2. In each compacted fill layer, perform at least one field density test for every 200 square feet of overlaying building slab but in no case fewer than five tests.

E. If, based on testing service reports, inspection and review by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, subgrade fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained.

3.13 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL

A. Distribution and removal of materials and equipment:

1. Remove and dispose of debris and unsuitable soil materials off site. 2. At completion of grading operations remove equipment from site.

B. Repair damage resulting from building excavation and backfill operations.

C. Leave stockpile areas and entire job site clean and raked.

3.14 CLEANUP

A. Perform cleanup during installation of work and upon completion of work.

B. Repair damage resulting from excavation operations to satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW.

END 02300.

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03300 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Placement and compaction of base course material under concrete slab-on-grade patches in existing asphalt site paving at new drive-thru equipment.

b. Placement and compaction of base course material under slab-on-grade patching at interior concrete floor slab work.

c. Formwork. d. Reinforcing. e. Surface finish and curing. f. Joint sealants. g. Forming and/or saw cutting and sealing of control joints and expansion joints. h. Coordination and assistance for and payment to testing agency for testing

base course compaction and concrete.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified Elsewhere:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 2 – Site Work. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 5. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 6. Division 15 – Mechanical. 7. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Product Data and Manufacturer’s Instructions for:

1. Reinforcing:

a. Reinforcing bars. b. Welded wire fabric. c. Supports, chairs and bolsters. d. Reinforcing accessories.

2. Concrete:

a. Curing compounds. b. Expansion joint fillers.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.


B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."

D. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Comply with requirements of Section 01620 and manufacturer's instructions for each specified product.

B. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK

A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed or smooth as indicated.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Provide bolsters, chairs and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place.

1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 2. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not

support chair leg.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. At Contractor’s option, supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. b. Maximum Content: 20 percent.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded and as follows for application:


1. Full Thickness Slabs-on-Grade: 1½ -inch nominal maximum aggregate size, locally available, natural.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures:

1. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete.

2. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

a. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. b. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. c. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. d. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. e. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/

C 494M, Type G. f. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Base Course Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1 ½” sieve and not more that 5 percent passing a number 4 sieve.

B. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick.

C. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Curing Materials for Non-exposed Applications:

1. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

a. Membrane-forming curing compound shall meet Federal and local requirements for VOC emissions.

b. Membrane-forming curing compound shall be certified by manufacturer, in writing, to not interfere with bonding of floor coverings specified for this Project.

2. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

3. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

4. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

5. Water: Potable.


2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi, minimum at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches

before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301.

a. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.

3.2 SITE AND BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE

A. Drainage course consists of placement of drainage fill material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete site paving patches and building slab patches.

B. Place drainage fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness.

1. When a compacted drainage course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer.

2. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted.

C. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour at all interior building slab patches.


1. Lap new joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.

2. Salvage edges of existing under slab vapor retarders prior to excavating as indicated and lap with new to provide lap joint equivalent to new lap joints.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. 2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:

1. Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated.

2. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:

a. Grooved Joints:

1.) Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch.

2.) Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. 3.) Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

b. Sawed Joints:

1.) Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades.

2.) Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints:

1. Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.


D. Cold weather placement of concrete shall comply with ACI 306R-88.

E. Hot weather placement of concrete shall comply with ACI 305R-99.

3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces.

1. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

1. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface.

2. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.

C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to floor slab surfaces.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General:

1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

2. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder:

1. Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations.

2. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.

a. Cure for not less than seven days. b. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover

material and waterproof tape.


3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.

b. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports to Contracting Officer and designated representative during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.

B. Testing Subbase and Base Course Compaction:

1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed.

2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon method) as applicable.

3. Building Slab Subgrade:

a. Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 200 square feet of building slab, but in no case fewer than two tests.

b. In each compacted fill layer, perform at least one field density test for every 200 square feet of overlaying building slab but in no case fewer than two tests.

4. If, based on testing service reports, inspection and review by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, subgrade fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained.

C. Concrete Testing: Perform according to ACI 301.

1. Testing at project site shall include the following:

a. Slump. b. Concrete temperature. c. Air content. d. Compressive strength.

2. Record the following information on submitted test reports.

a. Date of placement. b. Location of Placement. c. Time of day. d. Outside air temperature (degrees F.). e. Slump (in inches). f. Concrete temperature (degrees F.). g. Air content (%). h. Date received in lab. i. Compressive strength with testing date, age in days and strength in psi.

3. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 2 cubic yards but less than 5 cubic yards, plus one set for each additional 5 cubic yards or fraction thereof.


4. Cylinder Curing: A minimum of one of the 7-day test samples and one of the 28-day test samples shall be cured in or adjacent to forms to allow test cylinders to cure under identical conditions to pour.

3.10 CONCRETE REPAIRS

A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.

3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS FILL MATERIAL

A. Distribution and removal of materials and equipment:

1. Remove and dispose of debris off site. 2. Unsuitable, non-imported soil materials shall remain on Ft. Leonard Wood property

and shall be disposed of as directed by Ft. Leonard Wood DPW. 3. At completion of fill operations remove equipment from site.

B. Repair damage resulting from building excavation and backfill operations.

END 03300.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05500 – METAL FABRICATIONS

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Galvanized steel pipe bollards. b. Roof deck support angles at new make-up air unit. c. Miscellaneous steel angles, plates, bearing plates, brackets and inserts for

mounting and/or fastening items to structural support. d. Anchor bolts, washers and nuts. e. Expansion anchors and screw type masonry fasteners. f. Rough hardware. g. Miscellaneous bolts, nuts, washers, screws and fasteners.

B. Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, rods, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere.

1. All fasteners, bolts and anchorage devices necessary for complete installation of items.

2. Galvanized coatings necessary for protection of metal fabrication items exposed directly to the exterior shall be included under this work.

C. Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on drawings and in specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. 02750 – Site Concrete Work. 3. 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. 09900 – Painting.

B. Sheet metal fabrications for reinforcing small openings in existing and patching steel roof deck are specified under Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AISC “Manual of Steel Construction”, Ninth Edition.

B. ASTM A-36 “Specifications for Structural Steel”, 1995.

C. ASTM A-53 “Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless”, 1990.

D. ASTM A-123 “Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating of Iron and Steel Products”, 1989.

E. ASTM A-500 “Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes”, 1993.

F. ASTM A-513 “Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing”, 1992.


G. ASTM A-569 “Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality”, 1991.

H. ASTM A-780 “Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings”, 1993.

I. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel”, 1994.

J. AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel”, 1989.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01340.

1. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including galvanized finishes and painting procedures.

2. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated.

B. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Contracting Officer or designated representative.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A386 – Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Assembled Steel Products.

C. AWS “Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification”, 1994.

D. NOMMA “Guideline 1 – Joint Finishes”, December 1994.

E. SSPC “Steel Structures Painting Manual”, Volume 11, Sixth Edition.

F. Shop Prime Coating:

1. Zinc Dust Zinc Oxide for galvanized surfaces. 2. Paint, Oil; Iron Oxide, ready mixed, red and brown.


A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of existing structure and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.

B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements.

2. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions and allow for trimming and fitting.


1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

1. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 3. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use. 4. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or

damage to members or supporting structures. 5. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes.

1. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

2. Do not use steel sheet with variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.

B. Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A-36; galvanized coating for exterior applications.

C. Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A-500; or hot-rolled, ASTM A-501; galvanized coating for exterior applications.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:

1. Black finish, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless

otherwise indicated.

E. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported members, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A-47, or cast steel, ASTM A-27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A-153.

G. Steel Anchor Bolts: Threaded end with standard ACI hook, ASTM A-307, Grade A, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A-153.

2.2 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Nonshrink Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, ferrous aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-C 621, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy duty loading applications of type specified in this section.

B. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.


C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Nonshrink Metallic Grouts:

a. “Metox RM”; Chem-Masters Corp. b. “Hi Mod Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. c. “Embeco 885 and 636”; Master Builders. d. “Ferrolith G Redi-Mix and G-NC”; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord

Chemical Products, Inc. e. “Stonecrete MGI”; Stonhard, Inc.

2. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:

a. “Euco N-S Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. b. “Kemset”; Chem-Masters Corp. c. “Masterflow 713”; Master Builders. d. “Sealtight 588 Grout”; W.R. Meadows, Inc. e. “Sonogrout”; Sonneborn Building Products Div. Rexnord Chemical Products,

Inc.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-coated or stainless steel fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.

B. Select fasteners for the type, grade, class required and as indicated.

C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A-307, Grade A.

D. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.

E. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.

F. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-11.

G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.

H. Drill-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, (non-drilling), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.

I. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

J. Screw Type Masonry/Concrete Anchors: High carbon or stainless steel screws designed to fasten by self-tapping into pre-drilled holes shall be used for fastening medium-duty installations into solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

K. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.

L. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.

2.4 PAINT

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645 and selected for:


1. Good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion. 2. Compatibility with finish paint systems indicated. 3. Capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite

prolonged exposure.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint-12 except containing no asbestos fibers.

D. Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated.

1. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support.

2. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and over stressing of welds and fasteners.

1. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

2. Temperature Change (Range): 100E F (55.5E C).

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated and form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing.

2. Contour of welded surface shall match those adjacent.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible.

1. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or bolts.

2. Locate joints where least conspicuous.


I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated:

1. Coordinate with supporting structure. 2. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended

use.

J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.6 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, rods, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and anchoring metal or wood to concrete, masonry, steel, or other structures.

B. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

C. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.

D. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, furnish steel washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections or steel connections.

2.7 STEEL DECK SUPPORT ANGLES

A. Fabricate structural steel deck support angles from steel angle of size indicated.

B. Cope and block ends of angles to fit neatly around upper chord of existing roof joists for field welded connections between new support angles and joists.

C. Shop prime per specifications after fabrication..

2.8 PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate pipe bollards from 6” outside diameter Schedule 80 steel pipe.

B. Cap bottom of bollards with 1/4 inch steel base plate.

C. Galvanize exterior steel bollards including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners and other ferrous components by hot-dip method.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND ACCESSORIES

A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown.


B. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges.

C. Use concealed field splices wherever possible.

D. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip process compliance with the following requirements:

1. ASTM A-153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A-123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel

products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP3 “Commercial Blast Cleaning.” 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 “Power Tool Cleaning.”

E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 “Paint Application Specification No. 1” for shop painting.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including sleeve anchors, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.

B. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site so that progress of work can be maintained without delay.

C. Drill holes where required in concrete or masonry for anchorages as indicated or as recommended by anchor manufacturer for application and to resist applied forces.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction.

B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement:


1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications.

2. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

2. Do no weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL DECK SUPPORT ANGLES

A. Coordinate work of this Section closely with that of Section 02070 and new equipment curb specified in Division 15 for proper field measurements and coordination with new construction.

B. Locate support angles as indicated:

1. Primary deck support angles under curb rails shall be aligned directly under new equipment curb with horizontal leg centered under deck flanges.

2. Cut angles to fit neatly around legs of upper joist chord angles so that final assembly can be welded into place from underside of roof deck prior to placement of new equipment curb.

3. Vertical leg of angles shall align with newly cut roof deck openings. 4. Make necessary adjustments to ensure that deck support angles tie a minimum of

three existing roof joists together to distribute new loads to adjacent roof joists.

C. New equipment curb shall be set and fastened with self-drilling, self-threading fasteners in accordance with curb manufacturer's requirements for wind uplift and lateral loading:

1. Fasteners shall penetrate through roof flange and existing deck into new steel support angles.

2. Provide a minimum of 1" fastener penetration past underside of support angle.

D. Coat surfaces of steel at field or welds and wherever shop coating has been damaged with touch-up primer in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in concrete by means of direct embedment into concrete filled post holes at drive-up islands.


1. After bollards have been inserted, plumb units. 2. Fill annular space between bollard and posthole solid with concrete and integral

with island pour.

B. After concrete has cured fill open ended pipes with lean concrete, striking off top approximately level with end and provide a 1/4 inch chamfer at circumference using edging tool.

3.5 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS ANGLES

A. Coordinate work of this Section closely with that of other Section for proper field measurements and opening sizes.

1. Refer to Division 15, Mechanical for equipment curb sizes and openings in roof deck that are to be reinforced with steel angle framing.

2. Refer to Section 08305, Access Doors, for roof hatch opening that will require steel angle roof deck support.

B. Locate loose angles and/or angles assemblies as indicated and centered under roof curbs of about roof openings.

1. Provide sound, level bearing surfaces on bar joists. 2. Cope legs of angles to clear outstanding leg of joist angles. 3. Adjustments shall be made to ensure that support angle is directly under roof curb

or equipment to be supported.

C. Coat surfaces of steel at field modifications or welds and wherever shop coating has been damaged with touch-up primer in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 2. Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared to receive finishes as specified.

B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780.

END 05500

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 –ROUGH CARPENTRY

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All wood backup for anchoring wall hung/supported fixtures, accessories, signage and specialties.

b. All wood blocking, nailers, grounds and supports. c. Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry. d. All labor to complete installation of normal rough carpentry items furnished

under this and other Sections of the Project Manual.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Related Sections:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork. 5. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 6. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 7. Division 10 – Specialties. 8. Section 11400 – Food Service Equipment.

B. Installed but furnished and specified elsewhere:

1. Blocking and backing for AF/AI and AF/CI graphics, signage, menu boards, shelving, equipment, specialties and accessory items indicated on drawings shall be installed under this Section.


A. Lumber grading rules and wood species to conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70; Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished under this section.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association, Inc.(NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer's Association (NHPMA).

B. Plywood grading rules:

1. Softwood Plywood - Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PSI-66.

C. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade marks:

1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content.


c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum of 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood - Appropriate grade trademark of the American Plywood Association.

a. Type, grade, class and identification index. b. Inspection and testing agency mark.


A. Deliver materials with grade marks and labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials under cover and in dry location in accord with Section 01620.

1. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. 2. Stack lumber and plywood to provide for air circulation within and around stacks

and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 3. Take special precautions to place spacers between each bundle of lumber and

plywood that has been pressure treated with waterborne chemicals to facilitate air circulation.

1.5 WORKMANSHIP QUALITY

A. Workmanship for rough carpentry shall be in accordance with requirements of National Lumber Manufacturer's Association.

1. Cut members square on bearings and fit closely. 2. Set accurately to lines, levels and plumb. 3. Secure rigidly in place at bearings and connections. 4. Provide expansion anchors, sleeve anchors and masonry screw anchors for

fastening into concrete or masonry substrates.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Lumber:

1. Dimensions:

a. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. b. Actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by American

Lumber Standards Committee and rules writing agencies.

2. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 15% maximum at time of installation. 3. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S) unless specified otherwise. 4. All framing lumber and blocking, 2 inches to 4 inches thick, 2 inches to 12 inches

wide, Douglas Fir/Larch or Southern Pine:

a. Economy grade shall not be used. b. Plates, blocking, bracing, bulk heads, nailers, and general utility purposes:

Construction grade or better. c. Strength of materials:

1.) Light framing/blocking, “Construction” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 2” to 4” wide.

a) Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1250 psi. b) Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,500,000 psi.


c) Compression | | to grain (Fc): 1300 psi.

2.) Structural framing, “No. 2” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 5” and wider.

a) Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1500 psi. b) Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,600,000 psi. c) Compression | | to grain (Fc): 1200 psi.

B. Plywood:

1. Concealed APA performance rated construction panels used as backing material for wall mounted fixtures and equipment:

a. Thickness: 23/32” (3/4” nominal). b. Exposure durability classification: EXPOSURE 1. c. Span rating: 48/24. d. Edge configuration: Square.

2. Exposed construction panels for backing, APA rated (C/D) plugged and painted:

a. Thickness: 23/32” (3/4” nominal). b. Exposure durability classification: EXTERIOR. c. Span rating: 48/24. d. Edge configuration: Square.

2.2 BOARDS

A. Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following:

1. Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-15). 2. Provide Western Red Cedar, “C Select/A all Heart” grade per WWPA rules for all

exposed installations.

B. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide the following:

1. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-19). 2. Provide the following species and grades:

a. Redwood “Construction Common” per RIS rules. b. Southern Pine “No. 2 Boards” per SPIB rules. c. Any species graded “Construction Boards” or “No. 3 Common” per WCLIB or

WWPA rules. d. Redwood “Merchantable” per RIS rules. e. Southern Pine “No. 2 Boards” per SPIB rules. f. Any species graded “Standard” or “No. 3 Common Boards” per WCLIB or

WWPA rules.

C. Board Sizes: Provide nominal or actual sizes as indicated.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND HARDWARE

A. Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry items shall be provided.

B. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Hot-dipped galvanized, stainless steel or aluminum for exterior locations and high humidity locations; size and type to suit application; staples shall not be used for fastening wood structurally.

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Medium carbon-steel; sized to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations and high humidity locations.


D. Expansion Type Anchors: Plastic or non-ferrous metal type plug inserts designed to expand when screw and lag bolt type anchors are secured shall be used for fastening light-duty installations to solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

E. Drill-In Screw Anchors: Self-tapping screw type anchors, flat head TORX or Phillips driving recess, ¼” nominal diameter, triobular cold formed thread design, stainless steel (exterior) or zinc plated/coated (interior) in length and material as indicated.

F. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt, threaded rod and deformed rod anchors.

G. Drill-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, (non-drilling), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5, stainless steel (exterior) or zinc plated (interior) in embedment length and material as indicated.

3 EXECUTION


A. Blocking and all other carpentry items shall be laid out as called for by drawings and shall be cut and fitted as necessitated by conditions encountered.

B. All work shall be plumbed, leveled and braced with sufficient nails, spikes, bolts, etc., to ensure rigidity.

1. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.

2. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

C. Use galvanized wire nails, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side with be exposed.

2. Make tight connections between members. 3. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.

D. All pieces of wood or other carpentry material with a defect or defects that prevent it from serving its intended purpose satisfactorily, including crooked, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective material, even if within the limits of grade specified, will be rejected and shall be replaced with an acceptable piece.

E. Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact requirements, dimensions and as detailed since installation of rough carpentry materials constitutes acceptance of surface conditions.

F. Frame wood members to a close fit.

1. Set accurately to required lines and levels and secure rigidly in place in accordance with details.

2. Cut and fit framing, blocking, and furring to accommodate other work as required.

G. Coordinate requirements for connecting wood blocking and framing with structural steel fabricator to ensure the holes are properly punched at designated or adequate spacing to support and attach rough carpentry items.


3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, PLATES, NAILERS, GROUNDS AND SUPPORTS

A. Blocking shall be sizes and shapes indicated on details and as required by conditions encountered to provide solid substrate for anchorage of various finish and specialty items.

B. Install wood blocking, plates, nailers, grounds and supports where shown and where required for attachment of other work.

1. Provide and form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached.

2. Coordinate location with other work involved in systems.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.

1. Countersink screw anchors, bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Hooked anchor bolts shall be used as indicated to attach wood plates to concrete or masonry structure.

3. Provide wedge type sleeve anchors only where indicated or to attach miscellaneous blocking and plating to concrete or masonry.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, “APA Design/Construction Guide – Residential & Commercial,” for types of construction panels and application indicated.

B. Backing Panels:

1. Provide cold-formed framing and/or clip angles fastened to the studs and recessed back from face of stud the thickness of backing panels for support.

2. Fit construction panels between cold-formed metal framing studs and fasten securely to support framing.

3. Coordinate height and length of backing panels with equipment or fixtures being attached to finished wall.

3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Remove from site all rubbish, debris and packaging produced by operations and leave site in a "broom-clean" condition.

B. Adjust all working items to fit snugly yet work freely.

C. Confirm blocking heights and locations and make adjustments as required for proper installation of other items of work.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed items of other trades from damage during construction.

B. Protect completed work from damage until project is completed and accepted.

END 06100.

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06200 – FINISH CARPENTRY

FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All hardwood interior window stools. b. All hardwood trim and chair rail. c. Wood wall cladding and trim. d. Installation of Contractor furnished casework items indicated. e. Installation of all items associated with finish carpentry. f. Rough hardware and adhesives needed for proper installation of finish

carpentry items.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06250 – Pre-finished Paneling-No Formaldehyde. 4. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork. 5. Division 9 – Finishes. 6. Division 10 – Specialties.


1. Casework items to be installed under this Section are specified in Section 06400, Architectural Woodwork and indicated on Drawings.

2. Other items normally associated with finish carpentry installation are specified in Divisions 8, 9 and 10.


A. Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70: Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). 6. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer’s Association (NHPMA).

B. Hardwood lumber to comply with: National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) Rules.

C. Plywood Grading Rules:

1. Softwood Plywood – Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PS 1/ANSI A199.1.

2. Hardwood Plywood: Product Standard PS 51.

D. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark:


1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name,

grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of the American Plywood Association. 3. Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of qualified inspection, testing or

grading agency.

E. Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of this specification.

1. Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy, in this specification shall be as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.

2. Any item not given a specific quality grade in this specification shall be Custom Grade as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.

F. Finish Carpentry item manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work.

1. Regularly and actively engaged in manufacture of this type of work for a period of 10 years.

2. In addition, manufacturer shall have fabricated work of a similar character and magnitude, which has been in satisfactory use for at least 7 years.

G. Finish Carpentry item manufacturer shall be responsible for all details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all millwork profiles required.

H. Contractor and Finish Carpentry item manufacturer shall coordinate to establish and maintain field dimensions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01340:

1. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product and process specified as work of this Section and/or incorporated into finish carpentry items including:

a. Wood species, grade and moisture content. b. Fabrication techniques as related to AWI standards. c. Finishing techniques. d. Installation procedures. e. Hardware items.

2. Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s/fabricator’s certification stating that fabricated wood items complies with quality grades and AWI requirements indicated.

3. Shop drawings:

a. Window stool trim profile and quantities. b. Chair rail profile and quantities. c. Miscellaneous trim profiles and quantities.


d. Other miscellaneous custom fabricated finish carpentry items indicated.

4. Samples:

a. Wood Wall Cladding & Miscellaneous Finish Wood Trim:

1.) 12-inch long section of each product and trim profile. 2.) Submit trim profile samples finished to match other manufacturer

finished wood items.

b. Miscellaneous Hardwood Trim:

1.) 12-inch long sections of each trim profile, finished.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store products in accord with Sections 01600 and 01620.

B. Protect finish carpentry items during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

C. Do not deliver finish carpentry items until taping, wet work, grinding and similar operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate items have been completed.

D. Finish carpentry items shall only be stored in installation areas or areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Conditioning: Finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation of finish carpentry items.

1. Requirements shall be identical for storage areas if items are stored prior to installation.

2. Do not install finish carpentry items until required temperature and relative humidity can be established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed finish carpentry within 1 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content.

1. Maintain from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 2. Contractor shall require finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer to provide written

documentation of optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas.

B. Fabrication: Fabricate wood finish carpentry items to dimensions, profiles and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where applicable, to receive hardware and other items and work.

C. Finish Edges: Unless indicated otherwise, ease edges of all solid wood or plastic finish carpentry items as follows:


1. 1/16-inch radius for corners and edges of solid wood or plastic members 1 1/8-inch actual thickness or less.

2. 1/8-inch radius for edges of solid wood, plastic and similar members over 1 1/8-inch actual thickness.

3. 1/2-round radius for all window stools.

D. Assembly: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware mortising/fitting and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible.

1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for field scribing,

trimming and fitting.

E. Pre-cut Openings: Fabricate finish carpentry items with pre-cut openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, fixtures, electrical work and similar items.

1. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams as furnished by the Contractor for proper size and shape.

2. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in potentially damp locations, seal edges of cutouts with water resistant coating.

F. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of finish wood items required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as necessary for accurate fit.

2.2 WINDOW STOOLS, TRIM, CHAIR RAIL AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM ITEMS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section applicable to item indicated.

B. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Lumber Species: Maple.

C. Comply with AWI Custom grade for fabrication of window stools, trim and chair rail in profiles indicated.

D. Factory Finish: Finish hardwood trim with transparent stained finish in accordance with AWI Section 1500.

2.3 WOOD WALL CLADDING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Popeye's wall cladding:

1. Moss Retail – 1x6 Pine Tongue & Groove Wall Plank, AE-3 "Car Siding" with Clear Stain.

2. Popeye's corner trim & wood wall cladding edge trim:

a. Grade: Custom. b. Lumber Species: Pine. c. Size: 1"x1" d. Finish: Finish to match wall cladding.

2.4 FASTENERS, ANCHORS AND REINFORCEMENT

A. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use.

1. Comply with FS FF-S-0111 for applicable requirements. 2. Trim head type screws shall be used where exposed.


B. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.

1. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at installations subject to moisture for corrosion resistance.

2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 3. Furnish inserts and anchors, as applicable, to be set into concrete or masonry

work for subsequent anchorage of finish carpentry items.

D. Adhesives: Products as recommended by finish carpentry manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces to receive finish carpentry materials are prepared to exact levels and dimensions.

B. Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Condition finish carpentry items to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

D. Prior to installation examine shop-fabricated work for completion, finish, back priming and removal of all packaging.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install finish carpentry items to comply with AWI Section 1700 for grade specified in Part 2 of this Section.

B. Install wood finish carpentry items plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1. Shim as required using concealed shims. 2. Install to a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with no

variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

C. Scribe and cut finish carpentry items to fit adjoining work.

1. Repair damaged wood surfaces at cuts. 2. Coordinate installations with installation specified in other Sections of the

specifications.

a. Fit and protect wood finish carpentry items prior to installation of adjacent work and equipment.

b. Remove protection from wood items after completion of work by other trades that might damage finishes or installation.

D. Anchor wood items to blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates.

1. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

2. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine pneumatically driven finish fasteners for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to match final factory applied transparent finish.

3. Where fastening new finish wood items to existing substrates where wood blocking does not exist or cannot be built-in, attach items using construction adhesive as recommended by the finish wood supplier.


E. Anchor wood wall cladding and trim directly to prepared substrates.

1. Where fastening to existing substrates where wood blocking does not exist or cannot be built-in, attach items using construction adhesive as indicated.

2. Where additional mechanical attachment is required, use fine pneumatically driven finish fasteners for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to match final factory applied transparent finish.

F. Trim shall be installed with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces from maximum length of finish wood available.

1. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. 2. Cope at returns, miter at corners and comply with referenced Quality Standards for

joinery.

G. Install all miscellaneous trim and mouldings required and all related finish carpentry items indicated for a complete job.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry items where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually.

1. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 2. Where repair does not produce visual or functional deficiencies, replace finish

carpentry items.

B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.

C. Clean all finish carpentry items on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.

D. Touch-up finishes at field fabricated joints and wood filler at fastener heads using finish materials as recommended by finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer to produce final finish that matches factory finish in every respect.

E. Buff and polish exposed surfaces of solid surface plastic items to remove superficial scratches and apply liquid sealer to provide a smooth, scratch resistant finish.

F. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures finish carpentry items to remain, without damage or deterioration, until final acceptance by Contracting Officer.

3.4 CLEANING UP

A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.

B. Sweeping:

1. At the end of each working day, and more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled.

2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its disposal. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces.

END 06200

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06250 – PRE-FINISHED PANELING – NO FORMALDEHYDE

PRE-FINISHED PANELING – NO FORMALDEHYDE 06250-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All pre-finished interior wall paneling. b. All paneling trims and accessories. c. Installation of all items associated with pre-finished paneling. d. Rough hardware and adhesives needed for proper installation of finish

carpentry items.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 4. Division 8 – Doors & Windows. 5. Division 9 – Finishes. 6. Division 10 - Specialties.


1. Hardwood window stools and chair rail related to this work is specified in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.


A. Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of this specification.



B. ASTM E-84 (Method of test for surface burning characteristics of building materials)

C. BHMA (Builder’s Hardware Manufacturers Associations)

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product and process specified as work of this Section and/or incorporated into pre-finished paneling system including:

a. Veneer laminate finish. b. Hardboard substrate. c. Wood trim and accessories.


2. Certifications:

a. Submit manufacturer’s certification stating that fabricated wood items complies with quality grades and AWI requirements indicated.

3. Shop drawings:

a. Pre-finished paneling system layout elevations. b. Details showing method of installation and attachment of pre-finished

paneling system to related construction:

1.) Pre-finished paneling profile and concealed attachment extrusions. 2.) Details showing extrusion/paneling attachment to substrate. 3.) Wood trims and other details illustrating complete system installation.

4. Samples:

a. Pre-finished paneling:

1.) Submit three (3) 12-inch x 12-inch samples of actual panel finished with specified finish.

b. Paneling trim and accessories:

1.) Three (3) 12-inch long sections of each trim profile.

B. Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

C. Provide manufacturer’s recommended maintenance procedures.



B. Protect pre-finished paneling, trims and accessories during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

C. Pre-finished paneling system components shall only be stored in installation areas or areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Conditioning: Pre-finished paneling system manufacturer and installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation of system components.


2. Do not install pre-finished paneling system components until required temperature and relative humidity can be established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as recommended to maintain installed pre-finished paneling components within 1 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content.

1. Maintain from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 2. Contractor shall require pre-finished paneling system manufacturer to provide

written documentation of optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Pre-finished paneling system and trim shall be manufactured by Marlite.

1. Marlite, 202 Harger St., Dover, OH 44622 (330) 343-6621.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All Pre-finished paneling system components shall be Marlite Plank faux wood grain panel construction and finish as follows:

1. Marlite Finish: Federal Specification LLL-B-805 Class I Finish A.B.P.A. PS 59-73

a. Meets ANSI and AHA Standards for pre-finishing paneling

2. Wood Veneer: AWI Finish System TR-4 Custom grade finish. 3. Color: Number 148, “Monticello Anigre”. 4. Grain direction shall be vertical.

2.3 PANEL ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for applicable requirements.

B. Adhesives: Provide Marlite C-375 construction adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Silicone Sealant: Provide sealant as recommended by manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prior to installation examine shop-fabricated work for completion, finish and removal of all packaging.

B. Condition pre-finished paneling system components to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

1. All panels shall be allowed to equalize to the moisture and temperature in the room environment prior to installation.

2. To ensure product performance, a temperature range of 60°-80°F and a humidity range of 35-55% must be maintained during storage, installation and product life cycle.

C. Verify that surfaces to receive pre-finished paneling system components are prepared to exact levels and dimensions.

D. Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install finish carpentry items to comply with AWI Section 1700 for grade specified in Part 2 of this Section and in conjunction with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

B. Install pre-finished paneling system components plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.


1. Shim as required using concealed shims. 2. Install to a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with no

variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

C. Scribe and cut pre-finished panels to fit adjoining work.

1. Repair damaged surfaces at cuts. 2. Coordinate installations with installation specified in other Sections of the

specifications.

a. Fit and protect pre-finished paneling components prior to installation of adjacent work and equipment.

b. Remove protection from wood items after completion of work by other trades that might damage finishes or installation.

D. Anchor pre-finished panel and trim directly to prepared substrates.

1. Where fastening to existing substrates where wood blocking does not exist or cannot be built-in, attach items using construction adhesive as indicated.

2. Where additional mechanical attachment is required, use fine pneumatically driven finish fasteners for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to match final factory applied transparent finish.

E. Install all miscellaneous trim and mouldings required and all related finish carpentry items indicated for a complete job.


A. Repair damaged and defective pre-finished paneling components where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually.

1. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 2. Where repair does not produce visual or functional deficiencies, replace

components.

B. Clean all pre-finished paneling components on exposed surfaces.

C. Touch-up finishes at field fabricated joints using finish materials as recommended by manufacturer to produce final finish that matches factory finish in every respect.

D. Buff and polish exposed surfaces of aluminum trim items to remove superficial scratches.

E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer to ensure pre-finished paneling system remains without damage or deterioration until final acceptance by Contracting Officer.

3.4 CLEANING UP


B. Sweeping:



END 06250

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06400 – ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Shop fabricated solid surface serving counter, nosing and counter frontal system at food concepts.

b. Rough and finish hardware items for casework. c. Miscellaneous wood finish items and trim indicated in drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 4. Division 9 – Finishes. 5. Division 11 – Food Service Equipment. 6. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Coordinate work of this Section with work of Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall. 2. Coordinate blocking and backing required for supporting work of this Section with

requirements specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 3. Trim, moldings and installation of miscellaneous Architectural Woodwork items are

specified in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. 4. Coordinate work of this Section with work of Section 09300, Tile for field

installation of ceramic tile on and tile transition under Food Concept serving counter frontal systems.

5. AAFES Furnished/Contractor installed items are listed in Section 01018 and indicated on Drawings.

6. AAFES Furnished/AAFES installed items are listed in Section 01017 and indicated on Drawings.


A. Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work.

1. Regularly and actively engaged in manufacture of this type of work for a period of 10 years.

2. Woodwork manufacturer shall, in addition have fabricated work of a similar character and magnitude, and which has been in satisfactory use for at least 7 years.

B. Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall provide single-source responsibility to assume undivided responsibility for architectural woodwork and finish specified in this Section including:

1. Fabrication. 2. Finishing.


3. Field installation.

C. Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall be responsible for all details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show on Shop Drawings all millwork profiles required.

D. Contractor and Custom Woodwork manufacturer shall:

1. Coordinate and cooperate to establish and maintain field dimensions. 2. Coordinate with Contracting Officer or designated representative for fabrication

and installation of equipment.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70: Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). 6. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer’s Association (NHPMA).

B. Hardwood lumber to comply with: National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) Rules.

C. Plywood Grading Rules:

1. Softwood Plywood – Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PS 1/ANSI A199.1.

2. Hardwood Plywood: Product Standard PS 51.

D. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark:

1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of the American Plywood Association. 3. Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grademark of qualified inspection, testing or

grading agency.

E. Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of this specification.



1.5 SUBMITTALS



1. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product and process specified as work of this Section and/or incorporated into finish carpentry items including:

a. Substrate wood grade and moisture content. b. Plastic laminate grades. c. Fabrication techniques as related to AWI standards. d. Installation procedures.

2. Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s/fabricator’s certification stating that fabricated wood items complies with quality grades and AWI requirements indicated.

3. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating the following:

a. Location of each item. b. Dimensioned plans and elevations. c. Large scale details illustrating:

1.) Construction of item. 2.) Relationship of attached components. 3.) Relationship to other finish components of construction including

walls, floors, soffits and equipment.

d. Internal and external attachment devices. e. Finish hardware. f. Other miscellaneous components.

4. Samples:

a. Solid Surface Plastics:

1.) Solid surface manufacturer’s sample for color verification purposes. 2.) Submit 8 inch by 12 inch pieces of each color selection indicated.

b. High Pressure (HP) plastic laminate:

1.) 8 inch by 12 inch pieces of laminate for each type, color, pattern and surface finish selected.

c. Low Pressure (LP) laminate: 8 inch by 12 inch pieces finished with laminate proposed for semi-exposed surfaces.

d. Cabinet hardware: (1) unit of each type and finish of exposed cabinet hardware.



B. Protect woodwork items during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

C. Do not deliver woodwork items until taping, wet work, grinding and similar operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate items have been completed.

D. Woodwork items shall only be stored in installation areas or areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.



A. Conditioning: Woodwork manufacturer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation of woodwork.


2. Do not install woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity can be established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed finish carpentry within 1 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content.

1. Maintain from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 2. Contractor shall require woodwork manufacturer to provide written documentation

of optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Solid Surface Plastics: Subject to compliance with requirements provide solid surface plastic product of the following manufacturer for specific applications as indicated:

1. Popeyes: LG Surfaces.

B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels: Subject to compliance with requirements set forth in Section 09986, provide fiberglass reinforced plastic panel products for use in woodwork fabrications of the following manufacturer for specific applications as indicated:

1. Popeye’s: Marlite.

C. Glass Mosaic Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements set forth in Section 09300, provide decorative color glass mosaic tile of the following manufacturer for specific applications as indicated:

1. Popeye’s: Interceramic.

2.2 SHOP FABRICATED CASEWORK ITEMS AND FINISH PRODUCTS

A. Food Court Frontal Systems:

1. Popeye's Serving:

a. Glass Mosaic Tile:

1.) GT-1: Mosaic Tile, DB Pattern/Border/Mural, "Mardigras Carnival", 1" x 1", with #14 – “Biscuit” grout.

b. Edge Trim:

1.) Schluter – Jolly profile in anodized satin aluminum finish.

c. Back Panels:

1.) FRP-1: P100 – "White".

B. Countertops:

1. Popeye’s Serving:

a. Solid Surface:

1.) SS-1: GT927 – “Cayenne”.


2.3 GENERAL

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas.

B. Fabrication: Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items and work.

C. Assembly: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware mortising/fitting and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible.

1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for field scribing,

trimming and fitting.

D. Pre-cut Openings: Fabricate woodwork with pre-cut openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, fixtures, electrical work and similar items.

1. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams as furnished by the Contractor for proper size and shape.

2. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in potentially damp locations, seal edges of cutouts with water resistant coating.

E. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of wood finish carpentry items required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as necessary for accurate fit.

2.4 ARCHITECTURAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standards: Comply with AWI Section 400 and Divisions 400B and 400C.

B. Type 2: Solid Surface Plastic.

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Solid Material for Horizontal Surface:

a. Thickness: ½” minimum.

3. Edge Treatment:

a. Nosing: Provide solid plastic material in thickness and color to match countertop.

b. Edges: Pencil edge radius.

4. Fabricate and install in strict compliance with solid surface manufacture’s written instructions.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use.

1. Comply with FS FF-S-0111 for applicable requirements. 2. Trim head type screws shall be used where exposed.

B. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.


C. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.

1. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at installations subject to moisture for corrosion resistance.

2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 3. Furnish inserts and anchors, as applicable, to be set into concrete or masonry

work for subsequent anchorage of finish carpentry items.

D. Adhesives: Products as recommended by wood finish carpentry manufacturer.

E. Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry for other fasteners, anchors and reinforcement necessary for a complete, durable installation.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces to receive architectural woodwork items are prepared to exact levels and dimensions.

B. Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Condition architectural woodwork items to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

D. Prior to installation examine shop fabricated work for completion, finish, back priming and removal of all packaging.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install wood finish carpentry items to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section.

B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1. Shim as required using concealed shims. 2. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with no variations

in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

C. Scribe and cut woodwork items to fit adjoining work.

1. Refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor wood items to blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates.

1. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

2. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to match final factory applied transparent finish.

E. Install cabinets without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned.

1. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.

2. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.


F. Anchor countertops securely to base units and other support systems indicated.

G. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this Section, to whatever extent not completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork.

H. Install all miscellaneous trim and mouldings required and all related woodwork items indicated for a complete job.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork items where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually.

1. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 2. Where repair does not produce visual or functional deficiencies, replace finish

carpentry items.

B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.

C. Clean all finish carpentry items on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.

D. Touch-up all shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled work.

E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer and that ensures woodwork items to remain, without damage or deterioration, until final acceptance by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.4 CLEANING UP


B. Sweeping:



END 06400

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07270 – FIRESTOPPING

FIRESTOPPING 07270-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide coordination of firestopping penetrations on entire project. 2. Each subcontractor provide:

a. Firestopping of own penetrations through rated wall assemblies. b. Firestopping of own penetrations through rated ceiling assemblies.

3. Coordinate all work related to this Section with the Ft. Leonard Wood Fire Chief's Office prior to construction of fire resistive assemblies and installation of firestopping products.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 5. Division 15 – Mechanical. 6. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for construction and sealing perimeters of and penetrations through fire rated assemblies as indicated herein and specified in Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems.


A. Provide Firestopping systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified under paragraph for Performance Requirements.

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified, testing and inspection agency such as UL or other agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Firestopping products shall bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.

B. Engage an experienced installer who is certified, licensed or otherwise qualified by the Firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install firestop products per specified requirements.

C. Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration or joint opening and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.

1.4 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Fire Test Requirements:


1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

a. ANSI/UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops”. b. ANSI/UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”. c. ANSI/UL 263, “Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials”. d. ANSI/UL 723, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.

2. America Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM E-814, “Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops”. b. ASTM E-1966, “Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems”. c. ASTM E-119, “Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials”. d. ASTM E-84, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.

B. References:

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL “Fire Resistance Directory”.

a. Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) b. Joint Systems (XHBN) c. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW) d. Firestop Devices (XHJI) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) f. Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV)

2. All major building codes:

a. National Building Code published by BOCA. b. International Building Code published by ICC.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of Quincy, MA “NFPA 101: Life Safety Code”.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of Quincy, MA “NFPA 70: National Electrical Code”.

C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. Provide products that upon curing, do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and after construction.

2. Provide firestop sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate motion such as pipe vibration, water hammer, thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal.

3. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through wall or floor openings and provide products appropriately tested for the thickness and type of insulation utilized.

4. Openings within walls and floors designed to accommodate communication and data cabling shall be provided with re-enterable products specifically designed for retrofit.

5. Penetrants passing through fire-resistance rated ceiling assemblies contained within chase wall assemblies shall be protected.

a. Provide products tested by being fully exposed to the fire outside of the chase wall.

b. Systems within the UL Fire Resistance Directory that meet this criterion are identified with the words “Chase Wall Optional”.


6. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate movement such as thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal.

7. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of movement and tested for this purpose in accordance with a cyclic movement test criteria as outlined in Standards, ASTM E-1399, ASTM E-1966 or ANSI/ UL 2079.

8. Provide fire-resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in accordance with Standard, ANSI/UL2079 with published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability of the fire-resistive joint system to restrict the movement of smoke.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of firestopping product indicated.

B. System Drawings: Submit documentation from a qualified third-party testing agency that is applicable to each firestopping system configuration for construction, joint opening width and/or penetrating items.

C. Product Certificates: Certificate of conformance signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that products comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturer’s labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture and the following in accord with 01600 and 01620:

1. Lot number. 2. Shelf life, where applicable. 3. Qualified testing and inspection agency’s classification marking. 4. Mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials for firestopping products to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants or other causes.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping products that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping products manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials.

C. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.


A. Subject to compliance with through-penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) and/or joint systems (XHBN) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below:


1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) Somerville, New Jersey (800) 992-1180

2. Other manufacturers listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. General: Use only firestopping products that have been tested for specific fire-resistance-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type or joint opening width and movement capabilities, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

B. Latex Sealants: Single component latex formulations that upon cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSS Intumescent Sealant. 2. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCI Intumescent Sealant. 3. (STI) SpecSeal Series LC Endothermic Sealant. 4. (STI) SpecSeal Series AS Elastomeric Spray. 5. (STI) SpecSeal Series ES Elastomeric Sealant.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled steel collars lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific outside diameter of penetrating item, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSC Firestop Collars. 2. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCC Firestop Collars.

D. Wall Opening Protective Materials: Intumescent, non-curing pads or inserts for protection of electrical switch and receptacle boxes to reduce horizontal separation to less than 24”, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty Pads. 2. (STI) SpecSeal Series EP PowerShield Insert Pads.

E. Firestop Putty: Intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty.

F. Firestop Pillows: Re-enterable, non-curing, mineral fiber core encapsulated with an intumescent coating contained in a flame retardant poly bag, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSB Firestop Pillows.

G. Mortar: Portland cement based dry-mix product formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, water-resistant, homogenous mortar, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSM Firestop Mortar.

H. Silicone Sealants: Moisture curing, single component, silicone elastomeric sealant for horizontal surfaces (pourable or non-sag) or vertical surface (non-sag), the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) Pensil 300 Silicone Sealant. 2. (STI) Pensil 300 SL Self-Leveling Silicone Sealant.


I. Silicone Foam: Multi-component, silicone-based liquid elastomers, that when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) Pensil 200 Silicone Foam.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examination of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

B. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale, laitance, rust, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may inhibit optimum adhesion.

C. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials.

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FIRESTOPPING INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in accordance with “Performance Criteria” Article and in accordance with the conditions of testing and classification as specified in the published design.

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of firestopping products.

1. Seal all openings or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.

2. Consult with appropriate subcontractor prior to installation of through-penetration firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.

3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 4. Apply a suitable bond-breaker to prevent three-sided adhesion in applications

where this condition might occur such as the intersection of a gypsum wallboard/steel stud wall to floor or roof assembly where the joint is backed by a steel ceiling runner or track.

5. Where joint application is exposed to the elements, fire-resistive joint sealant must be approved by manufacturer for use in exterior applications and shall comply with ASTM C-920, “Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants”.


A. Inspections: Contractor shall inspect or, at Architect’s direction as an additional cost, engage a qualified independent inspection agency to inspect through-penetration firestop systems.

B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or firestopping products so they comply with requirements.


3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping materials and soiling as work progresses.

END 07270.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07559 – MODIFICATIONS TO WARRANTED EPDM ROOF SYSTEM

MODIFICATIONS TO WARRANTED EPDM ROOF SYSTEM 07559-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide modifications to existing warranted fully adhered single-ply EPDM membrane roofing and flashing system as shown and herein specified.

a. Remove existing construction:

1.) Membrane roofing system and flashing as indicated to demolish existing kitchen exhaust fan curb and patch roof deck penetration.

2.) Membrane roofing system and flashing as indicated to demolish existing kitchen supply air fan curb and patch roof deck penetration.

3.) Membrane roofing system as required to cut new roof deck openings and install new kitchen exhaust fan curbs.

4.) Membrane roofing system as required to cut new roof deck opening and install new kitchen Make-up Air Unit curb.

b. Install new:

1.) Sheet metal roof deck patches and edge angle reinforcing at abandoned roof deck penetrations.

2.) Sheet metal edge reinforcing angles at perimeters of newly cut roof deck penetrations.

3.) Wood blocking and anchorage at perimeters of all new equipment curbs.

4.) New equipment curbs at exhaust fans. 5.) New equipment curb at Make-up Air Unit. 6.) Roof insulation system patching. 7.) Fully adhered EPDM membrane system patching. 8.) Kitchen exhaust fan and Make-up Air Unit curb flashings. 9.) Sacrificial Epichlorohydrin (ECO/CO) overlay membrane over EPDM

roofing subject to grease discharge from kitchen exhaust fans. 10.) Miscellaneous roof accessories necessary for roof patching

installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. 01010 – Project Summary. 2. 01045 – Cutting & Patching. 3. 01500 – Temporary Facilities & Controls. 4. 01700 – Project Closeout. 5. 01720 – Project Record Documents. 6. 02070 – Selective Demolition. 7. 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 8. 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 9. 07920 – Sealants & Caulking.


10. Division 15 - Mechanical. 11. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Installed but specified elsewhere:

1. Cutting of roof deck openings is specified under Section 02070, Selective Demolition and shall be coordinated with work specified in Division 15, Mechanical for location and size of new exhaust fan and supply air fan penetrations.

2. Structural steel angles for supporting and distributing new equipment loads to multiple roof joists at Make-up Air Unit curb are specified in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications and shall be installed in coordination with work of this Section and that of Division 15.

3. Sheet metal roof deck patches and penetration perimeter edge reinforcing angles are specified in Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal and shall be installed under the work of this Section.


A. Qualifications:

1. All roofing work shall be performed by only a roofing subcontractor certified by the manufacturer of the existing roofing system to make post-warranty modifications to this roof (See 1.8,B).

2. Complete “Post-Warranty Alteration Form” provided by roofing system manufacturer.

3. The installing subcontractor shall prepare and provide roofing system manufacturer's updated warranty validation subject to successful completion of work of the Section.

B. Products used for making modifications to this existing roofing system shall be acceptable to that manufacturer.

C. Installer is certified by that manufacturer for making modifications to this existing roofing system while maintaining all benefits of the original roofing system warranty.

D. Roofing system subcontractor shall evaluate existing roof, determine manufacturer and obtain warranty information from that roofing system manufacturer stating the restrictions, requirements and remaining length of the existing warranty.

1. Submit manufacturer's warranty information, including written restrictions, requirements and remaining length of existing warranty to Architect as required under Paragraph 1.5 below.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that roofing system subcontractor meets all requirements set forth by existing roofing system manufacturer holding warranty prior to making submittals under Paragraph 1.5 below.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Cited standards and the manufacturer’s catalog, current at the date of bidding documents, unless otherwise specified, are incorporated herein by reference and govern he work.

1. If conflict is discovered between referenced Standards or catalogs and the project specifications, request written clarification from the Contracting Officer or designated representative and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW.

2. Do not proceed with the work until receiving such clarification.


B. Standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accord with Section 01340.

B. "Post-Warranty Alteration Form", written warranty information, restrictions, requirements and written validation by existing roofing system manufacturer that current roof warranty will remain in full force and effect subject to roofing system subcontractor's completion of work specified under this Section.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings to the manufacturer for review. 2. Submit only manufacturer reviewed shop drawings to A-E for review. 3. Minimum scale for details: 1 ½” = 1’-0”. 4. Submit the following:

a. Partial plan illustrating extent of modifications and fastener pattern for insulation replaced.

b. Details illustrating installation and fastenings of the following:

1.) Equipment and pipe portal curb flashings. 2.) Equipment support flashings. 3.) Membrane splices to new and existing. 4.) Sacrificial overlay splices to existing EPDM roofing.

D. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer’s specifications for roofing system, 3 sets. 2. Manufacturer's specifications for sacrificial membrane, 3 sets. 3. Roof insulation specifications, 3 sets. 4. Pipe portals, equipment supports and incidental sheet metal components, 3 sets.


A. Per roofing manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Deliver materials requiring fire resistant classifications packaged with labels intact and legible.


A. The existing fully adhered single-ply EPDM membrane roofing and flashing system is under warranty.

1. Contractor shall contact Ft. Leonard Wood DPW POC below to obtain warranty information necessary to complete "Post-Warranty Alteration Form":

a. POC: Gary Roberts, P.E., Chief Engr Design Br. b. Phone: 573.596.0909. c. E-mail: [email protected]

2. Obtain the following minimum information and any additional information required to maintain current warranty:


a. Manufacturer of roofing system. b. Roof warranty number. c. Age of existing roofing system. d. Duration of warranty. e. Other information pertinent to the existing roofing system.

B. Existing Substrate:

1. K-series steel bar joist construction spaced at ±5’-0” centers. 2. 1½” standard rib steel roof deck. 3. Two layers of ±2” rigid roof insulation. 4. Total thickness of existing system is approximately ±4” with varying low slope built

into structure.

C. Environmental Conditions:

1. Remove existing roofing only in dry weather. 2. Install roofing and insulation only in dry weather. 3. Comply with manufacturer’s climatic restrictions.

D. Protection:

1. Protect existing and new roof membrane, building surfaces, paving and landscaping from traffic and roofing equipment.

2. Restore or replace all work or materials damaged by the roofing operation. 3. Remove protection materials upon completion of work. 4. Avoid traffic on completed work.

E. Comply with all regulations imposed by Ft. Leonard Wood at the job site.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Contractor: Two years.

B. The existing roofing membrane is currently under warranty by the manufacturer of the original roofing system.

1. Bidders shall be responsible for determination of existing roofing system manufacturer holding warranty on system.

2. Bidders shall contact Ft. Leonard Wood DPW for additional information pertaining to the system manufacturer and warranty as indicated above.

3. Only roofing subcontractor certified by the existing roofing system manufacturer shall be allowed to perform post-warranty alteration work on this roof.

4. In order to maintain warranty Contractor shall furnish Architect, Contracting Officer and Ft. Leonard Wood DPW with a completed “Post-Warranty Alteration Form” as furnished by roofing system manufacturer.

5. Submit validation from roofing system manufacturer that existing warranty will be in full force and effect for the duration of the current roof warranty upon completion of work of this Section.

6. Contractor shall submit "Post-Warranty Alteration Form" and roofing system manufacturer's written validation of current roof warranty with O & M Manuals in compliance with Section 01700, Project Close-out.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS


A. Provide materials for the entire EPDM roof modification system including adhesives, sealants, cured and uncured flashings, fasteners, membrane and other related components manufactured or recommended by the manufacturer of the original warranted system.

B. Use only materials and components manufactured or recommended by this manufacturer throughout the project for:

1. Fully Adhered System. 2. .060 EPDM membrane.

2.2 EPICHLOROHYDRIN (ECO/CO) MEMBRANE

A. Provide an Epichlorohydrin overlay roof membrane as indicated at Burger King roof to protect fully adhered EPDM membrane from damage by animal fats.

B. Overlay membrane shall be cured, non-reinforced black, 0.060 inch thick ECO/CO compounded Hydrin epichlorohydrin elastomer that conforms to minimum physical properties as follows:

Physical Property Test Method Specification (Pass) Typical Tollerance on Nominal Thickness(%)

ASTM D 412

±10

±10

Tensile Strength, Minimum (psi) ASTM D 412 1305 1556

Elongation, Ultimate, Minimum (%) ASTM D 412 200 316

Tear Resistance, Minimum (lbf/in) ASTM D 624

(Die C) 150 263

Resistance to Heat Aging Properties after 168 hours @ 240º F. Tensile Strength, Minimum (psi) Elongation, Ultimate, Minimum (%)

ASTM D 412 ASTM D 412

1400 150

Ozone Resistance Condition after exposure to 100 pphm Ozone in air for 168 hours @ 104º F. Specimen is at 50% strain

ASTM D 1149 No Cracks No Cracks

Brittleness Temperature, Maximum (º F.) ASTM D 746 -20 -20

Water Vapor Permeablity Maximum, perms (.060” Thickness)

ASTM E 96 (Proc. B)

0.1 0.042

Oil Absorption Change in mass, Maximum %, 7 days Immersion in #2 Diesel fuel at 158 º F.

ASTM D 471

15

13.5

C. Overly membrane shall be specially designed to resist hydrocarbons, solvents, grease

and oil and shall be promoted for use as a protective overlayment on EPDM roofing systems.

D. Provide membrane solvent-based cleaner, high strength splicing cement, seam sealant, lap sealant and all other products necessary to install overlay system on warranted EPDM roofing system.


2.3 ROOF INSULATION

A. The Contractor shall select a brand acceptable to the roofing manufacturer to match existing roof insulation in type and thickness installed in two (2) layers.

B. Roof Insulation for patching all Areas:

1. First Layer: Thickness, ± 2 inches. 2. Second Layer: Thickness, ±2 inches. 3. Overlay Board: 1/4" minimum glass-matt faced cover board or other overlay

product acceptable to roofing system manufacturer and to match existing.

2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids.

B. Mechanical Anchors: Tubelock fasteners as recommended and approved by roofing manufacturer, spacing to comply with ASTM D1836, FM Class 1.

1. Provide system equivalent to one tested and approved for I-60 wind uplift rating. 2. Provide 1 fastener for every 2 square feet of insulation. 3. Install fasteners a minimum of 3 inches from edges of insulation.

2.5 OTHER MATERIALS

A. EPDM .060 flashing as approved by the manufacturer.

B. Pressure sensitive self-adhesive cured EPDM splice tape.

C. Building sealants to provide weather-tight closure of counter flashings and similar items of construction on roof.

D. Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry for blocking or other rough carpentry items specified to be installed in conjunction with accessory items and roofing.

E. Refer to Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal for sheet metal items indicated.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Installation during weather conditions other than those permitted in the manufacturer’s specifications must be acknowledged in writing by the manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

B. Removal and Installation shall be performed during dry weather conditions.

3.2 REMOVE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION

A. Contractor shall implement security and construction protection program in cooperation with the AAFES General Manager and Ft. Leonard Wood personnel prior to commencement of any roof removal work.

B. Permanent Removals:

1. Remove all existing roof membrane, roof insulation and related components down to the roof deck on areas indicated to receive new curbs and/or equipment supports.


3.3 INSPECTION

A. Examine all existing surfaces and components to remain for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, unevenness or other conditions which could prevent the best quality and longevity of roofing, flashing and accessory components.

B. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative of all deficiencies.

C. Do not proceed with the work until all deficiencies have been corrected to the satisfaction of the roof system manufacturer, Contracting Officer and/or designated representative.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that all surfaces are clean and dry before starting and during performance of work.

B. Verify that all work of subcontractors that penetrates the roof deck or requires men and equipment to traverse the roof deck has been completed before proceeding with roof system patching installation.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet metal roof deck patches and reinforce roof deck edges of all existing and new openings parallel to deck span as indicated with sheet metal angles in accordance with sizes and fastening patterns specified in Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal.

1. Original exhaust fan opening. 2. Original supply air fan opening. 3. New Exhaust fan openings.

B. Install new structural steel roof deck support angles as indicated to support new Make-up Air Unit curb perimeter and to reinforce perimeter of newly cut supply air opening in existing roof deck.

C. Install roof curbs by mechanically anchoring flanged units to existing roof deck per manufacturer’s written directions and to resist minimum wind loads indicated by referenced building Codes.

1. Provide solid 2 x wood blocking anchored to deck under curb flanges where necessary to maintain specified curb or equipment support heights above roof surfaces.

D. Patch roof insulation with end joints staggered at midpoint.

1. Install mechanically attached insulation per manufacturer’s recommendations with a minimum of one fastener for each two square feet of insulation.

2. Install fasteners a minimum of 3 inches in from the edges of board.

E. Install the roofing and flashing system and all accessory items in accord with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

1. Install ECO/CO overlay membrane over new EPDM membrane roofing system where indicated.

2. Install pressure sensitive self-adhesive seaming tape over all field splices. 3. Strip in the laps with peal and stick tape in addition to standard adhered

membrane splicing procedures.


F. Install new roof related items such as flashings, sheet metal counter flashings and related accessories to complete watertight installation of roofing system.


A. Carefully inspect all completed work and correct all defects.

B. Accompany the manufacturer’s Technical Inspector during inspection to re-validate existing warranty and assist with equipment and workmen if necessary to provide access to the roof.

C. Correct all defects noted during inspection.

D. Remove from job site and legally dispose of rubbish and debris.

E. Prevent storage of material or equipment on the completed roof.

END 07559.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07600 – FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Galvanized corrugated sheet metal sheets for patching existing metal roof deck.

b. Galvanized sheet metal angle fabrications for reinforcing edges of new openings in existing metal roof deck.

c. Miscellaneous sheet metal items, fasteners and accessories related to sheet metal work.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 4. 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 5. 07559 – Modifications to Warranted EPDM Roof System. 6. 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.

B. Installation of all sheet metal items related to patching membrane roofing shall be coordinated with work performed under Section 07559, Modifications to Warranted EPDM Roof System.


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Codes, Regulations and Recommendations:

1. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations. 2. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in current edition of

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01340 and in coordination with Section 07531.

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the

specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, that after review by the

Contracting Officer or designated representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.


B. Detailed Shop drawings illustrating the following:

1. Gauge and finish of stock material. 2. Fabrication techniques. 3. Installation drawings including techniques and anchorage. 4. Interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent trades.

a. Coordinate shop drawings with those of other manufactured items such as new equipment curbs related to this work to illustrate interrelationship between components.

b. Show all blocking and substrates to which sheet metal components will be attached.

C. Samples: Provide actual metal samples in manufacturer’s high performance organic coatings for selection by Contracting Officer or designated representative.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging with all labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials on raised platforms and protect with coverings at outdoor locations and in a manner to prevent damage, in a secure place, out of the way of construction operations.

C. Materials furnished under this Section that may be installed by other trades shall be delivered to the site in time to avoid delays to construction progress.

D. Handle all material in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Two-year warranty on all sheet metal items specified herein.

B. Contractor provide written warranty, on Contractor’s letterhead, to Contracting Officer or designated representative at time of Project Close-out in accord with Section 01770.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal:

1. Galvanized Steel:

a. ASTM A-527, lockforming quality. b. Provide G-90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A-525.

1.) Finish shall be mill phosphatized for all locations.

c. Minimum thickness: 18 gauge.

B. Fasteners: #10 self-drilling, self-tapping TEK screws.

2.2 SHOP FABRICATED ITEMS

A. Deck Patching:


1. Provide corrugated sheet metal patches fabricated from flat stock sheared to length and width required to cover existing deck penetration holes left by equipment removed under this Project.

2. Material shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal as indicated in size to cover opening plus overlaps onto existing roof deck a minimum of 6 inches at perimeters.

3. Patches shall be fabricated to match flutes in existing steel roof deck with corrugations approximately 1 1/2" deep with spacing at approximately 6" on center for nesting into roof deck.

4. Fasten corrugated sheet metal deck patches with #10 TEK screws placed a minimum of 6 inches on center with minimum number of fasteners as follows:

a. Outside corners: One fastener at each corner a minimum of 2 inches from edge of opening.

b. Edges: Not to exceed 6 inch centers but no less than one fastener per side around entire perimeter of patch.

B. Edge Channel Reinforcing:

1. Provide custom fabricated sheet metal angles broke and cut to fit edges parallel to span of existing roof deck as follows:

a. Patched existing openings exceeding 1 square foot in size or with an edge dimension exceeding 12 inches.

b. Newly cut deck penetration openings for new ductwork.

2. Material shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal as indicated:

a. Horizontal leg: Minimum 4" wide to set on top of deck as a fastening flange. b. Vertical leg: Minimum 2" high with leg turn downward toward interior of

building opening.

3. Lengths of fabricated angles shall be no less than opening length or width plus an 6 inch extension past end of openings each end.

a. Vertical leg shall be coped so that leg length matches opening length or width.

b. Horizontal leg shall extend equally on both ends 6 inches over top surface of existing roof deck for fastening.

4. Fasten flat sheet metal reinforcing angles with #10 TEK screws placed a minimum of 6 inches on center with minimum number of fasteners as follows:

a. Ends: One fastener at each end within 2 inches of opening. b. Edges: Not to exceed 6 inch centers but no less than one fastener per side

around entire perimeter of each opening edge.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. 2. Do not proceed with flashing or sheet metal work until unsatisfactory conditions

are corrected.

B. Coordinate items to be shop fabricated with existing and new roof deck opening requirements to ensure dimensional compatibility and clearances.


3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION

A. Before ordering sheet metal, verify dimensions of areas to be patched and reinforced by making and recording all necessary field measurements.

B. Determine lengths and other required dimensions to avoid delays in production and installation.

C. Ensure that all substrates are properly prepared, free of distortions that could effect flatness of finished sheet metal on surface of existing roof deck.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP

A. TEK screws and similar fastenings required for proper installation and anchorage of work shall be type best suited for application, intended purpose and shall be non-corrosive.

B. Keep work straight during erection.

1. Free from buckles, dents, twists, warps or waves. 2. Without fastening stresses or distortions. 3. Reinforce all edges and anchoring points as indicated.

C. If sheet metal patches or reinforcing angles are damaged or demonstrate unacceptable characteristics described above, replace entire piece with new material.

3.4 ADJUST & CLEANING

A. Examine completed work for damage and conformance with contract documents.

B. Remove damaged pieces and replace with new, materials meeting requirements of the specification.

C. Completed work shall be cleaned as in accordance with sheet metal manufacturer's instructions and left free of stains, discoloration and sharp edges.

D. Remove all scrap and debris and dispose of off site and leave all work areas clean.

END 07600.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07920 – BUILDING & PAVING JOINT SEALERS

BUILDING & PAVING JOINT SEALERS 07920-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All sealing and caulking of building joints. b. All joint fillers and accessories indicated and herein specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. All Sections of the Specifications.


A. Qualifications of installers: Employ only experienced craftsmen, skilled in the installation of specified products.

B. Contractor shall select one manufacturer for all exposed sealants and caulking.

1. Coordinate purchase of sealants and caulking with individual subcontractors so that each trade will furnish compatible products of the selected manufacturer.

2. Coordinate installation with individual subcontractors so that methods and colors for all exposed sealants and caulking will match.

C. Color(s) will be selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from standard range of colors available from manufacturer selected by Contractor from approved list below.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Industry standards as set forth by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

B. Manufacturer's Catalogs: The acceptable manufacturer's catalogs, current at date of bidding documents, are incorporated by reference to the same force and effect as if repeated herein at length.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340 and applicable technical Sections.

B. Product data:

1. Materials description. 2. Manufacturer's current printed installation instructions for each product.

C. Samples: Each compound and joint filler for color selection.



A. Deliver all products in manufacturer's original containers, with seals unbroken, labels, product and manufacturer's names intact and legible.

B. Store all products in a manner to prevent damage, in a secure place, out of way of construction operations and provide protection until ready for use.

C. Handle in accord with manufacturer's written recommendations.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental conditions:

1. Weather: Do not install products during adverse weather conditions. 2. Temperature: Ensure that surface and ambient temperatures are within the range

recommended by the manufacturer.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule work to coincide with work of other subcontractors.

B. Perform work of this Section as soon as possible after permanent installation of products requiring joint sealants.

1.9 WARRANTY

B. Two-year warranty on all sealants, caulk, joint fillers and related accessories.

C. Contractor provide written warranty for work furnished, on Contractor’s letterhead, to Architect at time of Project Close-out in accord with Section 01770.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES

A. Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. BASF Master Builders, BASF Construction Systems Shakopee, MN

2. DOW DOW Chemical Co. Midland, MI

3. MEAD W.R. Meadows, In.c Elgin, IL

4. PECO Pecora Chemical Corp. Harleysville, PA

5. TREM Tremco Manufacturing Co. Cleveland, OH

2.2 SEALANTS

A. Generic description and use:

1. S-1: One component urethane, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric sealant.


a. Use in all joints one-inch wide or less wherever movement may occur, at contraction and expansion joints.

b. Designed for joints in metal-to-metal, metal-to-masonry or masonry-to-masonry.

2. S-2: Two component urethane, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric sealant for use in all joints wherever movement may occur in locations indicated for S-1 sealant.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with subcontractors for selection of one of the following specified sealants for use on entire Project.

C. Acceptable products:

MFGR/TYPE S-1 S-2

1. BASF MasterSeal NP1 MasterSeal NP2 2. MEAD Pourthane NS 3. PECO Dynatrol I Dynatrol II 4. TREM Dymonic Dymeric

D. Color: Provide color as selected by Contracting Officer for specific locations and to match adjacent materials.

2.3 CAULKS

A. Provide caulking materials as specified for interior use only.

B. Generic description:

1. C-1: One part butyl gun grade. 2. C-2: One part acrylic gun grade.

C. Acceptable products:

MFGR/TYPE C-1 C-2

1. BASF Butakauk Sonalac acrylic 2. PECO Butyl BC 158 AC20 acrylic latex 3. TREM Butyl sealant 400/500 Acrylic latex calk

2.4 JOINT FILLERS

A. Generic description and use:

1. JF-1: Backer rod for elastomeric sealants.

a. Extruded closed-cell polyethylene foam or polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam.

b. Non-bleeding, non-staining, oversized 30 to 50 percent.

2. JF-2: Preformed fiber joint filler, asphalt impregnated. 3. JF-3: Preformed cork expansion joint filler.

B. Acceptable products:

MFGR/TYPE JF-1 JF-2 JF-3

1. BASF Sonofoam 2. DOW Ethafoam 3. MEAD Backer Rod Fiber E.J. Sealtight Cork


2.5 JOINT CLEANER

A. Joint Cleaner: Type recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing compound for the specific joint surface and condition.

2.6 BOND BREAKER

A. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape; pressure sensitive recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Thoroughly inspect all existing construction and the conditions under which the work will be performed and report to the Architect all conditions that would adversely affect installation of the work.

B. Verify that all joint dimensions are in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of construction and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. In addition to new work remove all sealant and backer material from existing brick masonry control joints.

1. Clean, prepare and size joints in accord with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Remove all loose materials and foreign matter using compressed air. 3. Proof areas to ensure that joint is free of all materials that might impair adhesion of

sealant or caulking.

B. Prior to installing sealants in horizontal joints where asphalt impregnated expansion joint fillers or other non-polyethylene joint fillers have already been placed, cut filler to 1 inch below surface of concrete and install polyethylene tape directly over the cut edge.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Install bond breaker tape wherever recommended by manufacturer to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly.

C. Install sealants and caulking in uniform, continuous ribbons, without gaps or air pockets.

1. Ensure complete "wetting" of the joints. 2. Bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. 3. Fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.

D. Install sealants to depths indicated or when not indicated, within the following limitations:

1. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to depth equal to 50 percent of joint width but not more than 1/2” deep or less than 1/4” deep.

2. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75 percent to 125 percent of joint width.


E. Spillage:

1. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces. 2. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining

surfaces.

3.4 CURING

A. Cure sealant compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

3.5 ADJUST & CLEAN

A. Upon completion, carefully examine all sealant and caulking work.

1. Remove all damaged and defective work. 2. Replace defective work with new materials.

B. Clean up and remove all surplus products, containers and rubbish and dispose of off site.

C. Remove all spilled or spattered materials from all surfaces.

1. When adjacent surfaces or other work has been damaged or stained as a result of sealing work, repair all damage.

2. Remove all stains to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work during remainder of construction period.

B. Ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal wear or weathering) at substantial completion.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Sealants:

1. Use for all exterior applications where joint filling is required such as:

a. Between metal to metal joints. b. Between metals and other dissimilar materials. c. Between dissimilar materials.

2. At contraction and expansion joints. 3. At other locations noted on drawings or where joint filling is required to provide a

weather tight seal between materials.

B. Caulking:

1. At all interior joints.

a. Between countertops and walls. b. Between hollow metal frames and walls. c. Between dissimilar finish materials.

2. At other locations noted on drawings or where joint filling is required to provide neat appearance and transition between materials.

END 07920.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08305 – ACCESS DOORS

ACCESS DOORS 08305-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Non-rated access doors. b. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 4. Section 09900 – Painting. 5. Division 15 – Mechanical. 6. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Refer to Division 15, Mechanical and Division 16, Electrical for related information pertaining to access doors for equipment and controls.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product Data:

1. For each type of access door specified including:

a. Details of construction relative to adjacent construction framing and finishes. b. Individual components. c. Profiles and finishes.

2. Include complete schedule illustrating types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Indicate exact location of each access door on plan and in schedule. 2. Show fabrication and installation of access doors and frames. 3. Details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, anchorage, and

accessory items. 4. Relationship of items and anchorage to actual adjacent construction.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Verification: Prior to submission of proposal, Contractor shall review controls, valve and equipment locations for access door locations not specifically indicated on drawings with other trades to determine locations sizes and quantities of access doors needed to gain access.

B. Proposal: Contractor shall base proposal upon furnishing all incidental access doors required by these other trades to access controls, valves and equipment that are installed in otherwise inaccessible spaces.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Standard Access Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers of access doors:

1. Karp Associates, Inc. – Model KDW. 2. Milcor, Inc. – Model DW. 3. Nystrom, Inc. – Model MW.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A-366/A-366M commercial-quality, cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A-591/A-591M, Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet with Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting.

2.3 STANDARD ACCESS DOORS

A. Standard Access Doors: Standard, non-fire rated, self-latching units consisting of frame, trim, door, insulation, and hardware, including automatic closer, interior latch release, and complying with the following requirements:

1. Frame with Exposed Trim: Perimeter frame with integral drywall trim complying with the following requirements:

a. Metal: 16 gauge thick galvanized bonderized steel. b. Trim: Manufacturer’s standard flange overlapping gypsum board surfaces

surrounding door frame.

2. Door: 20 gauge thick galvanized bonderized steel, welded pan type. 3. Door Size:

a. Miscellaneous Access: 12” x 12” (nominal) or as required for access to controls or equipment.

4. Hinges: Continuous type, 16 gauge with stainless steel pin. 5. Latches: Key operated lock for keyed access from outside the door.

B. Provide units that comply with the requirements for access to Mechanical or Electrical system controls, valves or equipment as specified in Divisions 15 and 16.


2.4 ACCESS DOOR FABRICATION

A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.

B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction.

1. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 2. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access

panels to types of supports indicated. 3. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25.4 to 38.1 mm) wide around

perimeter of frame. 4. Furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board.

C. Latching Devices: Furnish number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Advise Installers of other related work about specific requirements relating to access door and roof hatch installation.

1. Confirm that opening openings in wall and in roof deck are properly framed and supported.

2. Ensure that curb blocking has been properly placed and anchored for leveling and anchoring roof hatch curb.

B. Include sizes of rough openings to receive access doors and roof hatch, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.

1. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction.

2. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installing access doors.

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces.


A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged.

END 08305.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09250 – GYPSUM DRYWALL

GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All heavy-duty drywall stud framing for interior walls. b. All miscellaneous drywall stud framing for soffits and similar construction. c. All gypsum fire-rated and fire-rated/water resistant gypsum drywall for

ceilings and walls. d. All cementitious backer board for low walls in back-of-house areas. e. All fasteners, beads, trim, control joints and related accessory items

necessary to complete the work of this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 6. Section 08305 – Access Doors. 7. Division 09 – Finishes. 8. Section 10265 – Wall Surface Protection Systems. 9. Division 11 – Equipment. 10. Division 15 – Mechanical. 11. Division 16 – Electrical.


A. Installation: Installation and application of materials specified shall be in accord with latest printed directions and specifications of manufacturers.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings:

1. Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File No's. in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.


B. Product data: Complete manufacturers’ product data for each product installed under work of this Section including:

1. Gypsum drywall products. 2. Gypsum drywall accessories. 3. Gypsum drywall framing and suspension systems.

C. Certification and Instructions:

1. Manufacturers’ certification stating that materials furnished comply with standards set forth in these specifications.

2. Manufacturer’s printed instruction for installation.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes.

C. Neatly stack gypsum board panels flat to prevent sagging.

D. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.

E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.


A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Minimum Room Temperatures:

1. For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C).

2. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete.

C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials.

D. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Steel Framing and Furring:

a. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems.


b. Consolidated Fabricators Corporation (CONFAB). c. Craco Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products:

a. Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING

A. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645, of profile, size, and base metal thickness required to produce assemblies complying with structural performance requirements, with sectional properties computed to conform with AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

1. Steel Studs and Runners: 33 ksi, heavy duty drywall stud with 1 ¼” wide flange with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:

a. Thickness: 30 mil (nominal). b. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (20 gauge nominal). c. Depth: 1 5/8", 2 1/2", 3 5/8”, 4" and 6” or as otherwise indicated.

2. Miscellaneous Framing: 50 ksi, standard duty drywall stud with 1 ¼” wide flange with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:

a. Thickness: 19 mil (nominal). b. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0200 (25 gauge nominal) c. Depth: 1 5/8", 2 ½”, 3 5/8” or as otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated.

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end joints.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, and as follows:

1. Type: Type “X” for all assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8” or as indicated. 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

products for Type “X” gypsum wallboard:

a. "ToughRock FireGuard”; Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. " Gold Bond Fire-Shield"; National Gypsum Co. c. "Sheetrock Brand Firecode Gypsum Panels"; United States Gypsum Co.

5. Provide water resistant, fire resistant core gypsum drywall, subject to requirements listed above, at all locations to receive ceramic tile and fiberglass reinforced wall panels (FRP).


C. Backer Board: Cementitious, water durable, board; surfaced with fiberglass reinforcing mesh on front and back; long edges wrapped; and complying with ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1325

1. Type: Cementitious Tile Backer Board, Edges: Tapered. 2. Thickness: 5/8” or as indicated. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

products for cementitious backer board:

a. “DensShield Tile Backer”; Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. “PermaBase Cement Board”; National Gypsum Co. c. “DUROCK Cement Board”; United States Gypsum Co.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction that comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board.

B. Corner-bead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:

1. Material: Formed metal complying with the following requirement:

a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.

2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047:

a. "LC" or “L” Bead (USG #200A), unless otherwise indicated.

3. One-Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip.

C. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002.

2.5 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated.

B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape.

C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.

1. Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory-premixed product. 2. Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. 3. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners

and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. 4. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 5. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset wood and hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling.

B. Verify that all installations are level, plumb and within specified tolerances to receive installations specified for this Project.

C. Inspect original plaster ceiling and identify holes and openings that would otherwise compromise separation of the existing attic space and framing from the building interior.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work, at unsupported edges of structural exterior wall sheathing and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on Drawings:

1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetration of structural elements.

2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.

D. Anchor framing tracks so that they do not bridge building expansion and control joints by anchoring tracks to one side only for all runs.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING

A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction.

1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surface do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing.


C. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings.

D. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceilings to provide support for gypsum board.

E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.

F. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange.

G. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.

H. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on doorframes; install runner track section (for cripple studs) and header at head and secure to jamb studs.

1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.

2. Provide continuous wood blocking attached to steel framing as indicated for fastening finish wood and other materials.

I. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated, or if none indicated, in same manner as required for door openings and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CEMENT BACKER BOARD

A. Install backer board from floor to 2’-0” above finish floor in Back-of-House areas indicated in compliance with ASTM C 1280, GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten backer board to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install backer boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction

abuts structural elements. 3. Install backer boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar

materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Horizontal Installation: Abut ends of backer boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing.

1. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 2. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch

from edges and ends of boards.

C. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

3.6 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install boards with end joints staggered over studs in manner that minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoid them entirely where possible.


1. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls as possible. 2. Stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board.

C. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner that minimizes the number of end-butt joints.

1. Avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. 2. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches.

D. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out.

1. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. 2. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16

inch open space between boards. 3. Do not force into place.

E. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints.

1. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends.

2. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. 3. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.

F. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first.

G. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts.

H. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.

I. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.

3.7 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION

A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows:

1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible.

2. On walls or walls furred with “Z”-furring apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths that will minimize end joints.

3. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints.

4. On “Z”-furring members apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods:

1. Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 2. Fasten with screws.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports or otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.


B. Install corner beads at external corners.

C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed.

D. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound.

1. Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.

2. Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed.

3. Install “F” molding where new gypsum board edge abuts aluminum curtain wall door jambs and door head at interior side of existing wall construction.

E. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative for visual effect.

3.9 FINISHING OF DRYWALL

A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required; to prepare work for decoration.

B. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated.

C. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats and sand between coats and after last coat:

1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or taping compound.

2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound.


A. Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or replace any defective items with new, acceptable products.

1. Fasteners:

a. When face paper is punctured, drive new screw approximately 1 ½” from defective fastener and remove original screw.

b. Fill damaged surface with joint taping compound and repair facer surface with joint tape.

2. Fill cracks or voids.

B. Remove excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition ready for work by other trades.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer.

B. Ensure gypsum drywall construction to be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 09250.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09300 – Tile

TILE 09300-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All interior glass wall tile. b. All interior ceramic tile base. c. All interior quarry tile and base. d. All bond coat mortar, additives, grout, expansion joints and miscellaneous

materials for a complete installation. e. Metal termination and control joint strips. f. Slip resistive floor tile surface treatment. g. Coordination of demolition and surface preparation of tile beds. h. Clean up.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 5. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 6. Section 11400 – Food Service Equipment. 7. Division 15 – Mechanical.

B. Coordinate tile installation with clearance undercuts for existing doors.


A. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

2. Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

B. All tile shall be comply with applicable portions of ANSI A137.1 – 1988 standards.

C. Bond coat setting bed shall conform to ANSI A118.4 - 1992.

D. Grout shall conform to ANSI A118.6 - 1992 for type specified.

E. Workmanship shall comply to the following:

1. Tile installation shall conform to ANSI A118.5 – 1992. 2. Grout installation shall conform to ANSI A118.10 – 1992.

F. Expansion joint sealant shall comply with ASTM C920.

1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS

TILE 09300-2

A. The Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA), “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” (2011 Edition).

1. Interior Applications: Method F113.

B. ANSI A137.1 – 1988, Ceramic Tile.

C. ANSI A118.5 – 1992, Mortar Bed.

D. ANSI A118.10 – 1992, Grout.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, product shall demonstrate a minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.6 when tested per ASTM C-1028.

B. Floor Tile Installation: Floor tile installation shall perform to the referenced standards specified above.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accord with Section 01340.

B. Product data:

1. Product data for each type of product specified including:

a. Master Grade Certificate for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

b. Tile manufacturer’s Product Certificate of compliance with specified standards including slip resistance of surface.

c. Tile Manufacturer’s printed instructions for installation including references to ANSI standards for specific applications.

1.) Interior method for thin setting tile on concrete substrate using latex-Portland cement mortar.

d. Setting bed mortar, grout and additives. e. Expansion requirements and methods of installation.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. 2. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation

joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

a. Exact locations of expansion joints shall be conveyed to Contractor for coordination with concrete subcontractor for preparation of substrate.

b. Base locations from actual field dimensions of walls during construction and before exterior concrete entrance slab and frost walls are poured.

D. Samples:

1. Initial Selection:

a. For each type of tile and grout indicated. b. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

2. Verification:

a. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

TILE 09300-3

b. Units of each type of trim and accessory.


A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project.


A. General: Deliver and store in accord with Section 01620.

B. Packaged Materials:

1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

2. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

C. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

E. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

F. Temporary Protective Coatings:

1. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units.

2. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Confirm that tile pattern and expansion joint layout are accurately coordinated with expansion and control joints in concrete substrates.

B. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.

C. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup.

TILE 09300-4

D. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated.

B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearances characteristics, provide specific products or materials or equal as approved in advance by Architect per Section 01630, Substitutions & Product Options.

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Interior Quarry Floor Tile:

1. B.O.H.:

a. Floor: Interceramic – Quarry Tile Basics Abrasive, 6" x 6", Product Number 31A, Color "Mayflower Red".

b. Cove Base: Interceramic – Quarry Tile Basics, 6" x 6", Product Number Q-3565, Color " Mayflower Red".

B. Interior Glass Wall Tile:

1. Popeye's:

a. Interceramic – Mosaic Tile, DB Pattern/Border/Mural, "Mardigras Carnival", 1" x 1".

C. Interior Ceramic Floor Tile:

1. Queuing Area:

a. Base: Crossville – Cross-Colors LP, 6" x 12", Product Number LA 90, Color "Granite Grey".

1.) Verify matches existing base in Dining Room.

D. Refer to floor finish plan and interior elevations on drawings for patterns.

E. Mortars and Grouts:

1. Provide Mapei “Kerabond” premium premixed thinset mortar for all floor and wall tile installations.

2. Provide Mapei “Keracolor” premium sanded grout for all wall tile installations.

TILE 09300-5

3. Provide Mapei “Kerapoxy” stain-free epoxy grout for all floor tile and base installations.

4. Provide Mapei “Keralastic” water emulsion latex additive, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, or type specifically recommended by manufacturer for use with field-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.

F. Provide manufacturer’s standard membrane product for crack suppression and waterproofing that complies with ANSI A118.10.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Transition Strip: Height to match floor tile and setting-bed thickness, designed specifically for flooring applications.

1. Install at all transitions between tile and dissimilar flooring materials. 2. Product shall be as manufactured by Schluter,

a. Reno-V profile in brushed stainless steel (304) (EB) finish. b. Reno-T profile in brushed stainless steel (304) (EB) finish.

C. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: “U”-shape movement profile with edge protection, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications where expansion/contraction is necessary, half-hard exposed metal edge.

1. Install at all transitions between tile and tile expansion/contraction joints. 2. Strips shall provide a movement zone made of soft synthetic rubber. 3. Product shall be as manufactured by Schluter, Dilex-KSBT profile in stainless steel

(304) #5 finish.

D. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation, 112 North Alfred St., Alexandria, VA 22134 or Ceramic Tile Institute, 700 N. Virgil Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90029.

E. Slip Resistive Sealer: Provide natural look, colorless penetrating protective sealer equal to Miracle Sealants Company, “511 Inpregnator”.

1. Sealer shall provide water, stain and slip resistance. 2. Sealer shall be as approved by tile and grout manufacturers for use on specified

products.

2.4 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

TILE 09300-6

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in, or behind, tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that control and expansion joints in exterior concrete slab are exactly in alignment with tile pattern layout for alignment of tile expansion joints.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.

B. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated.

B. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCNA installation methods indicated.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown.

D. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

E. Accurately form intersections and returns.

1. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. 2. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight

aligned joints. 3. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that

plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

F. Jointing Pattern:

1. Lay tile to grid pattern indicated on drawings.

TILE 09300-7

2. Align joints when adjoining tile on floor and base when units are same size. 3. Provide factory formed inside and outside corners at base installations where corners

must be turned. 4. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall

area. 5. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 6. Provide uniform joint widths in size as recommended by manufacturer according to

each type of tile.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including isolation joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile.

1. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 2. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above expansion joints in concrete substrates. 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Section 07920,

Building & Pavement Joint Sealers.

H. Control Joints: Locate control joints at sawcut or construction joints as indicated by installing specified metal edge strips.

I. Install penetrating sealer to unpolished floor tile per manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1. Allow to penetrate surface 3 to 5 minutes and remove ALL excess by buffing surface with a clean dry towel.

2. Allow penetrating sealer to cure for a minimum of 12 to 24 hours before proceeding with grout installation.

J. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the installation standards.

1. Apply penetrating sealer to all grout joints using paint brush. 2. Wipe excess sealer off surface of tile with a clean dry towel before it dries.

3.4 FLOOR AND WALL INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Ceramic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated for setting bed methods and TCNA installation methods related to types of sub-floor construction, wall substrate and grout types.

B. Metal Reducer Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets dissimilar flooring materials such as at doors.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

a. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation.

b. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.

2. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un-bonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

TILE 09300-8

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer to ensure that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile base and floors. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

END 09300.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09510 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09510-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All vinyl faced gypsum panel ceilings. b. 15/16” grid and suspension system. c. Perimeter standard wall angles. d. Miscellaneous accessory items for complete and proper installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 4. Section 09900 – Painting. 5. Section 09986 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels (FRP). 6. Division 15 – Mechanical. 7. Division 16 – Electrical.


A. Installation of acoustical ceilings shall be by workmen with a minimum experience of 3 project installations of comparable extent as proposed project.

B. Performance:

1. Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices supporting light fixtures, ceiling grids and acoustical units shall permit a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span.

2. Finished acoustical ceiling system shall be level with 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 3. Panels shall have edges in alignment.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-alarm system components, security system components and partition system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers complete printed product data:

1. Acoustical tile ceiling pads. 2. Vinyl faced ceiling pads. 3. Acoustical tile ceiling suspension system. 4. Accessory items including reveal edge trim.

C. Samples:

1. Samples, 12” square, of each type acoustical tile or vinyl faced panel. 2. Samples, 12” long, of exposed grid tee and reveal edge shadow line perimeter wall

angle.


A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Sections 01600 and 01620.

B. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

C. Store acoustical ceiling units to comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for temperature and humidity.

D. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Complete installation of roofing materials and wall/ceiling perimeter painting before beginning work.

2. Maintain humidity of 65%-70% in area where acoustical materials are to be installed, during and 24 hours before and after installation.

3. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. prior to and during installation of materials.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

B. Acoustical ceiling units: furnish minimum of two extra cartons of units or 2% of the amount installed, whichever is greater.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Use only specified products of the following manufacturers of grid systems and perimeter reveal.

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. USG USG Interiors, Inc. 101 S. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606; (312) 321-4000


B. Use only specified products of the following manufactures of ceiling pads.

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. USG USG Interiors, Inc. 101 S. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606; (312) 321-4000

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Suspension systems shall be intermediate duty grid with all exposed surfaces having a painted finish in color to be selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1. Acceptable products for 15/16” standard grid: MANUFACTURER NON-RATED SYSTEM

a. USG “DX System”

B. Hanger wire for grid system shall be minimum of No. 12 gauge galvanized soft annealed, mild steel wire.

C. Wall angle: Perimeter edge, 7/8” wall angle molding shape compatible with grid system specified above at areas indicated.

D. Acoustical panels shall conform to Federal Specifications SS-S-118a, Type III, Class 25 and shall meet the requirements of sound absorption described in the Acoustical Association Bulletin.

E. Products: Refer to drawing schedule and reflected ceiling plan for location of products.

1. Standard vinyl faced lay-in panels as indicated shall be:

a. Product: USG – Climaplus, 3270. b. Composition: Mineral fiberboard. c. Finish: Factory applied vinyl-faced membrane. d. Size: 24 inches by 48 inches by 1/2 inch thick. e. Profile: Square edge.

2. Standard vinyl faced lay-in panels as indicated shall be:

a. Product: USG – Climaplus, 3260. b. Composition: Mineral fiberboard. c. Finish: Factory applied vinyl-faced membrane. d. Size: 24 inches by 24 inches by 1/2 inch thick. e. Profile: Square edge.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces to receive suspended acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate work with subcontractors to assure that light fixture layouts and all grills are located in accordance with drawings.

B. Suspension system shall be supported by 12 gauge hanger wires, nominally 48 inches on center.

1. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at light fixtures, 6 inches from vertical surface.

2. Wrap wire a minimum of 3 times horizontally, turning ends upward.

C. Main runners shall be spaced as required for panel size and shall be level and square to adjacent walls.

1. Space cross runners as required by panel size. 2. All joints shall meet perfectly.

D. Install edge perimeter shadow line wall moulding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces; miter corners where wall mouldings intersect.

E. Acoustical units shall be installed to bear all around on suspension members; width of border units shall generally be a minimum of one-half unit dimension.

F. Joints in acoustical units around pipes, ducts, conduit, grilles, fixtures and hangers shall be cut fit neatly and where necessary.

1. Provide a plated escutcheon cover to trim out unit.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled or discolored tile, touch-up scratches, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.

B. Tile that is defective or improperly installed shall be replaced.

C. Remove all excess materials and debris from site and dispose of properly; leave area clean.

1. Deliver extra acoustical lay-in panels packaged with protective covering to AAFES Store Manager for storage.

2. Identify extra materials with appropriate labels identifying acoustical panel type.

D. Protect installation from damage until acceptance by Contracting Officer.

END 09510.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09900 – PAINTING

PAINTING 09900-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. General Contractor provide:

a. Preparation, painting and finishing existing drive-thru pipe bollards. b. Preparation, painting and finishing, including detergent power washing and

rinsing, metal treatments and application of new exterior finish system on existing roof panels and sheet metal trim.

c. Preparation, painting and finishing of interior surfaces of existing hollow metal doors and frames.

d. Preparation, painting and finishing of interior gypsum drywall walls and soffits. e. Preparation, staining and finishing of interior wood trim. f. Preparation and touch-up of factory finished items. g. Restriping of existing asphalt and new concrete patch areas at drive-thru

equipment island. h. Protection of existing and new construction. i. Clean up.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork. 5. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 6. Section 08305 – Access Doors. 7. Division 09 – Finishes.


A. Included on label of containers:

1. Manufacturer’s name and stock numbers. 2. Type of paint. 3. Color. 4. Label analysis.

B. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Provide primers, under coatings and finish paint products from one manufacturer for areas specified.

2. Provide stain and stain products produced by one manufacturer. 3. Where field touch-up is required on factory finishes, and is acceptable to the

Contracting Officer, provide touch-up materials matching those used by the manufacturer of the product needing touch-up work.

C. Fungus Control: Organic coating shall show no fungus growth when tested as specified in Federal Test Method Standard No. 141, Method 6271.1.

PAINTING 09900-2

D. Field Quality Control: Request review of first item of each color required for color, texture and workmanship.

E. Work shall be done by skilled craftsmen; all paints shall be smoothly and evenly spread on or flowed on and shall be free from runs, sags, crawls, holidays or other defects.

1. All painting shall be done under favorable weather conditions, or conditions suitable for production of good, durable work.

2. No succeeding coats shall be applied until preceding coat is thoroughly dry. 3. No paint is to be applied to a metal surface in temperatures below 50 degrees F.

F. Painter shall receive surfaces to be painted or otherwise treated by him, free from foreign matter such as concrete, plaster and grease caused by other crafts and shall only be required to do a nominal amount of sandpapering and cleaning before proceeding with his work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01340:

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical information, label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use.

1. List each material and cross reference the specific coating and finish system and application.

2. Identify each material by the manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification.

C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.

1. Define each separate coat. 2. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. 3. Resubmit until required sheen, color and texture are achieved. 4. Submit samples on the following substrates for Contracting Officer’s review of

color and texture:

a. Painted Gypsum Board: Provide 12” x 12” samples of each color and material on hardboard.

b. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide 4” x 8” samples of natural and stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces.

c. Ferrous Metal: Provide 4” x 4” samples of sheet metal and 4” x 8” samples of solid metal for each color and finish.


A. Deliver and store materials in accord with Section 01620.

B. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions.

PAINTING 09900-3

7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number.

C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) and maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. 2. Keep storage area neat and orderly. 3. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 4. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected

from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.

B. Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other crafts and surfaces not being painted concurrently or not to be painted.

C. Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated.

D. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

E. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE PAINT MANUFACTURERS

A. Use only the specified products of the following manufactures:

MANUFACTURER CODE

1. Benjamin Moore BEN 2. Mohawk MOH

B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be from a single manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Paint Materials List:

1. Exterior Metal Primer:

a. BEN: Corotech 100% Solids Epoxy Pre-Primer V155.

2. Exterior Metal Finish:

a. BEN: Corotech Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane V510 Semi-Gloss.

3. Exterior EIFS Primer:

PAINTING 09900-4

a. BEN: Fresh Start Multi-Purpose Primer.

4. Exterior EIFS Finish:

a. BEN: Ultra Spec Exterior Flat Finish.

5. Interior Metal Primer:

a. BEN: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer.

6. Interior Metal Finish:

a. BEN: Corotech Acrylic DTM Enamel Semi-Gloss.

7. Interior Wood Stain:

a. MOH: Wiping Wood Stain.

8. Interior Wood Finish:

a. MOH: Waterborne Conversion Varnish Satin.

9. Gypsum Board Ceiling Primer:

a. BEN: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer.

10. Gypsum Board Ceiling Finish:

a. BEN: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Flat.

11. Gypsum Board Wall Primer:

a. BEN: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer.

12. Gypsum Board Wall Finish:

a. BEN: Ultra Spec 500 Latex Eg-Shel.

B. Pavement Marking:

1. MDOT Traffic Paint. 2. Provide glass bead reflectors conforming to FS-TT-B, Type I, Gradation A. 3. Color as indicated.

2.3 COLORS, MIXING AND TINTING

A. Colors shall be as indicated on drawings.

B. Tint primer per manufacturer's recommendation for best topcoat color development.

C. Paints and enamels shall be stored tinted and mixed.

1. Manufacturer shall incorporate fungicidal agent into paint. 2. No materials are to be reduced or changed except as specified by manufacturer.

D. Job mixing and job tinting will not be permitted.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through preparatory work.

PAINTING 09900-5

B. Call adverse conditions to attention of Contracting Officer for direction on responsibility for rectifying conditions.

C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable.

3.2 PREPARATION OF STANDARD SURFACES

A. All filling of cracks, open joints and other defects shall be done after primer or first coat is

dry and before second coat is applied.

1. Putty is to be spackling or a similar non-shrinking compound.

B. Underwriters or Factory Mutual rated door and frame labels:

1. Do not remove factory applied label ratings from doors or frames. 2. Mask labels to protect legibility.

C. All metal surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned with benzine or mineral spirits before any paint is applied.

D. Rust on metal surfaces shall be removed by sanding, wire brushing, or application of navel jelly, as appropriate for surface and area being cleaned and shall be left clean and ready to receive finish coat.

E. Featheredge sand paint around chipped areas by grinding or sanding prior to touch-up of shop primer coats so following coats will blend in smoothly without photographing.

F. Existing Surfaces:

1. Existing work to be repainted shall be sanded and put in condition to provide good adhesion to receive specified finish.

2. Surface shall be free of any foreign material that will adversely affect adhesion or appearance of applied finish before finish is applied.

G. Consult manufacturers of factory primed or finished items for written instructions on touch-up of primer or finish where touch-up of items is acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

3.3 SPECIAL PREPARATION FOR EXISTING METAL WALL AND ROOF PANEL

A. Test and clean substrate in accordance with painting system manufacturer’s recommendations and the following national standards:

1. ASTM D 3359 Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 2. ASTM D 4285-83 (1988) Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air. 3. ASTM D 4541-85 (1989) Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion

Testers. 4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Surface Preparation Standards.

B. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during painting system application.

C. Layout area on surface to be used as mock-up on a weathered sample of galvalume sheet metal of similar design and condition to actual metal roof.

1. Sample sheet metal shall be approximately 4’-0” high x 3’-0” wide and be representative of all metal roof surface conditions as follows:

PAINTING 09900-6

a. Sample shall have representative conditions expected to be encountered on remainder of building such as dirt, grease/oil, rust, mill scale and loose paint.

b. Sample shall be soiled sufficiently to establish methods required for complete surface preparation using manufacturer’s recommended products.

2. Sample designated for mock-up purposes shall be maintained and used as a basis for approval of acceptable work on other exterior wall and roof surfaces.

D. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top of roof to bottom and from one end of the elevation to the other.

E. Use only those cleaning methods indicated or recommended and approved by painting system manufacturer.

F. Perform cleaning in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces and which produces an even effect without streaking or damage to existing metal substrate or surrounding surfaces.

G. Pre-wet surfaces with water applied by low-pressure spray and apply detergent cleaner to metal surfaces, using brush, in compliance with paint manufacturer’s written recommendations and in compliance with SSPC Specification SP-1.

1. Let detergent remain on surface for period as recommended in manufacturer’s instructions and rinse detergent residue and soil by working upwards from bottom to top of each treated area.

2. Rinse by applying low-pressure spray (200-400 psi) to metal surfaces to comply with specified requirements for location, purpose, water temperature, pressure, volume and equipment.

a. Hold spray nozzle not less than 6 inches from surface of metal. b. Apply water from side to side in overlapping bands to produce uniform

coverage and an even effect.

H. Repeat cleaning procedures above where required to produce satisfactory results acceptable to painting system manufacturer and Contracting Officer or designated representative.

I. All surfaces to be painted shall then be cleaned with steam benzine, mineral spirits or other solvents in compliance with SSPC Specification SP-1 before any primer is applied.

1. In areas where extensive scaling, rust or loose paint is present, blast clean in compliance with SSPC Specification SP-6 until at least two-thirds of the surface area is free of all visible residues.

J. Substrate shall be sound, clean, dry and free of all dust, dirt, oils, grease, laitance, efflorescence, mildew, fungus, biological residues, chemical contaminants, stains and previous coatings that could prevent good adhesion or that could bleed through new paint finishes.

3.4 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Cleaning:

1. Sweep surface with power broom supplemented by hand brooms to remove loose material and dirt.

2. Do not begin marking asphalt concrete pavement until acceptable to Contracting Officer.

PAINTING 09900-7

B. Apply paint with mechanical equipment:

1. Provide uniform straight edges. 2. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommended rates.

3.5 APPLICATION

A. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitation recommended by paint manufacturer.

B. Test surface with a moisture meter.

C. Apply paint coatings with suitable brushes, rollers, or airless spray equipment.

D. Rate of application shall not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendation for surface involved and shall be not less than wet mil thickness indicated in 3.5 for various products and surfaces.

E. Apply stain by brush only.

F. Keep brushes, rollers and equipment clean, dry and free from contaminants and suitable for finish required.

G. Drying time between succeeding coats shall be as recommended by manufacturer of coating.

H. Slightly vary color between succeeding coats.

1. Sand and dust as required between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 3 feet.

2. No runs, blisters, glue spots, checking, crazing or cracking will be allowed.

I. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, roller fibers, streaks, runs, laps or pile up of paints, and skipped or missed areas.

J. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping.

K. Refinish entire wall where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable.

L. Shop coat and prime coat touch-up on metal shall be done while metal surface is bright and clean.

M. Mouldings or ornaments that are painted shall be left clean and true to details with no undue amount of paint in corners and depressions.

N. Final coat of interior finish shall not be applied until all other crafts are finished with their work, their materials and debris removed and premises turned over in broom clean condition.

O. Existing surfaces that are being painted or refinished shall be refinished in entirety; walls from floor to ceiling and corner to corner.

3.6 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Exterior metal surfaces that have been previously painted shall receive preparatory cleaning, sanding and surfaces painted as follows:

PAINTING 09900-8

1. Primer: 1 coat of exterior metal primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of exterior metal finish or more as required to achieve

desired color.

B. Exterior Ferrous Metals (Including but not limited to Factory Primed Hollow Metal, Metal Fabrications and Lintel Angles):

1. Primer: 1 coat of exterior metal primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of exterior metal finish or more as required to achieve

desired color.

C. Interior metal surfaces that have been previously painted shall receive preparatory cleaning, sanding and surfaces painted as follows:

1. Primer: 1 coat of interior metal primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of interior metal finish or more as required to achieve

desired color.

D. Interior metal surfaces that have received a shop coat of metal protective primer paint shall receive preparatory cleaning and surfaces painted as follows:


desired color.

E. Miscellaneous interior metal surfaces such as exposed ducts, conduit, hangers, etc., shall receive preparatory cleaning and surfaces painted as follows:


desired color.

a. Finish in same color as surface on which it is mounted.

F. Miscellaneous Woodwork: Stained and varnish rubbed transparent finish.

1. Stain: 1 coat of interior wood stain. 2. Finish: 2 coats of interior wood finish in gloss and 1 coat of interior wood finish in

satin.

G. Gypsum drywall ceilings:

1. Primer: 1 coat of gypsum board ceiling primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of gypsum board ceiling finish or more as required to

achieve desired color.

H. Interior gypsum board to be painted shall receive preparatory treatment and surfaces finished as follows:

1. Primer: 1 coat of gypsum board wall primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of gypsum board wall finish or more as required to

achieve desired color.

3.7 PAINT THICKNESS

A. Wet thicknesses for various products shall be as recommended by paint manufacturer or as follows, whichever is greater:

1. Metal Primer – 2.3 mils. 2. Metal Finish – 3.5 mils. 3. Gypsum Primer – 1.6 mils. 4. Gypsum Finish – 2.1 mils.

PAINTING 09900-9

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades and surfaces not being painted.

B. Protect completed work from damage by other trades.

3.9 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP

A. At conclusion of work, remove all empty containers, rags, drop clothes, excess materials and debris from project site.

B. Remove drops, splatters and runs from surfaces not scheduled to receive paint.

C. Touch up or repaint any skips, holidays, mars or thin spots.

END 09900.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09986 – FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS 09986-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. General Contractor provide:

a. Fiberglass reinforced panels. b. Edge and joint mouldings and accessories. c. Adhesives. d. Panel joint sealants. e. Fasteners.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 4. Section 08305 – Access Doors. 5. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 6. Section 09300 – Tile. 7. Section 09900 – Painting. 8. Section 10265 – Wall Surface Protection Systems. 9. Division 11 – Equipment. 10. Division 15 – Mechanical. 11. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Corner guards for wall protection to replace panel manufacturer’s standard corner trim are specified in Section 10265, Wall Surface Protection Systems.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacturing products for system indicated and with at least 5 years successful experience in applications similar to that required for this project.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for each material and component part, including data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.

B. Samples: Submit full range of color samples for each type of panel, trim and accessory required.

1. Provide 3” square samples of sheet materials and 3” lengths of trim members for color verification after selections have been made.


C. Certificate of Compliance: Submit manufacturer’s certification that all materials furnished for project comply with requirements specified herein.


A. Panels and accessories shall be sorted so as not to scratch or damage the surface.

B. Panels shall be stored inside on a flat dry surface.

C. Panels shall be preconditioned for at least 24 hours in temperature and humidity conditions of areas of installation.

2. PRODUCT

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Use products as manufactured by Marlite, 202 Hager Street, Dover, OH 44622, (330) 343-6621.

B. Product: Fiberglass Reinforced Panels (FRP) shall be Marlite FRP, Pebble Texture, Class “I/A” decorative wall panels as indicated, color number P100, “White”.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. FRP Technical Data:

1. Flexural Strength: 14 x 103 psi per ASTM D790. 2. Tensile Strength: 7 x 103 psi per ASTM D638. 3. Barcol Hardness: 45 per ASTM D2583. 4. Izod Impact: 4.0 ft-lb/in2 per ASTM D256. 5. Water Absorption: 0.16% (24 hrs at 77° F.)/0.16% (24 hrs at 25° F.) per ASTM

D570. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E84.

a. Flame spread < 25. b. Smoke developed < 450.

B. FRP Panel Size:

1. Nominal Thickness: 0.09” 2. Nominal Weight: 0.73 lb/ft2 3. Width: 4’-0” 4. Height: 10’-0” to eliminate horizontal joints between floor and ceiling. 5. Grid Pattern: None. 6. Finish: Clear "Sani-Coat" sealer.

C. Components: Provide adhesives, sealants, moldings, fasteners and other components for complete system as made by manufacturer of panel product or recommended in writing by such manufacturer as best suited for purpose intended.

1. Moldings: Vinyl moldings, colored to match panels, as recommended by manufacturer for each particular condition.

2. Sealant: Super Silicone Adhesive, SS-W (white) for white panels, SS-C (clear) for colored panels.

3. Adhesive: Moisture-retardant Type I material designed for securement of FRP panels to gypsum drywall and plywood backing panels.


3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces to receive liner panels for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Tape and feather joints between gypsum drywall and cementitious backer board to provide a smooth transition between dissimilar materials that will not telegraph through face of finish FRP.

C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply fully with recommendations of manufacturer and final shop drawings.

B. Conform to USDA Requirements.

C. Install units in configurations as shown and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Keep vertical lines straight and plumb. 2. Provide all grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim,

and accessories for complete installation.

D. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, secure panels with adhesive directly to gypsum drywall backer panels.

1. Comply with panel manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Provide supplemental mechanical fasteners only if required by conditions, and as

indicated on final shop drawings.

E. Provide appropriate moldings at all panel joints:

1. Internal corners, at intersections with other construction, elsewhere as required. 2. Cut face of moldings to fit at top of new base to ensure that base seals against

face of panel. 3. Exterior corners shall receive corner guards as specified in Section 10265, Wall

Surface Protection Systems.

F. Seal panels at moldings full length, at edges of cutouts for piping and the like, at tops and bottoms of panels, and at all other intersections with other construction.

G. Coordinate installation with that of trades providing studs and other concealed supports.

H. Locate all fasteners only over centers of concealed supports, including properly located and installed nailers or support plates between studs where required.

3.3 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT, INSTRUCTIONS

A. Verify that accessories required for each unit are properly installed.

B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Provide instructions to AAFES maintenance staff on care of panel surfaces.

END 09986.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10265 – WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Surface mounted stainless steel corner guards. b. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 4. Section 09300 – Tile. 5. Section 09900 – Painting. 6. Section 09986 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels (FRP).


A. References:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) 5. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 6. International Building Code (IBC)

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide UL listed corner guards conforming with NFPA Class A fire rating.

1. Surface building characteristics, as determined by UL-723:

a. Flame spread of 10. b. Smoke development of 350-450.

B. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Provide corner guards that show resistance to stain when tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D-543.

C. Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applications and designations of finishes.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accord with 01340.

B. Product data:


1. Manufacturer’s printed product literature and data. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide Shop Drawings indicating location for each corner guard. 2. Provide mounting details with appropriate fasteners for each product and substrate

indicated.

D. Samples:

1. Provide samples for verification purposes of corner guard covers, 8 inches long x full profile of unit.


A. Make deliveries and store in accordance with requirements of Sections 01600 and 01620.

B. Store so that corner guards are not bent or damaged.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Surface mounted stainless steel corner guards as manufactured by Construction Specialties/Acrovyn, 6696 State Route 405, Muncy, PA 17756, (800) 233-8493:

1. B.O.H.:

a. Model: CO-8 with 2" legs. b. Finish: #4 satin finish. c. Corner guard shall be one continuous piece without seams or joints.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Corner guards shall be of height indicated and if not indicated measurement shall be from the top of base to bottom of ceiling finish.

B. Surface Mounted Corner Guards:

1. At areas where walls are finished with sanitary panels provide full height corner guards as specified herein in lieu of panel manufacturer’s outside trim:

a. At outside corners run from top of base to bottom of ceiling wall angle. b. At door openings run from top of base to bottom of header/soffit.

2. At outside corner transitions between dissimilar materials provide full height corner guards from top of base to bottom of ceiling wall angle.

3. Corner guards shall be continuous in length, no joints will be accepted. 4. Horizontal corner guards shall be full length of wall.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive corner guards for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.


B. Commence installation when all checks have been made.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate corner guard as indicated, using mounting methods as indicated on reviewed/approved shop drawings for the substrate and in compliance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. Install corner guards plumb with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

3.3 CLEAN UP

A. Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition.

B. Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or replace any defective items with new, acceptable materials.

C. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

END 10265.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10440 – SPECIALTY SIGNS

SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Installation of AAFES furnished Popeye's monument sign panels in existing field verified sign frame.

b. Installation of AAFES furnished Popeye's site directional signs on existing concrete site directional sign bases.

c. Installation of AAFES furnished Popeye's drive-thru clearance bar, preview board, canopy, OCU, and menu board on new concrete footing/foundations.

d. Installation of AAFES furnished building branding signage indicated. e. Installation of AAFES furnished interior electronic branding identification

signage and menu boards. f. Existing conduit modifications, rough-ins and final connections of AAFES

furnished signage. g. Accessories for installing signage.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 6. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Various sign products are indicated to be furnished by AAFES and installed by Contractor with wiring, either existing to be reused or new, and final connections by Contractor.

1. This Section establishes a quality standard for installation of signage furnished by AAFES to the same degree as for signage furnished under this Section.

2. Contractor shall coordinate, receive, store and install AAFES furnished signage products with identical standards as those set forth below for signage furnished by Contractor.


A. Uniformity of Manufacturer: For each sign form and graphic image process indicated furnish products of a single manufacturer.

B. Where manufacturers or supplier/installers are specified, equal manufacturers, suppliers and installers will be considered prior to Solicitation and subject to compliance with the provisions set forth in Section 01030, Substitutions & Product Options.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of sign required.


B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of specialty signs.

1. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale details of sign wording and lettering layout.

2. Show anchorages and accessory items. 3. Furnish location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent

construction.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each sign form and material showing finishes, colors, surface textures and qualities of manufacturer and design of each sign component including custom and stock graphics.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are non-corrosive to either the sign material or the mounting surface.

B. Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.

1. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.2 FINISHES

A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that require selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Contracting Officer or designated representative from the manufacturer's standards.

B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications recommendations.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate sign units and accessories indicated or scheduled, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Exterior Monument Site Sign Panels: Install new field verified AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed plastic monument site signage panels as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Confirm dimensions of existing Church's sign panels and provide to sign panel manufacturer for fabrication on new Popeye's sign panels for generation of Shop Drawings.

2. Install newly fabricated panels in strict accordance with printed installation instructions prior to commencement of monument sign panel installation.

3. Secure new monument sign panels in existing housing, level and plumb as indicated with panels free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

4. Complete signage panel installation and protect until acceptance by the Contracting Officer.


C. Popeye's Site Directional Signage: Install new AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Popeye's site directional signage shall be erected as indicated and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and written installation instructions.

1. Confirm rough-in requirements with Shop Drawings and other printed installation instructions prior to commencement of site directional sign installation.

a. Modify conduits at original Church's concrete site directional sign bases as indicated to facilitate installation of new Popeye's site directional sign units.

b. Install electrical rough-ins and wiring circuits and systems as indicated and in accordance with sign manufacturer furnished by Shop Drawings.

c. Anchor site directional signage units to existing foundation in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions using new drill-in epoxy embedded stainless steel anchor bolts.

2. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect and make final hard wired connections to site directional signage.

3. Set all units level and plumb as indicated, free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

4. Make final electrical connections and testing, complete site directional sign installations and protect until acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

D. Popeye's Drive-through Pre-sell Board, Canopy and OCU and Menu Board signage: Install new AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Popeye's drive-through equipment and signage as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and written installation instructions.

1. Confirm rough-in requirements with Shop Drawings and other printed installation instructions prior to commencement of monument sign installation.

a. Modify existing conduits and existing sensor loop wiring to facilitate connections to new units.

b. Install electrical rough-ins, wiring circuits and systems as indicated by Shop Drawings.

c. Anchor clearance sign, preview board, canopy, OCU and menu board units to new cast-in-place concrete foundation in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

2. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect and make final hard wired connections to new drive-thru equipment and signage.

3. Set all units level and plumb as indicated, free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

4. Make final electrical connections and testing, complete equipment and drive-up system unit installations and protect until acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

E. Popeye's Exterior Building Signage: Install AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed exterior building wall signage as indicated and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Confirm sizes and rough-in requirements with Shop Drawings and other printed installation instructions prior to commencement of exterior building sign installation.

2. Install electrical rough-ins, wiring circuits and systems as indicated by Shop Drawings for wall mounted Popeye's signage and/or logos.

3. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, provide rough-ins and make final hard wired connections to signage and/or remote power supply units where required.

a. Most electronic AAFES signs require installation of remote power supplies (transformers) in accessible locations and routing of wiring between sign and power supply units.


b. Due to limitations in distance between sign and power supply units, location of units shall be coordinated prior to installation.

c. Contractor shall make all provisions for routing wiring from sign to power supply units and provide line voltage power to power supply units as part of their Contract.

1.) Provide 12" x 12" access panel(s) wherever power supply units must be located above an inaccessible ceiling space such as gypsum drywall.

2.) Provide J-box for mounting power supply unit(s) at all locations, whether accessible or inaccessible conditions are encountered.

3.) Provide 3/4" conduit from back of sign panel or individual letters to J-box for routing wiring at all locations, whether accessible or inaccessible conditions are encountered for AAFES routing of wiring between.

4.) Provide line voltage circuit to J-box at each location requiring a power supply unit and make final connections to power supply.

d. Mount signs to exterior wall construction per Shop Drawing requirements and manufacturer’s printed instructions.

4. Wall mounted exterior building sign units shall be set level, plumb and at heights indicated, with sign bodies and surfaces free from distortion, warp or other defects in appearance.

5. Make final electrical connections and testing, complete signage installation and protect until acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

F. Popeye's Interior Branding Identification Sign and Menu Boards: Mount units using standard method recommended by manufacturer for header installation indicated.

1. Confirm sizes and rough-in requirements with Shop Drawings and other printed installation instructions prior to commencement of interior building sign and menu board installation.

2. Install electrical rough-ins, wiring circuits and systems as indicated by Shop Drawings for header mounted Popeye's signage and menu boards.

3. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, provide rough-ins and make final hard wired connections to signage and/or remote power supply units where required following similar provisions for access to remote power supply units set forth for exterior building signs.

4. Building sign and menu board units shall be set level, plumb and at heights indicated, with surfaces free from distortion, warp or other defects in appearance.

5. Make final electrical connections and testing, complete signage and menu board installations and protect until acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Protect units from damage until acceptance by Contracting Officer.

END 10440.

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11400 – FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES:

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor Provide:

a. All stainless steel wall panels and concelaed fasteners indicated. b. Complete installation of food service equipment indicated to be Contractor

Furnished and Contractor Installed (CF/CI). c. Rough-in work for ALL food service equipment. d. Final connections between rough-ins and equipment for ALL hard-piped and

hard-wired food service equipment. e. Installation of all food service equipment indicated to be AAFES Furnished

and Contractor Installed as scheduled (AF/CI). f. Installation of all food service equipment indicated to be Vendor Furnished

and Contractor Installed as scheduled (VF/CI). g. Initial equipment start-up and operational testing for ALL food service

equipment.

2. Contractor provide all related equipment, accessories and labor including:

a. Plumbing work and connections to equipment:

1.) Final hard-piped connections to all equipment 2.) Fittings that are not an integral part of equipment. 3.) Drains. 4.) Natural gas lines, control valves and fittings. 5.) Water and waste lines. 6.) Refrigerant lines. 7.) Coodination of work with fire suppression system. 8.) All other work necessary to make equipment operational in

preparation for start-up.

b. Electrical work and connections to equipment:

1.) Final hard-wired connections to all equipment. 2.) Overload protection requirements. 3.) Wiring to starters. 4.) Panelboard rough-in and wiring for refrigerators and freezers. 5.) Lighting fixtures for walk-in Stock and Drive-up box. 6.) All conduit, wiring, junction boxes 7.) Coordination of fire suppression system with other work. 8.) All other work necessary to make equipment operational in

preparation for start-up.

1.2 DESCRIPTION:

A. Popeye's Equipment required for this work is indicated on the Drawings and includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Provide all rough-ins for Popeye's equipment. 2. Provide labor, materials and services necessary to complete Popeye's equipment

installation.


3. Provide and install all Popeye's fixtures, equipment and appliances indicated CF/CI.

4. Provide installation of all Popeye's equipment and appliances indicated AF/CI or VF/CI.

5. Provide installation of all existing fixtures and equipment salvaged for reuse in new construciton including rough-in work and hard piped connections.

6. Provide final hard piped and hard wired connections to all Popeye's equipment. 7. Provide initial start-up and operation testing of all Popeye's equipment in

preparation for final start-up, demonstration and employee training by AAFES.

1.3 Related Work:


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 6. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 7. Division 9 – Finsihes. 8. Division 15 – Mechanical. 9. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, the following standards are applicable to the manufacture, fabrication, delivery and installation of equipment and other work covered in this section.

1. NSF Standards: Comply with National Sanitation Foundation standards and criteria, and provide NSF "Seal of Approval" on each manufactured item and on major items of custom-fabricated work.

2. U.L. Standards: For electrical components and assemblies, provide either U.L. labeled products or where no labeling service is available, "recognized markings" to indicate listing in the U.L. Recognized Component Index.

B. Food Service Equipment: All cooking equipment, food processing machinery intended for use here will be provided per specified manufacture and will bear applicable seals of approval as outlined above.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:

A. AAFES or their Vendors will furnish Shop Drawings of the various items of Popeye's equipment furnished by them to be installed in the Project.

B. Contractor Provided Shop Drawings: Prior to commencement of installation the Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings indicating the following:

1. Floor plan(s) showing detailed dimensions for utility lines and equipment to a scale of ½-inch equals 1'-0".

a. These dimensions shall be taken from finished walls and columns and include all electrical and plumbing floor "stub-up", "out of wall" and "branch to connection (BTC)" notations for use in the field.


2. Floor plans, showing detailed dimensions for elevated bases, wall openings, locations of partitions and wall reinforcing as related to equipment supplied under this Section, to a scale of ½-inch equals 1'-0".

3. Dimensioned Equipment Construction Drawings, indicating reinforcement, anchorage and other work required for completion and installation of equipment under this Section to a scale of 1-inch equals 1'-0".

4. Manufacturer's standard catalog cut sheets shall be submitted in a covered, bound booklet preceded by a corresponding cover sheet.

a. Each cover sheet shall include the item number, model number, manufacturer's name, required utilities, and all options and accessories specified.

b. Three (3) booklets shall be submitted for review.

5. Schedule of Equipment and Connections: A schedule similar to that shown on Drawings including all remarks and general notes shall be submitted as part of the electrical rough-in, mechanical rough-in, HVAC and base drawings.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING:

A. Protection:

1. Protect metal finishes from damage during storage, handling, installation and construction of other work in the same spaces.

2. Wrap and crate each item of equipment as needed for protection from damage.

B. Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with self-adhesive protective paper, of a type recommended by the metal manufacturer, and do not remove until work is installed and ready for cleaning and start-up.

C. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Contracting Officer and at no additional cost to AAFES.

1.7 QUALIFICATION:

A. To be considered eligible to work on this project, the Sub-Contractor for the work of this Section of the Specifications must:

1. Be a fully recognized Food Service Equipment Sub-Contractor currently engaged in the installation of standard manufactured and custom fabricated commercial Food Service Equipment for a period of five (5) years prior to submitting proposal.

2. Have successfully completed similar projects of the same Food Service Equipment dollar value and design scope within the last two (2) years.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS:

A. Stainless steel: AISI type 302/304, hardest workable temper, No. 4 directional polish.

B. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 526, except ASTM A 527 for extensive forming; ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment. Where painted finish is indicated, provide mill phosphatized treatment in lieu of chemical treatment.

C. Steel sheet: ASTM A 569 hot-rolled carbon steel.

D. Galvanized steel pipe: ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 120, welded or seamless, schedule 40, galvanized.


E. Steel structural members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel unless stainless steel is indicated.

F. Galvanized finish: ASTM A 123 hot-dipped zinc coating, applied after fabrication.

G. Aluminum: ASTM B209/B221 sheet, plate and extrusions (as indicated); alloy, temper and finish as determined by manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40 mill natural anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated.

2.2 FABRICATED PRODUCTS:

A. Wall Panels: All wall panels indicated shall be 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel finished with a 1/2" edge on exposed sides and shall be turned back to form 1/2" channel shape.

1. Edges shall be free from burrs and any excess material. 2. Corners shall be rounded. 3. Panels shall be cross-broke where required to prevent oil canning . 4. Provide concealed clips for attachment to wall surfaces and seal edges to wall

surface.

B. Fasenting: No loose or visible fasteners such as face screws or buttons will be acceptable.

3. EXECUTION:

3.1 GENERAL

A. Equipment listed under "Schedules” of equipment shall match in every respect all mechanical and electrical requirements indicated.

B. The installation of all Popeye's equipment shall be performed in strict accordance with the specifications and the approved printed directions of the Manufacturer.

C. Dimensions given herein are approximate only, and in all cases where equipment is intended to occupy fixed locations and spaces, the physical conditions of the building are to control the absolute sizes.

D. All penetrations in any work table or serving counter tops required to run mechanical services to any equipment items located on same shall be fitted with rubber grommets to protect these service lines.

E. Contractor to coordinate with all applicable trades.

3.2 SURFACE CONDITIONS:

A. Inspection: Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Contracting Officer. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such

discrepancies have been fully resolved.


3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. The installation of all Popeye's equipment shall be performed under the supervision of an approved representative of the kitchen equipment sub-contractor and in strict accordance with the specifications and the approved printed directions of the manufacturer.

B. Cutting and Patching of Construction: Lay out the work in advance to prevent damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment.

C. Setting and Connecting:

1. Install equipment plumb and level. 2. Except for mobile and adjustable-leg equipment, securely anchor and attach items

and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless steel bolts. 3. Seal around equipment flashing and flanges, at walls, floor, and ceiling in

accordance with security standards listed in Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealers.

4. Contact fillers shall be continuous, without opening.

D. Jointing and Anchoring:

1. Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, leveled and adjusted to correct height.

2. Anchor to supporting surfaces where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation.

3. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. 4. Adjust surfaces to a level tolerance of 1/16" (maximum offset and plus-or-minus on

dimension and maximum variation of 2'-0" run from level or indicated slope). 5. Complete field assembly joints in the field (joints which cannot be completed in the

shop) by welding, grinding and polishing. 6. Treat enclosed spaces (inaccessible after equipment installation) by covering

horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4 oz. per square foot. 7. Install closure plates and strips where required with joints coordinated with units of

equipment. 8. Install sealants and gaskets around all penetrations to make joints air-tight, water-

proof, vermin-proof and sanitary for cleaning purposes.

a. In general, make sealed joints not less than 1/8" wide and stuff with backer rods to shape sealant bead properly at 1/4" depth.

b. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave with edges flush with faces of materials at joint.

c. At internal corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove, of not less than 3/8" joint width; metal closure strips for wider joints, with sealant application on each side of strip.

d. Anchor gaskets mechanically or with adhesives to prevent displacement.

E. Cleaning and Adjusting; Test and adjust equipment for proper operation.

1. Test rotating components and motors for proper rotation. 2. Lubricate moving parts if suggested by manufacturer's literature. 3. Prior to acceptance of the project, clean and sanitize equipment both inside and

outside.

3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK:


A. For the period during which other trades shall be on or near equipment and/or work covered by this Contract, this contractor shall cover and protect the exposed surfaces of such equipment.

1. Preclude injury to the finish by absorption of oil, grease, chemicals, etc., contact from tools and machinery, and from all other causes which may be incidental to operation performed in the area.

2. Should Contractor fail to protect his work in the specified manner, he shall absorb all expenses for such work.

3.5 CLEANING:

A. When all the work covered by this Contract, together with the work of other trades has been completed, the Contractor shall clean each and every item of equipment so that all traces of grease, stains, protective coatings, abrasive dust, markings, scratches, and other foreign matter are completely removed.

B. The cleaning process shall be one which shall eliminate any further cleaning on the part of AFFES with the exception of that which would ordinarily be undertaken daily to maintain accepted standards of sanitation and appearance.

3.6 TESTING:

A. Tests of all equipment shall be performed in the presence of the authorized representative of AAFES.

B. All defects disclosed by the tests shall be eliminated to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and the corrected areas retested.

C. Provide necessary technicians, materials, and equipment required to conduct these tests.

D. A statement shall be furnished by the Contractor showing the schedule of testing, date, and results.

3.7 START-UP, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE:

A. Contractor shall make arrangements for a representative of AAFES to be present at a start-up and adjustment of the various systems unless other arrangements are made with AAFES for AF/CI equipment in accordance with provisions of Section 01650, Systems Start-up.

B. Provisions shall be made for properly trained authorized personnel to demonstrate to the operators the operation of all equipment including refrigeration systems.

1. Contractor shall provide a sign-up sheet for start-up training sessions signed by all in attendance.

a. Sheet shall be dated and include description/purpose of session. b. Following information shall be recorded:

1.) Name of each person in attendance and receiving training. 2.) Title or responsibility of each person in attendance. 3.) Name of organization each person is representing. 4.) Business telephone and e-mail contact information for each person in

attendance.


c. Submit copy of sign-up sheet in each set of bound manuals submitted at Project Close-out per requirements of Section 01700.

C. In addition, four (4) complete printed copies of the instructions shall be furnished to AAFES covering the operation and maintenance of all equipment.

1. A covered, bound booklet containing Manufacturer's current printed Installation/Operation/Maintenance/Parts manuals for all equipment hereinafter specified (including all accessories, components, faucets, etc.).

2. Each manual shall be clearly labeled with their respective item number designation as hereinafter specified.

3. Booklet shall include a Table of Contents listing each equipment item included within the booklet, complete with corresponding item number, quantity and description as hereinafter specified.

END 11400

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11800 – USED COOKING OIL EQUIPMENT

USED COOKING OIL EQUIPMENT 11800 -1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Double walled used cooking oil storage tank with secondary containment. b. Direct plumbed fryer manifolds and piping. (Popeye's) c. Control panel, branch circuiting and wiring connections to equipment. d. Through wall sleeve, piping and all accessory items necessary to install and

operate a used cooking oil collection system with exterior vendor collection capability.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Section 07920 – Building Joint Sealers. 5. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 6. Section 09900 – Painting. 7. Section 09986 – Fiberglass Reinforced Panels (FRP). 8. Section 11400 – Food Service Equipment. 9. Division 15 – Mechanical. 10. Division 16 – Electrical.


A. Manufacturer’s of used cooking oil collection systems equipment shall be currently UL approved for the design, manufacturing, assembly, distribution, marketing, sales, customer and technical support of systems and equipment for industrial and commercial applications.

B. Supplier of all equipment shall have successfully completed not less than five (5) similar projects of size, dollar value and design scope within the past three (3) years.

C. Installer of equipment shall be certified by the equipment manufacturer for installation, servicing and testing of equipment specified under this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data on each item of new equipment furnished:

a. Manufacturer’s standard cut-sheets indicating specific product, model number, accessories and other pertinent information.

b. Technical information sheets indicating physical size, delivery volumes and maximum capacity of system.

c. Control wiring, piping requirements and other pertinent requirements. d. Installation and operating instructions.


2. Shop drawings indicating the following:

a. Floor plan showing detailed dimension and sizes or requirements for discharge lines, electrical connections and equipment to a scale of ¼” = 1’-0”.

1.) Floor plan shall provide exact dimensional information existing walls for equipment and electrical rough-ins including stub-up, out-of-wall and branch to connection notations for use in field layout and construction.

2.) Floor plan shall be coordinated with other equipment, including high density dry storage shelving not furnished under this section to avoid conflicts with operation of all equipment.

3.) Indicate detailed dimensions for wall opening requirements related to equipment supplied under this Section.

b. Dimensioned equipment construction drawings indicating anchorage and other work required for completion and installation of equipment furnished under this Section.

c. Provide a detailed schedule of equipment, accessory items included, piping and electrical requirements including all remarks and general notes required for plumbing and electrical rough-ins.

3. Samples for selection purposes for standard finishes of products and accessories furnished under this Section where variations are available from manufacturers.


A. Deliver and store equipment items and accessories in accord with Section 01600 and Section 01620.

B. Protect equipment finishes from damage during shipping, receiving, storage, handling, installation and construction of other work.

1. Wrap and crate each item of equipment as necessary for protection from damage prior to installation.

C. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide a written warranty for defects in system, including oil pumps, related to manufacturing for a period of one (1) year after date of Substantial Completion.

B. Defects shall be repaired or faulty equipment replaced immediately during the warranty period after written notice at no cost to the Government.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Subject to compliance with the following provide complete double walled used cooking oil tank, collection and caddy transport system as manufactured by Frontline International, Inc., 95 16th Street SW, Barberton, OH 44203.

B. Double Walled Storage Tank:

1. Provide Frontline model number 4280-DCI-NA-DP-O double walled tank with secondary containment designed for exterior installation.


a. Storage tank shall be double walled and provide built into tank secondary containment of 115 percent of used cooking oil products in compliance with all environmental, fire protection and health laws, rules and regulations set forth by Federal, State and local enforcement agencies.

b. Tank shall be free standing and have heavy gauge aluminum exterior.

1.) Outside diameter: 42-inches. 2.) Height: 80-inches.

2. Tank storage capacity shall be 2,378 pounds/317 gallons. 3. Tank shall be equipped with an energy-saving immersion heater system and

remote located control panel with dual-level sensor, power loss indicator and other features to ensure safe operation.

C. Provide all other accessory items including, but not limited to:

1. Provide (2) Frontline model number 10030018 direct plumbed manifold kits, (1) for each fryer (Popeye's).

a. Plumbing shall be furnished as indicated on Plumbing Drawings for remote pumping of used cooking oil from fryers to storage tank.

b. Provide all piping, fittings and other accessories necessary to complete piping system.

2. Provide Frontline model INS inside installation kit designed to pipe from the storage tank through the exterior wall as indicated for used grease pick up by independent vendor.

a. Provide piping from tank to exterior nozzle location indicated in wall adjacent to the Receiving entrance door as indicated.

b. Provide accessory items including through-wall sleeve, recessed escutcheon plates at wall penetration, cam fitting designed to be compatible for service vehicle hose connection and cam dust cap to hide nozzle when not in use.

c. Provide all piping, fittings and other accessories necessary to complete piping system.

D. Provide sealants as specified in Section 07920 to seal pipe penetration and prevent infiltration of air to interior of building.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect work of all other trades to which equipment is related for correct dimensions, plumbness, level and preparation that would affect installation.

1. Verify that all such work is complete to the point where installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that any variation in items of construction that would hinder or prohibit continuous and proper installation of equipment of this Section has been rectified.

B. Inspect areas to receive unit for conditions that would affect installation and proper use of system and accessories.

C. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies in other work, notify Contracting Officer or designated representative immediately in writing.

D. Do not proceed with installation of equipment in areas of variation or discrepancy until all such problems have been fully resolved.


3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Pour concrete housekeeping pad as indicated on existing concrete site paving.

1. Score existing concrete site paving slab directly under unit to ensure positive mechanical bond between surface of existing slab and new housekeeping pad.

2. Clean existing surface thoroughly prior to pouring new pad and provide expansion material between existing building wall and pad.

3. Pour pad in accordance with requirements of Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete:

a. Provide 3/4" chamfered edges at horizontal to vertical transitions of exposed edges.

b. Slightly slope slab surface for positive drainage away from building wall and adjacent service entry door.

c. Provide light broom finish.

B. The installation and erection of the used cooking oil collection system equipment specified in this section, and Plumbing and Electrical rough-in work specified elsewhere, shall be performed under the supervision of an approved representative of the equipment manufacturer and in strict accordance with the written instructions of that manufacturer and the approve Shop Drawings.

C. Cutting and Patching of Construction: Lay out the work in advance to prevent damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment.

D. Setting and Connecting: Install equipment plumb and level.

1. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to housekeeping pad, walls, floors, or other surfaces with fasteners as recommended by equipment manufacturer for type of substrate.

2. Seal around equipment flanges at walls where necessary in accordance with Section 07920 to prevent liquids from penetrating substrates.

3. Contact fillers shall be continuous, without opening.

E. Service Lines and Equipment Connections: Provide piping connections and wiring systems to standards specified in plumbing and electrical specifications for piping and electrical work including equipment connections.

1. Install piping connections and discharge outlets at equipment, with air gaps, vacuum breakers and similar provisions to comply with governing regulations, but not less than compliance with ANSI Standards A.40.4 and A.40.6 and the National Plumbing Code.

2. Assemble electrical components of equipment in accordance with National Electric Code.

F. Jointing and Anchoring:

1. Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, leveled and at correct height indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

2. Anchor to supporting surfaces where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation.

3. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. 4. Complete assembly joints in the field that cannot be completed in the shop. 5. Install closure plates and strips where required with joints coordinated with units of

equipment.


G. Cleaning and Adjusting; Test and adjust equipment for proper operation.

1. Test rotating components, motors and pumps for proper function. 2. Lubricate moving parts if suggested by manufacturer's literature. 3. Test valves, meters and gauges for accuracy and calibrate prior to Substantial

Completion of Project.

H. Prior to acceptance of the project, clean and sanitize equipment both inside and outside.

3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK:

A. For the period during which other trades shall be on or near equipment and/or work covered by this Section, Contractor shall:

1. Cover and protect the exposed surfaces of equipment. 2. Preclude injury to the finish by absorption of chemicals, contact from tools and

machinery, and from all other causes which may be incidental to operations performed in the area by other trades.

3. Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement of damaged equipment or systems specified in this Section.

3.4 CLEANING:

A. When work of this Section and work of other trades has been completed, Contractor shall clean equipment so that all traces of grease, stains, protective coatings, abrasive dust, markings, scratches, and other foreign matter are completely removed.

B. The cleaning process shall eliminate any further cleaning on the part of the Government with the exception of that which would ordinarily be undertaken daily to maintain accepted standards of cleanliness and appearance.

3.5 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION:

A. Contractor shall schedule testing and calibration of equipment

B. Testing and calibration of all equipment shall be performed prior to demonstration of equipment operation and maintenance.

1. Provide necessary technicians, materials, and equipment required to conduct these tests and accurately calibrate equipment.

2. All defects disclosed by the tests shall be eliminated to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and the corrected areas retested.

3. Furnish documentation of testing, date and results as part of submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified in Section 01 78 00.

C. Contractor shall schedule demonstration of equipment operation and maintenance procedures in accordance with Section 01 65 00, attended by the following:

1. Authorized representative of each manufacturer of equipment installed in the Project.

2. Authorized representatives of AAFES who’s responsibility will be to operate and/or maintain the equipment.

3. Contracting Officer or designated representative. 4. Contractor and subcontractors performing work that could affect the operation and

maintenance of this equipment.


D. Contractor shall provide documentation to confirm demonstration of equipment operation and maintenance procedures, required to be signed by:

1. AAFES and AAFES representative. 2. Contractor. 3. Manufacturer’s representative.

END 11800

FIRE ALARM 13851-1

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13851 – Fire Alarm

PART 1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Fire protection systems are life-safety systems and will therefore be designed, installed, tested, and expected to perform as such.

B. This Section includes fire alarm systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

C. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

E. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction is an individual responsible for review, inspection, and/or approval of a system and shall include the building official, fire marshal, engineer, Contracting Officer, or Owners insurance representative. For this project, the AHJ shall be Base fire chief.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. All references shall be of the latest edition.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 13 Standard For The Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2. NFPA 17A Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems. 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 4. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code 5. NFPA 90A Standard For The Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems 6. NFPA 96 Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations. 7. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Appropriate UL equipment standards:

1. UL 864 Control Panels. 2. UL 268 Smoke Detectors. 3. UL 268A Smoke Detectors (HVAC). 4. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. 5. UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protection Signaling. 6. UL 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.

D. Building Codes:

1. International Building Code 2. International Fire Code

E. ADA, and/or State and local equivalency standards as adopted by The Authority Having Jurisdiction.

F. Military Unified Facilities Criteria:

FIRE ALARM 13851-2

1. UFC 3-600-01 Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities; 26 September 2006 with Change 3, 1 March 2013.

2. UFC 3-601-02 Operation and Maintenance: Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Protection Systems; 8 September 2010.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Extend existing Notifier AFP-200 Fire Alarm control panel to remodeled spaces.

B. All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products of a single manufacturer, engaged in the manufacturing and sale of analog fire detection devices for over ten years.

C. The system as specified shall be reviewed, fully tested and approved by each of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and turned over to the owner in an operational condition.

D. In the interest of job coordination and responsibilities the installing contractor shall contract with a single supplier for fire alarm equipment, engineering, programming, inspection and testing.

E. The contractor shall provide a representative as requested for project meetings such as to assist in coordination of trades.

F. Contractor shall fully test existing system to establish system status prior to beginning any work. Contractor shall schedule testing with base fire department and store management minimum of 14 days in advance. Testing shall be done during non-customer hours. At completion of testing, contactor shall provide documentation of test results highlighting any issues discovered during testing. Contractor shall return system to AAFES/Base fire department in same or better condition than when project was begun.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: All submittals shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review. The contractor shall include the following information in submittals.

1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared and signed by persons with the following qualifications: a. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level IV. Trained and certified by

manufacturer in fire alarm system design.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code.

3. Device Mounting Details: Details of device back-box requirements shall be provided. 4. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device.

Show size and route of cable and conduits. C. Cut Sheets, Calculations, and other Design Documents: Each set of shop drawings shall be

accompanied with supportive submittal documentation. This documentation shall be quality bound and shall be organized and numerically tabbed into the following sections.

1. Audio/Visual Devices 2. System Components, Modules and Relays 3. Battery Calculations and cut sheets (summary of results shall also be on plans) 4. Voltage Calculations (summary of results shall also be on plans) 5. Manufacturers Inspection instructions and other maintenance criteria from NFPA 72 and

UFC 3-600-02 6. Designer and installer certificates (documents prepared by a PE do not require certificate,

but are required to be sealed.)

D. Qualification Data: Copies of certificates for installers and documenting approved manufacture representation shall be provided.

FIRE ALARM 13851-3

E. Field quality-control test reports. 100% of alarm devices shall be tested for correct operation and resetting. This will occur prior to project work beginning, pretest and final testing. Tester shall provide spread sheet format listing address, device description, date tested, pass, fail and date corrected columns as a minimum. Tester’s shall sign and date report. Report to be given to fire department prior to scheduling acceptance testing. Also include copy in O & M manual.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.

G. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Contracting Officer for review.

H. Documentation:

1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to NFPA 72 to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to NFPA 72 to Owner. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix. (a) Typed hard copies on paper to Owner.

I. A copy of these fire alarm specifications shall be included with all submittal packages including those to the engineer, owner, and local AHJ’s.

J. Incomplete submittals shall be returned without review, unless previously approved by the Contracting Officer.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Qualifications:

1. The contractor shall submit copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as required in the State having jurisdiction to the Contracting Officer upon award of contract, and engineer upon request.

2. The contractor shall employ on staff a minimum of one NICET level IV Fire Alarm Technician, a registered Fire Protection Engineer, a professional engineer registered in the State of the installation, or a Certified Safety Professional with proven experience in fire alarm systems. This individual shall make regular site visits as necessary to oversee the system installation. This individual will be held accountable for system oversight, code compliance, and quality of installation. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Qualified individual shall immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.

3. At least one NICET Level II Fire Alarm Technician shall be present and have oversight anytime fire alarm equipment and/or wiring is being installed. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Technician shall immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.

4. Fire alarm shop drawings shall be prepared and signed by a Registered Fire Protection Engineer with proven and documented experience/training in fire alarm system design and codes. Plans not prepared by the Registered Fire Protection Engineer or under the

FIRE ALARM 13851-4

direct supervision (same employment) of the Registered Fire Protection Engineer shall not be approved. Design documents shall bear a seal of the engineer.

5. The Contracting Officer may accept a testing or qualification body other than NICET, if submitted and approved prior to bidding the project,. Evidence of qualification and means for verification shall be provided in writing to the Contracting Officer with sufficient time for evaluating such request prior to awarding of contract. However, such qualifications shall be specifically focused towards fire alarm system design, installation, and codes. Qualifications for other low voltage systems such as security, access control, telephone, etc. shall not be approved.

6. The State approved or licensed fire alarm contractor whose name appears on the system and who is responsible for system warranty and service shall have sole authority to establish installation responsibilities. Thus, if any portion is to be wired or installed by a separate contractor (such as an electrical contractor), then the fire alarm contractor will by contract select and warrant such contractor. An electrical or other contractor not licensed by the state and/or not meeting qualification requirements of this specification shall not dictate installation conditions for this system.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. FACP and Equipment: a. Notifier.

1. Wire and Cable: a. Comtran Corporation. b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company. c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

2. Audible and Visual Signals: a. Gentex Corporation. b. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company. c. Wheelock, Inc.

2.2 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Description:

1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP. 3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:

a. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

A. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

FIRE ALARM 13851-5

2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Visible Alarm Devices: Combination fire/mass notification Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1638 and 1971. Fire alarm strobe shall be clear polycarbonate with “FIRE” engraved in 1” high letters on lens. Provide a white aluminum trim.

1. Rated Light Output: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Manufacturer shall provide wall mount devices and/or ceiling mount devices as indicated on drawings. Provide special backbox for surface mounting of dual system indicating devices. Wheelock #SBL2-W or equal.

D. Evacuation Speakers:

1. UL1480 listed, as specified in section 2.2-5 above. 2. Range Units: Rated .1/8, ¼,1/2, 1, 2 watts at 70-volts, unless otherwise noted on

the plans. 3. Mounting: Flush mount in areas with suspended acoustical tile or gypsumboard

ceilings. Surface mount in areas with exposed structure. Provide minimum 60 degree symmetrical dispension.

4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker location.

5. Device shall be capable of multiple alert tones as indicated on plans or as required by the respective military facility.

6. Provide steel back box suitable for surface or recess mounting as required. Provide perorated aluminum grille factory painted white.

2.7 REMOTE INDICATORS

A. Remote status and alarm indicator and magnetic test stations when detector is above accessible ceiling, with LED indicating lights. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the duct smoke detector, smoke detector, or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Monitor module listed for use in providing a system address for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Control module shall have double throw form C contacts with minimum rating of 125VAC, 1 ampere inductive. Module shall receive control signal from signaling line circuit (SLC) and shall require no other external power for operation.

1. Control module shall be capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate elevator recall.

2.9 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

FIRE ALARM 13851-6

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Plenum rated twisted, shielded pair, No. 14 AWG.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Plenum rated solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Make new connections to existing equipment to support new devices.

B. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. Label device to match HVAC schedule.

C. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling, but not higher than 8 feet unless otherwise noted.

D. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

E. No portion of a fire alarm system shall be installed prior to having plans on site that have been approved and stamped by the Contracting Officer and the local AHJ. This includes wiring. Approved stamped plans shall be on site at all times while the system is in the installation stage.

1. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until the construction cleanup of all trades is complete per NFPA 72. Any smoke detector that has been installed prior to the construction cleanup of all trades and without prior written approval of the engineer and local AHJ shall be marked in a permanent manner that will identify it from re-use and shall be replaced prior to commissioning of the system and/or turning over to the owner. Such detectors shall be replaced at the sole expense of the installing contractor. Subject to approval of the engineer and local AHJ this may exclude services, which do not create air-born particles such as telephone/network services, and modular furniture installation.

2. Orange shipping covers, rubber gloves, tape, or other devices shall not be used to bypass these basic requirements.

3.2 BACK BOXES

A. Speakers shall be installed in a 4-square deep box with extension ring to limit potential damage to wiring.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring according to the following:

1. NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 16 Section “Raceways and Boxes.”

1. Fire alarm/mass notification circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

2. Devices shall be included on the circuits as indicated on the approved plans and calculations. Changes must be evaluated by the designer. Changes in wire routing may require new calculations.

FIRE ALARM 13851-7

3. Raceway system shall be minimum 3/4" EMT Type. 4. Paint all fire alarm conduit and boxes red. See 16195.

C. Unless noted otherwise on the plans, power booster panels shall not be fed from a separate notification power booster panel (daisy chained).

D. Each circuit entering or exiting the building shall be protected with surge protection. This includes 24vdc, 120vac, and telephone circuits serving the fire alarm system.

E. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

F. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

G. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the FACP and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification”.

B. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each end and at terminal points with wire markers. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

C. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

D. Paint power supply circuit breaker(s) red and label “FIRE ALARM”.

E. All initiating devices shall have permanent making indicated address in FACP.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100.


A. Contractor Pre-Testing and Record of Completion Testing:

1. This section covers contractor pre-testing and documentation by the installing contractor that shall be conducted before any commissioning inspection or AHJ testing is scheduled.

2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before any system devices are installed or energized.

3. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically

FIRE ALARM 13851-8

supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.

4. 100% of alarm devices shall be tested for correct operation and resetting. Tester shall provide typed spread sheet format listing address, device description, date tested, pass, fail and date corrected columns as a minimum. Tester’s shall sign and date report. Report to be given to fire department prior to scheduling acceptance testing. Also include copy in O & M manual.

5. Duct smoke detectors shall not be installed or in-place when the HVAC systems are first turned on. All HVAC systems shall be run sufficiently to remove loose dust and debris. Failure to protect detectors may result in detector replacement per this specification.

6. Audibility testing shall not be conducted until all doors, windows, walls, ceilings, and carpeting are in place.

7. All Alarm Initiating Devices shall be observed and logged for correct zone and sensitivity. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the initials of the installing technician and date.

8. Computer/labeler generated labels with the address number only may be installed on the exterior of the device as long as the background is clear and installed in a quality manner. This will assist in the inspection, testing, maintenance, and trouble-shooting of the system.

9. All Smoke detectors shall be commissioned using canned smoke or a method that will functionally test the smoke chamber. The use of Magnets for commission testing of smoke detectors is Strictly Prohibited.

10. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses.

11. Air velocity readings shall be taken and recorded for each HVAC related smoke detector.

12. The installing contractor shall make instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests available.

13. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests: a. Ladders, scaffolds, or lifts as required to access all installed equipment. b. Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance. c. Two way radios, flashlights, screwdrivers, measuring tapes. d. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring airflow through air

duct smoke detector sampling assemblies. e. Calibrated decibel meter.

B. At minimum the following tests shall be conducted and documented.

1. Turn each sprinkler system flow valve two full turns and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.

2. Verify activation of all flow switches under approved flowing conditions. 3. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 4. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 5. Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal

actuates. 6. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 7. Check presence and audibility of tone throughout building spaces. This includes

measuring dBA levels. 8. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors

using the Walk Test feature. 9. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be

introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.

10. Each notification circuit shall be tested under standby/battery power. Any circuit that measures less than 16 volts dc or the nameplate voltage, whichever is higher, shall be considered as failing the design. Note: Some systems incorporating synchronizing modules can impair results. If the module cannot be

FIRE ALARM 13851-9

bypassed for voltage readings, the manufacturer should be contacted for guidance.

11. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. This section details criteria for commissioning inspections by AHJ’s and the owner. Testing shall be scheduled with all parties minimum 10 working days in advance.

1. This stage of testing shall not be scheduled or conducted until all pre-testing has

been completed and is in compliance with applicable requirements. 2. A signed Record of Completion shall be provided to the inspector prior to starting

this testing. 3. The contractor is responsible for testing all components in accordance with the

manufacturers required and suggested procedures and in accordance with NFPA 72. If this specification incorporates a detailed Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) prepared by the engineer than it shall also be followed.

4. A program matrix shall be provided by the installing contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input.

1. The commissioning inspector shall use the system record drawings and other documents specified under this specification during the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed. In conducting the commissioning test, the inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions.

2. All Smoke detectors shall be commissioned using canned smoke or a method that will functionally test the smoke chamber. The use of magnets for commission testing of smoke detectors is strictly prohibited

3. New detectors that show to be dirty through system sensitivity testing shall be replaced.

4. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following: a. System wiring shall be tested to show the following results and the

systems subsequence operation: 1) Open, Shorted or Grounded Circuits. 2) Primary and Battery power disconnected. 3) End-of-line voltage readings on notification circuits.

b. System notification circuits and appliances operate as programmed.

Audibility and visual levels meet required standards. c. A minimum of 15 dBA above ambient shall be obtained in every

occupiable space (throughout) per NFPA 72. This includes storage rooms, electrical rooms, telephone rooms, and any other occupiable space.

d. System shall demonstrate the correct messages at the FACP and any remote annunciator.

e. System off-site reporting shall be verified for alarm, supervisory, trouble, correct address, facility name, contact phone number, and contact name.

f. System shall be tested for stand-by battery backup as outlined in this specification.

3.8 FINAL DOCUMENTATION

A. System documentation shall be supplied to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. System record (as-built) drawings and wiring details including one set of

reproducible drawings, and a CD ROM with copies of the record drawings in AUTOCAD .dwg format, or .dxf format for use in a CAD drafting program.

2. System Operating, Installation and Maintenance Manuals.

FIRE ALARM 13851-10

3. System matrix showing input signals to output commands. 4. Provide a copy of the FACP system programming on a CD-ROM.

B. A copy of all above materials and documentation shall be provided in O & M package. C. The installation contractor shall provide the owner with account information, phone

numbers, passwords, and terms/conditions of the monitoring company. 3.9 FINAL SYSTEM TRAINING

A. The installation contractor shall familiarize the owner and/or owner representative with location of all fire alarm panels, modules, devices, wire routing, and plan cabinet contents.

B. The installation contractor shall furnish training as follows: 1. A simplified training manual on system operation unique to the system shall be

prepared and presented to the owner. This manual shall cover key items and day-to-day operation. Such manual shall be presented in a professional and legible format such as that provided through use of a Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft Word.

2. The owner shall be provided with at least 3 hard-copies and an electronic PDF format that can be edited through commonly available software.

3. The training program shall be presented such that the owner can readily train new staff over the life of the system.

4. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgment of alarms. This shall include emphasis that alarms shall not be silenced until after a complete and thorough investigation has been conducted. If there is a hazard, then only the fire department is authorized to silence an alarm.

5. Sequence of operation for all interconnected systems. 6. Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions

from the system control panel. 7. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 8 hours, but shall be

sufficient to cover all items specified. The contractor shall provide two such training sessions.

3.10 ADJUSTING AND FOLLOW-UP

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of beneficial occupancy, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. Annual Test and Inspection: Eleven months after date of Substantial Completion, test the

fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. The owner should be encouraged to participate in these services as reinforcement of system operability.

END OF SECTION

GENERAL PROVISIONS – MECHANICAL 15010 - 1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15010 – General Provisions - Mechanical

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General administrative and procedural requirements for the mechanical installations. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. General Provisions of the contract, including the following, shall apply to Division 15 Specification Sections: Solicitation Documents and Division 1.

1.3 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS

A. All work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of local, county, state and national codes and regulations including the requirements of the following: 1. International Building Code, 2012 2. International Mechanical Code, 2012 3. International Plumbing Code, 2012 4. National Electrical Code. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act. of 1970 6. Architectural and Engineering Instructions Manual, 14 July 1989, Dept. of the

Army. 7. Department of Defense Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC). 8. Life Safety Code, NFPA No. 101. 9. For work not specifically listed above, use standards and codes of the National

Fire Protection Association.

B. All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and/or installed in accordance with the applicable industry standard mentioned. The following list will serve to clarify abbreviations that appear in other sections of this specification: 1. AABC Associated Air Balance Council 2. ADC Air Diffusion Council 3. AGA American Gas Association. 4. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association 5. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 6. ANSI American National Standards Institute 7. ASE Association of Safety Engineers 8. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineer 9. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 10. AWWA American Water Works Association 11. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 12. FS Federal Specifications 13. IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers 14. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 15. MCAA Mechanical Contractors' Association of American 16. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 17. NSC National Safety Council 18. NSF National Sanitation Foundation 19. SBI Steel Boiler Institute Industry 20. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association 21. UL Underwriters Laboratories 22. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. 23. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau.


1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. FURNISH: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.

B. INSTALL: The term install describes operations at the Project Site including the actual

unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations to complete and ready for intended use.

C. PROVIDE: The term provides means to furnish and install, complete and ready for

intended use. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 for requirements for shop drawings and product data.

B. Asbestos-Free Material/Product: Prior to approval of the material/product to be used, the manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the Contracting Officer with written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate is mandatory before approval will be issued. Submittals furnished without the asbestos-free certification will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken until such certification is provided.

C. See applicable sections to this Division for items requiring shop drawings.

1.6 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials, the style, make or quality of which is specifically designated, shall be as specified.

B. Contractor shall furnish necessary materials in ample quantities and as frequently as

required to avoid delay in the progress of the Work, and shall so store them as to prevent interference with other work.

1.7 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL

A. All materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or different from requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or injured through negligence of Contractor or his employees, or through action of fire or weather will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from premises by Contractor and satisfactory materials and work substituted without delay.

B. All defective work or imperfect work shall be corrected immediately on notice from

Contracting Officer. No previous inspection or certificate on account shall be held to relieve Contractor from his obligation to furnish sound materials and to perform good and satisfactory work.

1.8 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall confer with other contractors at the site before installing his work to avoid interferences so that maximum headroom and clearances may be maintained. In event that interferences develop between work of various contractors, Contracting Officer's decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for changes required.

B. Particular attention shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights

occur, or where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas where space is limited.


C. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to avoid all interferences with and to assure proper coordination with work of all other trades, cases, partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures, etc., shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns. Contracting Officer will reconcile conflicts and adjustments where such adjustments are warranted.

1.9 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall keep all his respective pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter during construction and cover all fixtures, equipment, and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Contracting Officer.

1.10 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The layout shown on the Contract Drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and as other work will allow. The dimensions of work as shown on the Contract Drawings are not as-built dimensions. No measurements shall be scaled from the drawings and used as definite dimensions for laying out or fitting work in place.

B. The layout of manufactured equipment as shown on the drawings shall be checked and

the exact location shall be determined from the dimensions of equipment shop drawings approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.11 MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall provide the Contracting Officer with three copies of maintenance manual for all equipment furnished and installed under his Work. Manuals shall be in substantial 3-ring binders with project name and number inscribed on face and hinged back. Manual shall include roster of all AAFES and Installation training session attendees. The manual shall, however, first be approved by the Contracting Officer.

B. The manual shall include manufacturer's lubricating and operating instructions and parts

list and serial numbers for all operating machinery, including drive information, and motor horsepower, amperage, and voltage readings on all phases, valve chart, sequence of operation, index following the order listed in the specifications, warranties in the name of the Installation, and a list of manufacturers, service firms and subcontractors names and telephone numbers.

C. Training attendance rosters for each training session shall be included in manuals.

Roster will identify training subject, date, attendees name, job title, office symbol, grade/rank, and telephone number.

D. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with

embossed or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the presence of the Contracting Officer designated representative to ensure that he understands their function and purpose.

E. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall put the systems into service. Contractors

shall be entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations including the lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus.

1.12 PROJECT RECORD AND CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS


A. Refer to the Division-1 Section: 01720 Project Record Documents for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.

B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both

exterior and interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned for column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

C. Mark Specifications to indicate addenda, approved substitutions, change orders, actual

equipment and materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.

3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building

components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for

mechanical installation. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

6. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials.

7. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide maximum headroom possible.

8. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

9. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceiling with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.

10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surface. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section 08305 - Access Doors and Division 15 Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.

11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

12. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing


regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

13. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Contracting Officer.

14. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed expose in finished spaces.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.

B. Refer to the Division 1 Section 01045- Cutting and Patching for general requirements for

cutting and patching.

C. Refer to Division 16 for requirements for cutting and patching electrical equipment, components, and materials.

D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting

and patching.

E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of mechanical installations.

F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is

necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.

G. Perform cuttings, fittings, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 2. Remove and replace defective work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Upon written instruction for the Contracting Officer, uncover and restore Work to

provide for Contracting Officer observation of concealed work.

H. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: 01710 - Cleaning for general requirements for final cleaning.

END OF SECTION

CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING 15013-1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15013 – Cleaning, Testing, and Adjusting

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section of the specifications includes the cleaning and the testing and the adjusting of all various plumbing systems and equipment for mechanical strength, leakage and performance.

B. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall make such tests as are hereinafter

specified or as may be required by the Contracting Officer.

C. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer or his authorized representative.

D. The entire cost of all tests, inspections, permits, etc., shall be borne by the Contractor at no

additional cost to the Government, unless otherwise directed in writing.

E. Certificates, where such are required, shall be executed and turned over to the Contracting Officer.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall provide all apparatus, temporary piping, connections or any other requirements necessary and shall take all due precautions to prevent damage to the building and its contents as may be incurred during tests. The Contractor shall repair or make good at his own expense any damage to the building and/or its contents resulting from tests.

B. Elements of the various systems, equipment, etc, which might be damaged during testing

shall be removed (or otherwise protected) for the period of the test and replaced thereafter.

C. Any leaks, defects, or deficiencies discovered as a result of the tests shall be immediately repaired or made good, and tests shall be repeated until test requirements are fully complied with. Defective materials shall be replaced. Caulking, puttying, painting or rusting to correct leaks in pipe or pipe joints will not be permitted.

1.3 PERFORMANCE TESTS

A. Operating tests to determine performance shall be conducted of each completed system and its associated equipment.

B. Where major items of Government-furnished equipment are included in a system, it is the

Contracting Officer's responsibility to have a factory representative available when required.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Contracting Officer in writing of the test data sufficiently in advance to allow the timely request for the representative. In the event that testing cannot proceed immediately upon the arrival of the factory representative, and if the delay incurred is due to incomplete work or improper preparation of the work by the Contractor, the Contractor shall bear all costs of the factory representative for the period of the delay.

D. Performance tests shall be conducted in a manner that will demonstrate satisfactorily the

ability of the systems and equipment to perform as specified under design conditions. 1.4 MECHANICAL STRENGTH AND LEAKAGE TESTS

A. All tests hereinafter specified shall be conducted before backfilling, insulating, or other form of concealment is completed.

CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING 15013-2

B. It is desirable that each system be tested in its entirety but the various systems may be tested in sections as may be required to expedite the work of other trades.

1.5 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM

A. All equipment, piping systems and duct systems shall be thoroughly cleaned internally and externally before being placed in service.

B. The Contractor is charged with the responsibility for maintaining all systems and equipment

clean and free of foreign matter during the processes of assembly and erection.

C. Pipe strainers and air filters shall be cleaned and serviced immediately prior to final inspection.

D. When flushing systems, all control, thermal and other elements subject to blocking by foreign

matter shall be removed.

E. When piping systems are flushed with fluids other than that normally contained, the Contractor shall take adequate precautions to insure that the normal contents of the piping will not be contaminated when placed in service.

END OF SECTION

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15050 – Basic Materials and Methods

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide all material as specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 for the following devices:

1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Valves. 3. Pressure gauges. 4. Thermometers. 5. Access panels and doors.

B. Submit certificates of compliance for pipe, fittings and valves specified under this section.

All material shall be manufactured in the United States. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, Model number and rating on a plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place.

B. Code ratings, labels or other data which are die-stamped or otherwise affixed to the

surface of the equipment shall be in easily visible location. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Follow manufacturer's directions in delivery, storage, protection and handling of all equipment and materials.

B. Deliver and store equipment and materials to the site in original containers, suitably

sheltered from the elements and mechanical injury, but readily accessible for inspection until installed.

C. Items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry, heated spaces.

D. Ascertain, from examination of architectural drawings, whether any special temporary

access openings in the building(s) will be required for admission of apparatus furnished under this Division, and notify General Contractor accordingly.

E. In event of failure to give sufficient notice in time to arrange for access openings during

construction, contractor assumes all costs of providing such openings thereafter.

F. Heavy machinery, equipment and heavy parts thereof shall be brought into building or onto premise by a machinery moving concern acceptable to Contracting Officer.

G. Machinery movers shall not rig, tie to, or rest weight upon any building member of any

part of building premises or make use of any stairway until specific permission is obtained from Contracting Officer.

H. Permission to rig to or in any way make use of any part of building premises shall not

relieve Installer of responsibility for any damage resulting from, or because of said rigging or use.


I. No holes shall be cut in any wall, roof or floor for introduction of machinery except when absolutely necessary and approved by Contracting Officer.

J. Approved holes will be cut and repaired by the proper trades at the expense of the trade

requesting them. 1.5 PROTECTION

A. Keep pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter, and cover all fixtures, equipment and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation.

B. Fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of work shall be

restored to original condition or replaced by Installer.

C. Equipment shall be inherently safe and moving parts shall be covered with guards which meet OSHA requirements.

D. Provide protective guards for devices such as or similar to thermostats, valves, switches

and sprinkler heads which are so located as to be readily subject to tampering, accidental damage, or vandalism.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. All piping and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Each length of pipe and each fitting shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark and the specification code to which it conforms.

B. Underground and above ground sanitary soil, waste and vent and storm water piping

systems: Contractor provide one or a combination of the following:

1. Service weight cast iron hub and spigot pipe with drainage pattern cast iron fittings conforming to ASTM A74. Joints shall be push on type utilizing neoprene molded rubber tight sealing gasket conforming to ASTM C564.

2. Hubless cast iron pipe with drainage pattern cast iron fittings conforming to Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards 301-67T. Joints shall be made with neoprene sealing steel and stainless steel clamp and shield assembly.

C. Above ground domestic cold and hot water piping systems:

1. Type L or K hard drawn copper tubing conforming to ASTM B88 with wrought

copper or cast brass solder fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22. All joints shall be made with lead free solder and water soluble binder flux.

2.2 PIPE SPECIALTIES

A. Unions in copper pipe 2 in. and smaller shall be Mueller, Anaconda or Chase Brass, brass solder joint unions constructed for 150 psi working pressure.

B. Unions in steel pipe 2 inch and smaller shall be screwed, malleable iron, brass to steel

type (F.S. WW-U-531c Class 1) for 150 psi working pressure.

C. Unions 2-1/2 in. in size and larger shall be companion flanges. (ANSI B16.1). Flanged unions shall be Van Stone, Grinnell or Cranelap flanges over welding nipples welded into pipelines.

D. Gaskets shall fit inside of bolt holes for all lines not under vacuum.


E. Length of bolts shall allow full thread on nut but eliminate exposed threads wherever practical.

F. Dielectric unions or brass adapters suitable for dielectric service shall be provided at pipe

connections between steel or cast iron piping and copper tubing and at gas meter. 2.3 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS

A. Hangers and supports shall conform to the recommendations of Standard Practice SP.58 of the Manufacturers' Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry.

B. Hangers shall be as follows:

Manufacturers Grinnell Elcen

1. Insulated piping: 300 12X 2. Non-insulated piping: 260 12 3. Copper tubing: Non-insulated CT-65 312

C. Riser clamps shall be as follows:

Manufacturers Grinnell Crawford

1. Piping all sizes: 261 36 2. Copper tubing riser clamps shall be copper plated.

D. Where several pipes occur at the same elevation, trapeze type hangers may be used.

Trapeze hangers shall be made of 2 inch x 2 inch structural steel channels with legs down and steel blocking of varying thickness welded to channel under each pipe to obtain proper pitch. All copper tubing supports shall be copper plated or insulated from dissimilar materials.

E. Hanger rods shall conform to the following:

Pipe Size Rod Diameter Up to 2" 3/8" 2-1/2" to 3" 1/2"

Trapeze hanger rods shall be of sufficient size to carry weight of Trapeze channel, piping and contents, insulation supports and an additional 200 lb. load.

F. Wire or perforated strap iron hangers, expansion anchors, and power actuated fasteners

will not be permitted. 2.4 SLEEVES

A. Provide pipe sleeves for all penetrations of piping through floors and walls.

B. Floor sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe with bottom set flush with surface below and top extending 1" above finished floor (3" in mechanical equipment rooms). Seal around pipe and pipe sleeve with fire resistant waterproofing caulking materials.

C. Wall sleeves for exterior foundation walls shall be cast iron fabricated sleeves flush with

wall inside and outside. Caulk with weatherproof sealant or otherwise adequately waterproof opening between pipe and sleeve.

D. Wall sleeves for masonry walls shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe flush with

all surfaces.

E. Wall sleeves for interior partitions and ceilings shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel with lock joints.


F. Sleeves for piping that is to be insulated shall be large enough to allow insulation to pass

through the sleeve. Refer to Section 15250 for specific thicknesses of insulation.

G. Pack the space between the interior surface of all sleeves and pipes or pipe insulation with fire resistant, sound and waterproofing caulking materials.

2.5 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide set-screw chrome plated escutcheons (not friction-dependant) on all exposed pipe or pipe insulation passing through or into finished walls, partitions, ceiling and floors. Escutcheons at insulated pipes shall be large enough to encircle insulation without penetrating vapor barrier or jacket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. This Contractor shall do all excavation and backfilling and rock excavation required for installation of all of the work requiring excavation, and shall provide all necessary sheeting and bracing required to properly protect his workmen and facilitate the work.

B. Pipe trenches shall be excavated to lines and grades as shown on drawings or as

approved by the Contracting Officer. Bell holes shall be excavated to insure firm support for the pipe on undisturbed earth for the full length of the pipe except the necessary clearance at joints for construction and inspection. Over excavated or unfirm ground shall be brought up to the proper level with sand, or with pit run gravel, thoroughly compacted in place. Width of trench shall be such as to readily permit making of joints.

C. As piping is laid in the trench, sand shall be backfilled along each side of the pipe and

carefully compacted so as to securely hold the pipe in place, leaving the top half of the pipe exposed for its entire length, and the joints all around completely exposed for inspection by the Contracting Officer. No additional backfilling shall be placed until the inspection has been completed and tests herein specified have been made and approved. This contractor shall backfill all trenches as rapidly as testing and acceptance will permit.

D. Backfill for a depth of 1 ft. above the top of the pipe shall be sand, free from rocks or other

foreign materials, and shall be placed and hand tamped uniformly so as to avoid damaging or disturbing the alignment of the pipe. Completely backfill top of trench with compacted sand or pit run gravel.

E. All excess excavated material resulting from this Work shall be deposited by the

Contractor in location directed by the Contracting Officer.

F. This Contractor shall establish and maintain all elevations and lines required for the installation of sewers and water lines.

G. All elevations, grades and lines shall be set with the aid of transit and level by this

Contractor, and he shall be responsible for their protection while being used.

H. Sheet and brace trenches and remove water as necessary to fully protect workmen and permit proper installation of the work. Comply with local regulations or, in the absence thereof, with the provisions of the "Manual of Accident Prevention on Construction," of the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. Under no circumstances lay pipe or install appurtenances in water; keep the trench free from water until pipe joints have been completed. The presence of ground water in the soil or the necessity of sheeting or bracing trenches shall not constitute a condition for which an increase may be made in the Contract Price; except that when sheeting is left in place, on the written order of the Contracting Officer, the Contract Price shall be adjusted. Sheeting left in place shall be


cut off not less than 2 ft. below finished grade. Sheeting shall not be removed until the trench is substantially backfilled.

3.2 JOINTING OF PIPING

A. Threads shall be full and clean cut, and ends of pipe shall be reamed. When screwed joints are assembled, the male thread shall be thoroughly coated with Teflon paste or an aerobic curing thread sealant to serve as a joint sealer. Paint all the exposed threads. (Teflon tape may be used at contractor's option.) Care shall be taken to keep the paint and all other foreign matter from entering the interior of the piping. Each section of pipe and all fittings shall be carefully inspected for dirt, grease, or other foreign matter on the inside and where necessary they shall be properly cleaned before assembly. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to thoroughly clean the piping systems after completion to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer in cases where proper cleaning was not done at time of installation.

B. Soldered or brazed joints made with fittings having pre-inserted rings of solder or brazing

alloy shall have the tube and fittings cleaned bright and fluxed. The joint shall be heated sufficiently to make a tight connection. Tubes and fittings without such rings, shall be cleaned bright, fluxed and heated until the solder is drawn into the joint by capillarity and the connection is tight. Flux shall be water soluble binder flux. All solder and flux shall be lead free.

3.3 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION

A. Provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction in all piping. Piping shall be installed in a manner such that joints will not develop leaks. All expansion shall be taken up by swing-connections, and this Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of these connections whether or not they are shown on the Drawings with specific means for relieving expansion and contraction. Slip-type expansion joints shall not be used. Particular care must be exercised at branches on underground piping to allow free movement at branch connection to main.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Piping shall be installed on long continuous lengths, with a minimum number of joints. Joints, where necessary shall be carefully made to insure against leakage.

B. All piping shall be installed using hangers, brackets and braces to prevent sagging and/or

lateral movement. All hangers, brackets, and other supports shall be securely fastened to the construction as may be required and in a manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer. All piping shall be install to maintain maximum head room. Nothing shall be suspended from the roof deck.

C. Arrangement of all piping shall be as shown on plans. It is especially necessary that all

mains be installed with view to accessibility in case of repair and location of pipe lines and spacing between same shall be so made that there will be no conflict between pipe lines by the several trades.

D. Contractor shall give careful consideration to clearances and locations of lines and type of

fittings used to obtain these clearances. Provide maximum headroom in all cases. Piping shall be installed parallel to building walls and at a height so as not to obstruct any portion of a window, light fixture, doorway, pipe tunnel or passageway. Ascertain from the drawings heights of all suspended ceilings, size of all pipe shafts in which piping is to be concealed, and location and size of structural members in and adjacent to all pipe shafts.

E. Where interferences develop in the field, Contractor shall offset or reroute piping as

required to clear such interferences. In all cases consult architectural drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, or other architectural details before installing piping.


F. At the low point in piping, and elsewhere as shown on the drawings, install a dirt pocket at least 6 in. deep with a cap at bottom constructed of pipe fittings not less than 3 in. for connections 3 in. and larger and of the full diameter of the connection served where smaller than 3 in.

G. Under no circumstances shall the size of piping shown on the drawings be changed

without written approval of the Contracting Officer.

H. Provide eccentric reducers where required for proper drainage or venting of horizontal pipe lines. Reducing fittings shall be used for all changes of pipe size and bushings shall not, under any circumstances, be used.

I. Unions or flanges are to be installed on the equipment side of all valves in pipe

connections from mains to equipment, to enable equipment to be drained and disconnected without necessitating the draining of mains.

J. Valves must be arranged for easy access and be within easy reach and the piping shall

be arranged to accomplish this. 3.5 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Pipe sleeves shall be securely bedded in the building construction. Sleeves shall finish flush with finished wall and ceiling lines. Note that where covering is provided, it shall extend continuously through sleeves.

B. Sleeves installed in vertical positions shall be perfectly plumb and sleeves in horizontal

positions shall be level. They shall be located, set, and maintained in position by this Contractor while surrounding construction work be being installed so that the center of each pipe shall be accurately installed in the center of its sleeve. The space between the pipe or the insulation and the sleeve shall be caulked to prevent light or air transfer. Where vertical sleeves occur, such as in floors or ceilings, special collars secured to the pipes or to the ceiling construction shall be provided to prevent the packing from falling out. The standard floor and ceiling plates herein specified for finished areas may be used for this purpose provided they are firmly secured to the pipes.

3.6 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS

A. Provide all hangers, supports, bracing, inserts, beams, anchors, guides, sleeves and miscellaneous steel for the proper support, alignment, expansion and contraction of piping and equipment.

B. Hanger supports shall be securely fastened to structural members by approved beam

clamps and clips, concrete inserts, anchors, or other appropriate methods agreed upon with the Contracting Officer.

C. Maximum spacing of hangers and supports for steel piping shall be as follows:

Pipe Size Spacing 1/2" and 3/4" Not over 6'-0" 1" and 1-1/4" Not over 8'-0" 1-1/2" thru 3" Not over 10'-0" 4" and 6" Not over 12'-0"

D. Hanger and support spacing for copper piping shall not exceed 8 ft. on centers.

E. Cast iron or bell and spigot piping shall be supported at every joint.

F. Additional hangers and supports shall be provided to minimize undesirable stress on

valve bodies, other fittings and equipment.


G. Provide all supplemental angles, channels and plates of adequate sizes where bracing or supports are required for piping between structural members.

3.7 CLEANING THE PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Before pipe covering is applied and final tests are made, flush the water piping systems thoroughly to remove grit, sand, oil, etc., for as long a time as is required to thoroughly clean the apparatus and piping. Make the required temporary connections for this purpose.

B. Care must be taken not to get dirt, grease, etc., upon the floors or walls. Any damage

done shall be promptly repaired.

C. After the period of these operations, any defects or damages that may have developed in the equipment and apparatus as a result of the cleaning process or the operation of the system shall be made good, and the apparatus put in first class working order. Each step of the cleaning process shall be observed by the Contracting Officer.

END OF SECTION

TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS 15067-1

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Section 15067 - Testing Piping Systems


A. Provide pressure tests on plumbing, sanitary waste, grease waste, and venting piping systems.

B. Provide pressure tests on domestic cold and hot water piping systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 - General Requirements. 2. Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods 3. Section 15250 - Insulation 4. Section 15400 - Plumbing


A. Notify Contracting Officer three days prior to the tests, who will in turn notify other interested parties.

B. Piping systems where required, shall be pressure tested for leaks in accordance with the

Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.1.0, and as specified herein.

C. All tests shall be performed and all piping defects shall be corrected prior to insulating, inaccessible concealing or backfilling. Leaks shall be repaired, all repaired piping shall be retested. All defective pipe, materials and workmanship shall be removed and replaced and tests shall be repeated until systems are proven entirely tight.

D. The tests shall not be performed until piping systems have been flushed and cleaned.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit three (3) copies of all testing reports to the Contracting Officer and a copy of each report shall be included in the O & M manual under test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TESTING MATERIALS

A. All materials, pumps, compressors and equipment required for testing shall be provided by the Contractor installing the piping system.

B. Where water is used in hydrostatic testing, only potable water shall be used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEM - GENERAL

A. Devices or equipment, or parts thereof, gauges thermometers, etc., which may be damaged by test pressures shall be removed or protected during tests.

TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS 15067-2

B. Fabricated piping shall not be connected to equipment until testing has been completed. Before applying test pressure, provide restraining devices as required to prevent distortion of piping system during testing.

C. Welding and screwed joints and other potential leak sources of the systems to be

hydrostatically tested shall be painted with a powdered blue chalk and water mixture and allow to dry before testing begins.

D. All joints in the piping systems shall be inspected during the test period. All defective

joints shall be removed, repaired and replaced. Pinning or caulking of leaks will not be permitted.

E. Where air is used for pressure testing, the air pressure shall be gradually applied. All leak

sources shall be checked for leaks by applying a coating of soap suds to the source.

F. After tests have been completed and piping systems proven tight, piping and equipment shall be tested for complete drainage through unions, caps, plugs, faucets or hose valves at low points. If piping and equipment do not drain properly, piping and equipment shall be regraded and drain points added until system can be completely drained. Systems shall be left dry in freezing weather.

3.2 PLUMBING, STORM WATER, AND VENTING SYSTEMS

A. Piping systems shall be tested with water or air either in its entirety or in sections. Contractor shall provide all equipment, material, and labor necessary for inspection and tests. Cleanouts, etc. shall be removed to ascertain if the pressure has reached all parts of the system.

B. Water test - if applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be tightly

closed, except the highest opening, and the system filled with water to point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the highest opening of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no section shall be tested with less than a ten foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the upper ten feet of the next preceding section shall be tested, so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost ten feet of the system) shall have been submitted to a test of less than a ten foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least thirty minutes before inspection starts.

C. Air test shall be made by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus to any suitable

opening, and after closing all other inlets and outlets to the system, forcing air into the system until there is a uniform gage pressure of five pounds per square inch. The pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of thirty minutes before inspection starts.

D. System shall be inspected for leaks. In the event leaks are discovered they shall be

repaired and tests repeated until system is proven water tight. 3.3 DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Domestic cold and hot water piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure of 100 psig, or 1.5 times the line pressure whichever is greater, registered at ground floor level. Testing shall be considered complete when systems hold the test pressure for a minimum period of one hour without variation in pressure except that which is due to changes in temperature.

END OF SECTION

PIPING INSULATION 15250-1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15250 – Piping Insulation


A. Provide all materials, equipment, apparatus, services, methods, tools, labor, transportation, etc., required to complete the insulation of the mechanical systems as shown on the drawings and as specified.

B. Cold piping requiring insulation:

1. Domestic cold water piping. 2. Refrigerant Suction Piping.

C. Hot piping requiring insulation:

1. Domestic hot water, tempered hot water and hot water recirculating piping.

D. Painting and identification will be provided under Division 9 or by the contractor providing

the items to be insulated. Factory sizing on outer jacketing of insulation shall be provided under this section suitable for specified finish coat of paint or identification.

1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Where applicable, the Fire Hazard Classification of the materials herein specified shall be listed and inspected by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The flame spread rating, fuel contributed and smoke developed as shown in the listing shall be determined by ASTM E84 "Method of Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". Each product shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories. All products used on this project shall be classified as "non-combustible" in National Building Code or NFPA National Fire Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawing in accordance with Section 15010 for all insulation as follows:

1. Schedule listing each type of insulation, insulation thickness, density, "K" factor, type of jacket, etc., and the service or type of work that the insulation is to apply.

1.4 DEFINITION

A. The term "piping" as used in this section of the specifications shall include pipe, fittings, valves, specialties, strainers, flanges, unions, runouts, final connections, etc.

1.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Any such insulation or covering damaged prior to final acceptance of the work shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced.

B. Provide sturdy metal guards on all duct and pipe insulation subject to damage from

normal maintenance operations and personnel. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 COLD PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION (DOWN TO 0 F)

A. Minimum 3-1/2 pounds per cubic foot density, fiberglass factory molded or spun pipe insulation with a "K" factor of 0.24 at 75 F mean temperature and a factory applied fire


retardant self sealing vapor barrier jacket.

B. Flexible elastomeric insulation having a "K" factor of 0.28 at 75 F mean temperature. For use only on refrigeration, condensate drain piping, and domestic hot and cold water piping in walls and chases. Insulation shall have jacket to meet 25 flame & 50 smoke spread rating.

2.2 HOT PIPING INSULATION (UP TO 500 F)

A. Minimum of 3-1/2 pounds per cubic foot density fiberglass, factory molded or spun pipe insulation with a "K" factor of 0.24 at 75 F mean temperature and a factory applied fire retardant self sealing jacket.

2.3 INSULATION MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers for insulation products specified above shall be Certain-Teed/Saint Gobain Corp., Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp., Manville Corp, or Knauf Fiberglass.

B. Manufacturers for flexible elastomeric insulation shall be Armstrong, Rubatex Corp., or

Halstead Industrial Products. 2.4 ADHESIVES, LAGGING, AND SEALERS

A. Adhesives, lagging and sealers shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturers. Where applicable, they shall include an anti-vermin and fungicidal agent and shall be non-toxic and non-flammable.

B. Manufacturers for adhesives, lagging and sealers shall be Benjamin Foster, Insul-Coustic

or Chicago Mastic Co. 2.5 PREMOLDED FITTING AND VALVE COVERS

A. Premolded fitting and valve covers shall be factory made of one piece polyvinyl chloride. Covers shall overlap the adjoining pipe insulation.

B. Manufacturers for fitting and valve covers shall be Insul-Coustic Corp., Zeston, Inc., or

Certain-Teed/Saint Gobain Corp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION/GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Clean thoroughly to remove rust, plaster, and dirt before insulation is applied. Insulation shall be applied on clean dry surfaces only. Apply duct and pipe insulation only after systems have been pressure tested and balanced.

B. Insulation work shall be installed by competent applicators regularly employed by

insulating contractors or manufacturers.

C. Exposed insulated ducts and piping shall be provided with a finish of an adequate surface for a final coat of paint. Pre-sized jackets, aluminum, vinyl and other pre-finished jackets are acceptable as installed, however, canvas and similar material shall be filled and sealed or dipped if necessary to provide a good surface for painting.

D. At contractor's option, canvas jacket may be replaced by glass cloth.

E. Vapor barriers on cold surfaces and piping must be continuous through sleeves, hangers,

supports, etc. Stapling of vapor barrier jackets will not be permitted.

F. Insulation is not required on vertical downspouts except at vertical piping to roof drains or short stub water connections from main line to plumbing fixtures.


G. Provide saddles, shields, metal protectors and other appurtenances necessary to prevent

crushing of insulation at hangers, rollers, supports and anchors. Provide rigid insulation blocks at saddles.

3.2 COLD PIPING INSULATION

A. Insulate the following piping systems with cold piping fiberglass insulation of specified thicknesses.

Type of System or Pipe Insulation Thickness

1. Domestic cold water piping. 1"

B. Installation of fiberglass insulation shall be as follows:

1. Pipe: Butt all joints firmly together. Cover joints with 3" butt strips. Smoothly secure all jacket laps and joints strips with adhesive. Self-sealing laps shall be applied according to manufacturers recommendations. Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed off with a vapor barrier coating at all fittings and valves and at intervals of 21 feet on continuous runs.

2. Fittings and Valves: Insulate with molded fiberglass fittings, segments of pipe covering or firmly compressed foil faced fiberglass blankets. Secure in place with 20 gauge corrosion resistant wire and a smooth coat of insulating cement. Vapor seal by applying a layer of open weave glass cloth embedded between two coats of vapor barrier mastic. Lap glass cloth 2" onto adjacent pipe insulation. In lieu of glass cloth and two coats of vapor barrier mastic, premolded fitting and valve covers may be used. Covers shall overlap adjoining pipe insulation, have all edges sealed with vapor barrier mastic, and have ends of covers taped with 2" pressure sensitive vinyl tape.

C. Refrigerant suction piping shall be insulated with ½” thick elastomeric insulation with joints

sealed airtight. Provide UV protectant finish approved by insulation manufacturer on exterior piping.

3.3 HOT PIPING INSULATION

A. Insulate the following piping systems with fiberglass insulation of thicknesses as specified.

Type of Service or Pipe Insulation Thickness 1. Domestic hot water, tempered hot water

and hot water recirculating piping. 1"

B. Installation of fiberglass insulation shall be as follows:

1. Pipe: Butt all joints firmly together. Cover joints with 3" butt strips. Smoothly secure all jacket laps and joints strips with adhesive. Self-sealing laps shall be applied according to manufacturers recommendations.

2. Fittings and Valves: Insulate with molded fiberglass fittings, segments of pipe covering or firmly compressed foil faced fiberglass blankets. Secure in place with 20 gauge corrosion resistant wire and a smooth coat of insulating cement. Apply a layer of open weave glass cloth embedded between two coats of mastic. Lap glass cloth 2" onto adjacent pipe insulation. In lieu of glass cloth and two coats of mastic, premolded fitting and valve covers may be used.

END OF SECTION

DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

Section 15290 - Ductwork Insulation PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Ductwork insulation for new galvanized steel ductwork.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting insulation jackets. B. Section 15815 – Metal Ducts.

1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission

Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. C. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. D. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. E. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. F. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. G. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. H. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. I. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340. B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each

service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable

workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three years experience.



A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density

and thickness. C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE BLANKET (FB)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens/Corning 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) Johns Manville b) Knauf c) Certainteed B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value : ASTM C518, 0.28 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. 4. Density: 0.75 lb/cu ft. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032

inch. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape 1. Manufacturers: a) Owens/Corning b) Knauf c) Certainteed. 2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with

pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible

connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal

ends of insulation. D. For ductwork exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces below 10

feet above finished floor, finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting, aluminum jacket.

E. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapour barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapour

barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapour barrier with staples, tape, or wires.

3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.

4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapour barrier adhesive.

5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

3.3 TOLERANCE

A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at

normal conditions, as materials indicated. 3.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. NEW INTERIOR CONCEALED HVAC SUPPLY DUCTS MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD-APPLIED IN BARRIER JACKET INCHES REQ’D Glass Fiber FB 1-1/2 Yes None

END OF SECTION

PLUMBING 15400-1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15400 - Plumbing


A. All piping, fittings, valves, hangers and other accessories specified and shown on the drawings for renovations and additions to existing domestic cold, hot water and hot water recirculating piping systems.

B. All piping, fittings, hangers, and other accessories specified and shown on the drawings

for renovations and additions to existing sanitary waste, grease waste and vent piping systems including all necessary excavating and backfilling.

C. All piping, fittings and valves specified and shown on the drawings for roughing in and

final connection to equipment provided by AAFES.

D. Testing, flushing, and cleaning, for all piping systems and chlorination of the domestic water piping system.

E. All piping, fittings, pressure regulators, hangers and other accessories specified and

shown on the drawings for renovations and additions to existing natural gas piping system.

F. All water treatment systems for ice makers, post mix, etc. as specified and shown on the

drawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with current edition of following:

1. Pipe and fittings shall conform to applicable ANSI, AWWA, ASTM, and USASI standards referenced for those products.

B. No plumbing fixture, special equipment, device or piping shall be installed which will

provide cross connection or interconnection between distributing supply for drinking water or domestic water and polluted supply or waste so as to make possible backflow or back-siphonage of sewage or polluted water into potable water supply system.

C. Where possibility of back-siphonage exists, water supplied to fixture shall be introduced

through a suitable vacuum breaker installed at code minimum distance above fixture. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit certificates of compliance for pipe, fittings and valves specified under this section.

B. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 for the following equipment:

1. Floor drains and floor sinks. 2. Cleanouts.

C. Provide all identification, operating instructions, parts lists, wiring and control diagrams for

all equipment installed under this section.

D. All items specified in this section shall be manufactured in the United States. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC COLD, HOT WATER AND HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PIPING SYSTEMS

PLUMBING 15400-2

A. See Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods for piping materials.

B. Each supply riser and fixture supply, including hot and cold water shall have a separate

water hammer arrestor of the same size as the supply pipe line to the fixture. Water hammer arrestors shall be sized per P.D.I. - WH201. Air chambers are not acceptable.

C. All supply connections to plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be copper piping up to

face of wall and chromium plated brass piping and fittings for exposed connections. Supply piping shall have screwed connections on both ends for piping through wall. Each fixture shall have a shut off valve at the fixture.

D. Each water connection to a plumbing fixture or item of equipment having a submerged

inlet or hose end attached shall be provided with a vacuum breaker to prevent back-siphonage of contaminated water into drinking supply, approved by local and state health authorities.

2.2 SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS

A. See Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods for piping materials. 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Unless noted otherwise, floor drains shall conform to the following:

1. Floor drains in slab-on-grade-floors shall not be flashed, shall have black iron bodies with nickel bronze covers and strainers, and must be located to properly serve associated equipment and be accessible for cleaning as approved by the Contracting Officer. Floor drains in floors above grade shall be flashed.

2. Floor drains shall have covers and strainers securely fastened by countersunk, tamperproof, brass machine screws.

3. All floor drains shall have a 6" minimum strainer size. On floor drains larger than 2", strainer size shall be 3" or more larger than the drain size unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings.

4. Floor drain sizes shall be as shown on the drawings.

B. All floor drains shall be by the same manufacturer. Furnish and install a deep seal "P" trap at each floor drain. See floor drain schedule for model numbers.

C. Manufacturers for floor drains shall be Zurn, JR Smith, Wade, or Josam.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. All cleanouts shall be by the same manufacturer.

1. Exposed piping or piping above ceiling: Cast iron body ferrule with brass raised head, straight threaded coating plug having tapered shoulder.

2. Unfinished floors: Cast iron floor cleanout, adjustable threaded housing, polished bronze round scoriated top, bronze tapered plug, vandal proof. Zurn Model No. ZB-1400-BP-VP.

3. Finished floors: Cast iron floor cleanout, adjustable threaded housing, round polished nickel bronze top, bronze taper plug, vandal proof. Zurn Model No. ZN-1400-BP-VP.

4. Walls: Cast iron ferrule, bronze plug, and vandal proof stainless steel flat access cover. Zurn Model No. Z-1441-BP-VP.

5. Carpeted floors: Cast iron floor cleanout, adjustable threaded housing, bronze taper plug, polished bronze round top (installed below carpet) with carpet marker. Zurn Model No. ZB-1400-BP-CM.

B. Manufacturers for cleanouts shall be Zurn, Wade, Josam, or JR Smith.

PLUMBING 15400-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COLD AND HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Above grade water piping:

1. Piping shall be run true, parallel with walls, centered in hangers and sleeves, securely supported by hangers or supports independently of connections and sleeves, anchored as required to control movement. Pipe and fittings arranged as called for and as required to permit free, unrestrained, noiseless expansion and contraction and freedom from strain on equipment.

2. All screwed piping shall be carefully cut, reamed, threaded and worked into place with springing, using a small amount of prepared lubricant on the outside threads. Branch connections shall have three elbow spring pieces to allow for movement due to expansion.

3. Valves and unions or flanges shall be suitable located to isolate each unit, branch circuit or section of piping to facilitate maintenance and/or removal of all equipment and apparatus.

4. All piping shall be installed so as to be free to expand without injury to equipment or building.

5. Plumbing water mains must pitch down to drain completely through fixtures or equipment below; provide accessible unions, brass plugs or hose valves at low points.

6. Plumbing water mains must pitch to vent completely through fixtures or equipment above.

7. All risers or down-feed drops shall be firmly supported and blocking done as necessary to prevent hammer due to vibration. Provide drain valves at bottom of risers.

3.2 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS WITHIN THE BUILDING

A. General:

1. Before being placed in service and after testing is completed, all potable water piping shall be disinfected as specified herein, in accordance with AWWA Standard C601-54 and as required by the local Health Department codes.

2. Chlorine may be applied by the use of chlorine gas-water mixture, direct chlorine-gas feed or a mixture of calcium hypochlorite and water. If calcium hypochlorite is used, it shall be equivalent to commercial products such as Perchloron, HTH or Maxochlor. The powder shall be mixed with water to form a paste thinned to a slurry and pumped or injected into the lines.

3. If direct chlorine-gas feed is used, it shall be fed with either a solution-feed chlorinator or by a pressure-feed chlorinator.

4. The lines and fixtures shall be flushed thoroughly after chlorination to remove all foreign matter.

5. Injection shall start only when all fixtures are connected and ready for operation. 6. A service cock or riser (3/4" to at least 1-1/4") shall be provided by the Contractor

and located at the point of connection to water service. The disinfecting agent shall be injected into and through the system from this cock or riser only.

7. Chlorine, either gas or liquid, or calcium hypochlorite (liquid or powered) shall be used as a disinfecting agent as approved in federal and AWWA procedures.

8. The disinfecting agent shall be injected by a proportioning pump or device through the service cock or riser slowly and continuously at an even rate.

9. All valves shall be fully opened at least four times during injection and the residual checked with orthotolidine solution.

10. When the chlorine residual concentration indicated not less than 50 parts per million at all outlets, all fixtures and water supply valves shall be closed.

11. The residual shall then be retained for a period of not less than eight hours. 12. After retention, the residual upon checking at most outlets, shall not be less than

ten parts per million. If less, the disinfection must be repeated as described above.

13. If satisfactory, all fixtures shall be flushed until residual or orthotolidine tests are

PLUMBING 15400-4

not greater than the water supply. 14. Contractor shall furnish Contracting Officer or his authorized representative with

sterilization report indicating potable water to be safe from contamination. A copy of the sterilization report shall be included in the O & M manuals under test reports and shall be submitted to the Base 355 AMDS/SGPB.

3.3 FLUSHING WATER PIPING

A. After the piping has been chlorinated, each run of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed out so as to remove all foreign matter from the lines. Flushing will ordinarily be done by opening drain valves along the lines.

B. Sufficient flushing water shall be introduced into the mains to produce a velocity of not

less than 4 ft. per second, and this flow rate shall be continued until the discharge is clean and clear and does not show evidences of silt or foreign matter when a sample is visually inspected.

3.4 SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM

A. Size of soil, waste and vent stacks and branch piping shall be as indicated on the drawings, but in no case less than required by the provisions of the applicable codes.

B. Where possible, cast iron sewers and branches shall pitch down 1/4" per foot, but not

less than 1%. Branches, arms and connections, shall be sloped 1/4" in 1'-0" where possible and provide with adequate hangers as specified elsewhere.

C. Interior underground, underfloor or on-ground piping, shall be continuously bedded with

depressions for hubs on compacted sand or gravel to undisturbed soil for a minimum depth of 6" under pipe.

D. Connections to soil, waste and drain stacks shall be at 45 degrees; those to vent stacks

may be at 45 degrees or 90 degrees except vent setbacks shall be connected to 45 degrees to soil, waste or drain stack.

E. Connections to stacks and sewers shall be arranged so that operation of any fixture will

not cause fluctuation of water level in traps of other fixtures.

F. All thread joints shall be made up with pipe joint compound applied to male thread only. Threads exposed after joints are made up shall be painted to prevent rust. Teflon tape may be used at Contractor's option.

G. Junctions of screwed pipe to bell and spigot cast iron shall be made with ring or half

coupling screwed to end of galvanized pipe to form spigot end.

H. Junctions in all drainage lines shall be made with "Y" branches or 1/8" bends, unless closeness of connection prevents it, in which case, where direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical, sanitary tees may be used upon the approval of the Contracting Officer's superintendent.

I. Compression joint installation for cast iron soil pipe:

1. Fold and insert the one piece neoprene rubber gasket into the hub which has

been properly cleaned. 2. Apply gasket lubricant to the spigot and inside of the gasket. 3. Push, draw or drive the spigot into the gasketed hub with a pulling tool or suitable

device. 3.5 VENTING

A. All plumbing fixtures shall be vented to prevent siphoning of traps. Venting shown on plans is minimum required and vents and vent stacks shall be increased in size and/or number and relocated as required, to prevent trap siphoning and to comply with

PLUMBING 15400-5

applicable codes, ordinances, statutes, regulations of all governmental bodies, without increase in contract price.

B. A vent stack shall be run parallel to each soil or waste stack to receive branch vents from

fixtures and traps. Each vent stack shall originate from a soil or waste pipe at its base. Each soil or waste stack and each vent stack shall be carried through the roof. Where possible, soil, waste, or vent stacks shall be combined before passing through the roof so as to have as few roof openings as possible. Pipes running close to walls shall be offset away from such walls before passing through the roof to permit proper flashing. All vent pipes passing through the roof shall be provided with cast iron increasers one size larger than the pipe but in no case less than 4" and shall extend at least 6" above roof.

C. All horizontal vent pipes shall grade up to meet the requirements of the local and state

codes.

D. Vent risers and branches shall connect to the soil and waste risers above waste of highest fixture.

3.6 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts for sanitary drainage systems shall be installed not more than 50 feet apart, including the developed length of the cleanout pipe, in horizontal drainage lines of 4 inches diameter or less. Cleanouts shall be not more than 100 feet apart, including the developed length of the cleanout pipe, in horizontal drainage lines of over six inches to ten inches diameter. A cleanout shall be provided at, or no more than four feet above the base of each vertical soil or waste stack and storm water conductor. Cleanouts shall be installed at such other points as may be necessary for adequate rodding out of drainage piping systems. Cleanouts shall be set flush with floor or wall surfaces.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING SPECIALITIES

A. Install all plumbing specialties including but not limited to floor drains, cleanouts, hose, regulators, water hammer arrestors, etc. in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and recommendations.

END OF SECTION

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15450-1

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Section 15450 - Plumbing Fixtures and Trim


A. Provide all plumbing fixtures, including supply and waste fittings, stops, trim, brackets, carriers, etc. specified, shown on the drawings and required for complete installation.

B. Provide all piping, fittings, valves, trim, stops, etc. specified, shown on the drawings and

required for rough-in and final connection to Equipment furnished by AAFES. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with current edition of the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures (land use), FS-WW-P-541. 2. Water Conservation Requirement of the Federal Energy Policy Act.

B. All items specified in this section shall be manufactured in the United States.

C. No plumbing fixture, special equipment, device or piping shall be installed which will

provide cross connection or interconnection between potable water system and polluted water or sewage system so as to make possible backflow or back siphonage of sewage or polluted water into the potable water supply system.

D. Where possibility of back siphonage exists, water supplied to fixture shall in introduced

through a suitable vacuum breaker installed at code minimum height. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 for the following:

1. Plumbing fixtures and trim. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

A. Fixtures shall have water, drain, waste, soil, vent, and other connections as called for. Each water connection to fixture shall have an air gap or vacuum breaker. Water connection sizes are minimum and must correspond to manufacturer's standards.

B. Carriers for wall hung fixtures shall be selected for the particular fixture, piping

arrangement and building conditions prevailing at each location.

C. Special sinks, where wall hung, shall have equivalent chair carriers specifically designed for the fixture.

D. Plumbing fixtures shall be according to the schedule as indicated on drawings. The

manufacturer's model numbers have been used to establish function and quality. Other manufacturers where listed must be equal to manufacturer specified.

E. Where fixtures, faucets, etc. are specified as single source and no other manufacturer is

listed, the contractor shall furnish the manufacturer specified.

F. Model numbers are representative only. Incomplete model numbers do not warrant deletion of specific features or requirements contained in the specification.

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15450-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

A. All fixtures shall be set firm and true, connected to all piping services ready for use. Fixtures shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. Caulk opening between wall and plumbing fixtures with mildew-resistant, white acrylic-emulsion sealant.

3.2 AAFES FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. Provide rough-ins and final connections to all AAFES furnished equipment including shut off valves, piping, traps, etc. necessary to connect up equipment after it has be installed in place.

B. Install all faucets, sinks drains, tailpieces, overflows, traps, etc. furnished loose with all

AAFES furnished equipment.

C. All exposed piping readily visible for AAFES furnished equipment shall be chrome plated brass pipe and fittings. Braces for support of exposed piping shall be chrome plated.

D. Pending installation of AAFES furnished equipment, all service lines shall be suitably

capped, plugged and protected. All water lines shall be valved.

E. Furnish vacuum breakers, pressure regulators solenoid valves, traps, piping, etc. as required for installation of equipment.

END OF SECTION

PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 15782-1

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Section 15782 – Packaged, Outdoor, Center-Station Air-Handling Units

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories, where specified

1. Direct-expansion cooling. 2. Gas furnace. 3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section with factory mounted

controller and sensors. 4. Adapter curbs. 5. Variable speed supply fan (where scheduled). 6. Bacnet controller to allow stand-alone operation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.

C. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

D. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

E. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Division 1.

B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with Division 1.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. ARI Compliance:


1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Daikin - McQuay. 2. Trane. 3. American Standard. 4. Carrier.

2.2 CASING

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.

1. Provide hinged access panels for filter, controls, and fan motor access. Panels shall be operable without tools.

B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.

C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and

temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.

4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of coated galvanized steel sheet, or other corrosion resistant rigid material, a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1.

1. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.

E. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2.3 FANS

A. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.

B. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.

2.4 COILS

A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type distributor.

2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Two on units larger than 6 tons.

B. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

C. Refrigeration Specialties:

1. Refrigerant: 410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.

2.6 AIR FILTRATION

A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Pleated: Minimum MERV 8. 2. Depth: 2” pleated disposable.


2.7 GAS FURNACE

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54.

B. Burners: Stainless steel.

1. Fuel: Natural gas. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame

sensor.

C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

D. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.

E. Safety Controls:

1. Gas Control Valve: Two stage. 2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly

containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.

2.8 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to operating rod or gear train in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

1. Damper Motor and Economizer controller: Provide factory mounted sensors, controller and actuator to provide dry bulb economizer control.

2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as scheduled, with bird screen and hood.

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION

A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Provide Bacnet compatible controller capable of providing stand-alone control of rooftop unit and eventual connection to controls by section 15952.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

B. Adapter Curb: Full perimeter sheet metal curb with wood nailer; neoprene sealing strips, and internal insulation, designed and constructed to allow new unit to sit on existing curb and connect to existing supply and return duct connections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and curb dimensions before equipment installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Adapter Curb: Install curb level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.

B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with NFPA-54 and applicable requirements in Division 15 Section “Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to

confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.5 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop air handling units.

END OF SECTION

METAL DUCTS 15815-1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15815 – Metal Ducts

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rectangular and round metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct penetrations and fire-damper installations in fire-rated floors, partitions, and walls.

2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation. 3. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounted

access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 4. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 5. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final adjusting of

manual-volume dampers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x degree F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W. 1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For duct and sealing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work. 2. Fittings. 3. Seam and joint construction. 4. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, seismic

restraints, and duct attachment. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless otherwise

indicated.

METAL DUCTS 15815-2

C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless otherwise indicated.


A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written

recommendations. C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper maintained

through fabrication and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized,

sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.

2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.

3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for building materials.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod or galvanized

rods with threads painted after installation. 2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal

and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2.4 ROUND DUCT FABRICATION

METAL DUCTS 15815-3

A. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for static pressure of 2” W.C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.

B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.

F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to

building lines; avoid diagonal runs. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces unless indicated otherwise. Do not encase horizontal

runs in solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.

J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

K. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior

walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

L. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,

install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg: Transverse joints.

C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.

3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round and rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch

intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet (5 m) and at each floor.

METAL DUCTS 15815-4

D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures. 3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.

B. Clean existing ductwork in modified systems with HEPA vacuum.

END OF SECTION

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15820 – Duct Accessories



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Flexible ducts. 2. Flexible connectors. 3. Duct accessory hardware.


1. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

1. 3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manual-volume dampers. 3. Flexible ducts. 4. Flexible connectors.


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled,

exposed matte finish.

C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized,

sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-2

A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide

attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch wide, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

C. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with

polychloroprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp, and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2-inch thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.

1. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fibrous-

glass tape, and nylon hanging cord. 2. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.

C. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive, 1/2-inch wg negative.

2.4 ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a

worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size.

C. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

B. Install volume dampers as indicated on plans.

C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

END OF SECTION

FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS

15825-1

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Section 15825 – Food Service Ventilation Systems



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide:

1. Complete Food Service Ventilating systems including canopy, filters, lights, ductwork, chemical extinguishing system, and gas shut-off valves.

2. Extinguishing system may be factory installed or field fabricated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. National Fire protection Association, NFPA: a. 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. b. 96: Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-

Laden Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment. c. 17A: Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems.

2. National Sanitary Foundation, NSF:

a. Seal of approval.

3. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL: a. UL listed and labeled components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 1.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit layout of entire extinguishing system including nozzles, piping, and fused links.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Exhaust Hoods:

1. Captiveaire

B. Extinguishing System:

1. Ansul


15825-2

2.2 CANOPY HOODS:

A. Construction:

1. 18 gauge stainless steel, Type 304. 2. Canopy internal supports consisting of angles and channels to reinforce and

prevent vibration and fatigue. 3. Canopy fabricated as one piece and shipped as one piece.

B. Filter:

1. Canopy filter housing of same material as canopy liner, complete with UL

classified extractor type aluminum grease filters full length. 2. Filter shall provide constant pressure drop. 3. Filter housing shall terminate at bottom with pitched drip tray full length of canopy

and shall be equipped with grease cup for easy removal and daily cleaning. 4. Filter shall be large enough for air to strike it at all temperatures.

C. Lights:

1. Vapor-proof lights with plastic coated glass lens spaced on 3 foot centers, and

wired to switch on front face of hood; provide bulbs for fixture.

D. Extinguishing System:

1. System shall protect range hoods, exhaust ducts, filters and appliances. 2. Automatic operation initiated by fusible metallic links with temperature ratings in

accordance with below referenced installation manual. 3. Piping:

a. Pipe: Standard weight, Schedule 40; black steel; chrome-sleeved where exposed.

b. Fittings: Malleable-iron, ductile-iron, steel or cast-iron; of standard weight.

c. Pipe reamed and cleaned before assembly and after assembly.

4. Fire alarm contacts: a. Set of dry contacts for fire alarm initiation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which exhaust hoods are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HOODS

A. Install hoods and extinguishing systems as indicated on Drawings and in accord with NFPA 96 and 17A.

B. Provide all miscellaneous framing, anchors, and brackets necessary to properly support

hoods.

C. Install piping and extinguishing systems in compliance with manufacturers requirements and recommendations.



15825-3

A. Start-Up:

1. Provide start-up supervision. 2. Provide instruction to AAFES Personnel on system operation. 3. Provide field certification by system manufacturer. 4. Provide acceptance test observed by Base Fire Department personnel. Test

extinguishing system in conjunction with fire alarm tests. Contractor to provide all material and labor to conduct the test(s).

END OF SECTION

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855-1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15855 – Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.


1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and

grilles. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a

sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.

2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.

3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components.


A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the

Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855-2

A. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Krueger. 2. Titus. 3. Price.

B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.


A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and

accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION

FANS 15872-1

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Section 15872 - Fans



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide exhaust fans as shown on the drawings and as specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accord with Division 1.

B. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories; and the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. 4. Materials gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

C. Maintenance data for fans, for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual specified in

Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.

B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70

"National Electrical Code." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,

with protective crating and covering. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the installation of adapter curbs with Division 7.

B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

FANS 15872-2

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.

1. Cook (Loren) Co. 2. Greenheck Fan Corp.

2.2 FANS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.

B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation

at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 1. Fan Shafts: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than

70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.

C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. Service Factor: 1.4.

D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic. E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed

pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. 1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan

cabinet.

F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median like "Rating Life" (AFBMA L) of 200,000 calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.

B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venture inlet cone.

C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball

bearings. 3. Pulleys: Cast iron, adjustable pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, ½ inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall

sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops. 4. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated galvanized steel curbs with internal insulation. 5. Accessories to meet NFPA-96 as scheduled.

a. Include curb extensions as required to locate fan discharge minimum of 40” above roof deck.


FANS 15872-3

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of fans.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated.

1. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with stainless steel hardware.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air handling units for service and

maintenance. 3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15 sections. Make final duct connections with flexible connections.

B. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:

1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16. 2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Section 23 0900. 3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National

Electrical Code. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

END OF SECTION

AIR SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15993-1

DIVISION 15 - MECHANCIAL Section 15993 – Air Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Test, adjust and balance of air systems as indicated on the drawings. 2. Any changes in pulleys, belts and dampers or the addition of dampers as required

for correct balance of the system as recommended by TAB Agency, at no cost to AAFES.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Heating, ventilating, air conditioning equipment shall be completely installed and in continuous operation to accomplish the testing, adjusting and balancing work specified. Complete air balancing prior to piping systems balancing.

B. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing when outside conditions approximate design

conditions for heating and cooling functions or when the system is operating at design capacity.

C. The Architect's Representative will be present during testing and balancing to verify that

specified procedures are followed. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Employ only qualified personnel to perform testing and balancing work.

B. Submit evidence that the personnel who will perform the testing and balancing of the project systems are qualified personnel for review and approval by the Architect prior to performing the work.

C. Submit a list of completed projects successfully tested and balanced by the submitted

qualified personnel for review and approval, by the Architect, prior to performing the work.

D. When the Contractor does not have qualified personnel on his staff he shall employ them from other firms or subcontract the work to a test and balance firm for this type of work.

E. Perform all corrective measures caused by faulty installation. Retest, readjust and rebalance

systems until satisfactory results are achieved. 1.5 DEFINITION

A. Qualified personnel are:

1. Personnel who have been certified by one of the following organizations. a. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council. b. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Data Sheet on each item of testing equipment for Architect's approval. Include name


of device, manufacturer's name, model number, latest date of calibration, and correction factors.

B. Submit a report containing all test data and other related information recorded during testing

and balancing, placed on appropriate forms for Architect's review and approval. Reports shall certify that the methods used and results achieved are as specified.

1.7 REVERIFICATION

A. During Substantial Completion Inspection, a percentage (not more than 5%) of the recorded data will be subject to reverification by the Architect/Engineer. Take instrument readings as directed. Test points will be in normally accessible locations and randomly selected by the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR BALANCE INSTRUMENTS: (Ranges shown are guides. Actual ranges used are subject to

Architect's approval)

A. Velometer with probes and pitot tube.

B. Rotating vane anemometer.

C. ASHRAE Standard pitot tubes, stainless steel 5/16 in. outside diameter, lengths 18" and 36".

D. Magnehelic differential air pressure gages, 0 to 0.5", 0 to 1.0" and 0 to 5.0" water pressure ranges, each arranged as a portable unit for use with a standard Pitot tube.

E. Combination inclined-vertical portable manometer, range 0 to 5.0" water.

F. Portable type hook gage, range 0 to 12" water.

G. Portable flexible U-tube manometer, magnetic mounting clips, range 0 to 18" water.

H. Static pressure probe for induction Unit.

I. Conical or pyramidal shaped hood.

2.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MEASURING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Insertion thermometers, with graduations at 0.5 F.

B. Sling psychrometer.

C. Tachometer, centrifugal type.

D. Revolution counter.

E. Clamp-On volt-ammeter.

F. Portable recorders for temperature and humidity. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 AIR SYSTEMS: Test, adjust and balance systems in accord with the following:

A. Preliminary:

1. Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of all equipment to be tested, including


air terminals. Inspect all system components for proper installation and operation. 2. Use manufacturers' ratings for all equipment to make calculations except where field

test shows ratings to be impractical. 3. Verify that all instruments are accurately calibrated and maintained. 4. Install clean filters.

B. Central System:

1. Test, adjust and record supply fan RPM to design requirements within the limits of

mechanical equipment provided. 2. Test and record motor voltage and running amperes including motor nameplate data

and starter heater ratings. 3. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply, exhaust and return ducts, determine and

record cfm at fans and adjust fans to design cfm. 4. Test and record system static pressure, suction and discharge. 5. Test and adjust system for design outside air, cfm. 6. Test and adjust systems for design recirculated air, cfm.

C. Distribution: Adjust zones or branch ducts to proper design cfm, supply and return.

D. Air Terminals:

1. Identify each air terminal from reports as to location and determine required flow

reading. 2. Test and adjust each air terminal to within 10% of design requirement. 3. Test procedure on air terminals shall include comparison of specified fpm velocity

and observed velocity, adjustment of terminal, and comparison of specified cfm and observed cfm after adjustment.

4. Adjust flow patterns from air terminal units to minimize drafts to extend design and equipment permits.

E. Verification:

1. Prepare summation of readings of observed cfm for each system, compare with

specified cfm and verify that duct losses are within specified allowable range. Determine coil and filter static pressure drops.

2. Verify design cfm at fans as described in 3.01.B.3 above. 3.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM

A. The ventilating contractor shall set and adjust automatically operated devices to achieve specified sequence of operations.

B. Testing organization shall verify all controls for proper calibration and list those controls

requiring adjustment by the contractor. 3.3 REPORT SUBMITTAL

A. Fill in test results on appropriate forms.

B. Submit three certified copies of test reports to the Architect for approval.

C. Include in report a list of instruments used and last date of calibration.

END OF SECTION

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16060 – Electrical Demolition for Remodeling

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Interior demolition, removal and abandonment of interior electrical systems, including communications and special systems including fire alarm and telephone.

B. Cleaning and repair of existing equipment to remain.


A. Section 01732 - Selective Demolition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching work: As specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Contracting Officer before disturbing existing installation.

D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. E. Contractor shall verify and or test ballasts, transformers, and other devices or equipment to be

removed do not contain and PCB or other hazardous materials requiring special disposal. Contractor is responsible for all testing and disposal costs.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with store manager minimum 14 days in advance.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during all

phases of construction.

D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Contracting Officer and store manager at least 14 days before partially or completely disabling system. Outages shall only occur during non-customer hours and be ready for use a minimum of two hours prior to next customer hours. Minimize outage duration to fullest extent possible. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted.

Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Contracting Officer and local fire department at least 14 days before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-2

outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete

and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Contracting Officer and store manager at least 7 days before partially or completely disabling system. Outages shall only occur during non-customer hours and be ready for use a minimum of two hours prior to next customer hours. Minimize outage duration to fullest extent possible. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

G. Existing Intrusion Detection System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is

complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Contracting Officer and Provost Marshall at least 7 days before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.3 DEMOLITION EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Demolish existing electrical work under provisions of Section 01732, and this Section.

B. Remove existing installations to accommodate requirements for new construction.

C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply or next active device to remain.

D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling

finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.

F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.

G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has

been removed.

H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.

I. Disconnect and remove certain parking lot pole mounted luminaires. Remove concrete bases

completely.

J. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work.

K. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace

damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

END OF SECTION

CONDUIT 16111-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16111 - Conduit


A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Nonmetallic conduit. F. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. G. Fittings and conduit bodies.


A. Section 07240 – Roofing Penetrations. B. Section 07270 – Firestopping.

C. Section 16130 – Boxes.

D. Section 16170 – Grounding and Bonding.

E. Section 16190 – Supporting Devices.

F. Section 16195 – Electrical Identification.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Conduit and tubing shall meet the requirements of the latest editions of following

standards: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit

and Cable Assemblies. 4. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 5. NECA "Standard of Installation." 6. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel

Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. Limit conductor cross sectional area to no more than 40%

of conduit cross sectional area.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 – Submittals.

CONDUIT 16111-2

B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal

conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, fittings, conduit bodies.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01720 – Project Record Documents. B. Accurately record actual routing of interior conduits larger than 2 inches on project record

documents and of all underground conduits regardless of size. For locations of underground conduits provide dimensions indicating locations and depth.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for

purpose specified and shown.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide

appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown schematically on Drawings unless dimensioned. Route as

required to complete wiring system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Size: ¾” inch unless otherwise specified. B. Underground Installations: 1. Within Five Feet Inside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate

metal conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

2. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit. D. Wet and Damp Interior Locations Above Floor Slab: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate

metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. Use wet and/or damp location fittings. E. Dry Interior Locations Above Floor Slab (Including Hollow Stud Partitions):

CONDUIT 16111-3

1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.

2. Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2.2 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit, threaded

connections.

2.3 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil thick. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to

match conduit. 2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type or set screw type.

2.7 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.


A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. C. Provide supports as required by NEC maximum distance between conduit support tables.

Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

CONDUIT 16111-4

D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. Where possible, support conduits in ceiling cavity space at the level of structural roof joists.

E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel;

provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduits. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section

16190. DO NOT SUPPORT CONDUITS DIRECTLY FROM ROOF DECK. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for

temporary supports. H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Fasten individual conduits to roof joists. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit under slab directly from point-to-point where possible. Avoid conduit

crossovers where possible. M. Do not install conduit in floor slab on grade or floor slab above grade. Run conduits 1-1/2”

and below on grade at bottom of gravel sub-base. Conduits larger than 1-1/2” shall be trenched in below grade so top of conduit is at top of grade.

N. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding

104 degrees F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends before joining. Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe

nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. Use only an approved hotbox bender to make bends in nonmetallic conduit.

S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and

wet locations and to cast boxes. T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes (no more than

two 90-degree bends for conduits containing telephone cables, fire alarm cables, intrusions system cables, local area network (LAN) cables, etc.). Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit

system. V. Provide expansion/deflection couplings to accommodate expansion and deflection where

conduit crosses seismic joints or expansion joints. Such couplings shall have braided copper bonding jumpers.

CONDUIT 16111-5

W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves less than 20 feet long and nipples.

X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170. Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195. AA. Where conduits for telephone cables, cash register cables, etc. are stubbed from wall

boxes or cabinets to above accessible ceilings, turn conduits out of wall approximately 12 inches above accessible ceiling. Coordinate location with other trades. Provide bushing on end of conduit to prevent signal cable contact with sharp metal. Provide tag on end of conduit indicating type and location of utilization outlet (example: TELEPHONE - BREAK ROOM).

BB. Where conduits enter boxes and cabinets, provide bushings with plastic insulated throat

for conduits 1 inch and larger. CC. Seismic Bracing: provide seismic bracing for suspended conduits 2” or larger and trapeze

hangers at interval of 20 feet or less. Bracing shall consists of 1-5/8" square channel both parallel and perpendicular to conduit, and fastened to roof joist at 45 degree angle relative to vertical.

DD. AC and MC cable shall not be acceptable for use on this project. Except as specified in

Section 16150. EE. Paint exposed conduit to match adjacent surface.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07270. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack

with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.

END OF SECTION

BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16123 – Building Wire and Cable


A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution

Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable type.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of

use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 01720 – Project Record Documents. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section

with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish building wire and wiring connectors listed and classified by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper. C. Wire and cable routing indicated is schematic unless dimensioned.


1.9 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact

routing and lengths required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN-2/THWN-2. E. Use standard color coding for phase A, phase B, phase C, neutral and ground: Insulation: 1. 208/120 volt circuits: black, red, blue, white, green. 2. 480277 volt circuits: brown, orange, yellow, grey, green with white stripe.


A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Use wiring methods indicated. B. All branch circuit and feeder wiring shall be installed in raceways.

3.4 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. C. Use stranded conductors for power circuits. D. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for fused control circuits. G. Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120

volt branch circuits with homeruns longer than 75 feet. H. Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277

volt branch circuits with homeruns longer than 200 feet.


I. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. J. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. K. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. L. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. M. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no

perceptible temperature rise. N. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape

uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

O. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices

and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. P. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and

taps, 10 AWG and smaller. Q. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each

conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.

3.6 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS A. Perform tests after cables have been installed in raceways, but before connection to lugs.

Notify Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to cable tests. B. Measure resistance line-to-ground using a commercial meggar tester. Apply 1000 volts

DC to cables 2 AWG and larger and record DC insulation resistance for each circuit conductor. Minimum acceptable level is 50 megohms.

C. Record test results and include in O and M manual.

END OF SECTION

BOXES 16130-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16130 - Boxes


A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals under provisions of Section 01300 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, materials, and accessories.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01720 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project

record documents.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment

supported; include male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box

manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16141.

BOXES 16130-2

D. Weatherproof exterior boxes to house receptacles: Receptacle shall be installed flush

with the wall. The receptacle cover shall have ports to allow two 3/8” diameter cords to pass through it when closed. Enclosure must have gasket between enclosure and mounting surface and between cover and sleeve to assure that the enclosure is weathertight in use per NEC 410-57b. Hubbell WP-700, or equal. Failure to provide devices will result in removal and reinstallation per specification at Contractors expense.

2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16160. C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat-flanged, surface mounted

junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover

screws.


A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,

equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. E. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. F. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. G. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices as specified in Section 16141. H. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. I. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas

only. J. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from

ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. K. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. L. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches,

and backsplashes. M. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. N. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for

switches, manual starters, interval timers, thermostats, and similar devices. Align wall mounted boxes for receptacles, telephone jacks, local area network outlets, and the like. Where such devices are shown in close proximity on plans, locate adjacent outlets with no more than 4 inch space between adjacent boxes.

BOXES 16130-3

O. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in all areas except mechanical rooms, mezzanines, and electrical closets.

P. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, locate flush mounting boxes in masonry wall to

require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

Q. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches

separation. R. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow

for surface finish thickness. After finished wall material is applied, provide box extensions for all boxes with setback more than 1/8 inch.

S. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. T. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. U. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. V. DO NOT FASTEN BOXES TO CEILING SUPPORT WIRES OR DIRECTLY TO ROOF

DECK. W. Support boxes independently of conduit. X. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional

box. Provide metal barrier plates between gangs to separate line voltage from low voltage systems and where voltage between adjacent light switches exceeds 300 volts.

Y. Use 4” square box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Z. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather, interiors of walk-in

refrigeration equipment, and wet locations. Provide vapor seals at conduit entrances to these boxes. Use U.L. listed sealing compound.

AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast

metal box in other locations. Z. Provide pull boxes in feeder circuits as required but at least every 150 feet in straight

runs. AA. Identify all junction boxes by panel and circuit number on outside cover with legible

permanent ink marker on outside face of cover.

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected to allow accessibility of box

and proper operation of equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. C. Seal floor boxes as recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 CLEANING A. Section 01710 – Cleaning: Clean installed work.

BOXES 16130-4

B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. D. Check boxes for the presence of drywall screws, concrete residue, and other sharp

objects. Remove all sharp objects.

END OF SECTION

WIRING DEVICES 16141-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16141 – Wiring Devices


A. Wall switches.

B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and decorative box covers.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors,

and configurations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton 4. G.E. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use snap switch. Provide single

pole, double pole, three-way, four way, pilot light, or momentary contact type as indicated.


C. Body and Handle: Plastic with toggle handle. D. Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; red lens. E. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes. F. For control of mechanically held contactors or relays; provide three position, momentary

contact switches with spring return to center off position. Momentary contact switches shall be rated 120/277 volt, 20 amperes.

G. Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may

chose multiple colors throughout project.

2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton 4. G.E. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy duty, specification grade receptacle. In barber shop

and beauty shop waiting area, provide safety type receptacles which shall discourage insertion of foreign object into receptacle by small children.

C. Device Body: Nylon. D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20. F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to

meet regulatory requirements. Devices shall utilize “Lock Out” technology to ensure outlet can not be used if ground fault protection fails. Device shall have status LED.

G. Isolated Ground Receptacle: Type 5-20. Provide with orange body and plate. H. Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may

chose multiple colors throughout project. 2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth nylon in all areas except food prep. Devices in food prep

shall be stainless steel. Manufacturer same as device manufacturer. Color to match device.

B. Exterior Wall Weatherproof exterior boxes to house receptacles: Receptacle shall be installed flush with the wall. The receptacle cover shall have ports to allow two 3/8” diameter cords to pass through it when closed. Enclosure must have gasket between enclosure and mounting surface and between cover and sleeve to assure that the enclosure is weathertight in use per NEC 410-57b. Hubbell WP-700, or equal. Failure to provide devices will result in removal and reinstallation per specification at Contractors expense.



A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection

to wiring devices.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. D. After connecting wires to GFCI receptacles, wrap terminals with four layers of electrician’s

tape. F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding

conductor. G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal when using solid

conductors. Provide crimp on lugs for terminations when using stranded conductors. I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and

above accessible ceilings.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting

heights indicated on drawings.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

3.6 CLEANING


A. Section 01720 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Clean installed work. B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

END OF SECTION

MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS 16150-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16150 – Manufactured Wiring Systems


A. Prefabricated flexible cable assemblies. B. Distribution units. C. Cable accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 – Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate distribution box, switch box, outlet, and cable layout and branch

circuit configuration. C. Product Data: Provide for each cable type and for each fitting and accessory. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

E. Provide voltage drop calculation showing wire size will support use per NEC guidelines. F. Provide scaled drawings showing connection and cable requirements. Electronic drawing

files may be obtained from engineer’s office (618-242-0473). Request drawings minimum two weeks prior to need.

1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01720 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Record actual locations of cable assemblies and branch circuit arrangements.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01720 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section

with minimum three years experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS 16150-2

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

1.9 COORDINATION A. Furnish luminaire connectors to luminaire manufacturer for factory installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. AMP Inc. B. Hubbell Wiring Devices C. Siemens Co. D. Light Fixture Manufacturer.

2.2 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS A. Cable Assemblies: Factory assembled units with appropriate connector on each end,

with lengths and circuit configurations as required. B. Voltage: 120 or 277 volts. C. Switching Unit Assemblies: Cable assembly with 6 inch pigtail on one end. Provide

cables configured for 3-way and 4-way switches where required. D. Luminaire Connector Assemblies: Connector suitable for mounting in luminaire body

knockout. At Contractor’s option, provide connector factory mounted in luminaire. E. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories, including cable extenders,

distribution tees, and switching assemblies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Support cable by means of straps and clamps independently of ceiling suspension

system. C. Support cable minimum 24” above suspended ceiling to avoid contact with and

interference with removal of ceiling panels. D. Arrange cable to avoid interference with access to other work.

END OF SECTION

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16160 – Cabinets and Enclosures


A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks. D. Accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 – Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Section 01720 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.. B. Furnish two of each key. Cabinets and enclosures shall be keyed to same key as panel

boards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hoffman

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-2

B. Square D C. General Electric

2.2 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 inside, or 3R where exposed to weather or moisture,

steel enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. Covers in damp

and wet locations shall have continuous gasket. C. Provide removable interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical

components; finish with white enamel. Provide standoff devices for separation of equipment mounting panel from enclosure.

D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.3 CABINETS A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Backboard: Provide white enamel finished metal backboard for mounting terminal blocks

or other devices. C. Fronts: Steel, Flush type with door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match

branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. D. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and

voltages. E. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment.


A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at

each corner under the provisions of Section 16190. C. Install cabinet fronts plumb.

3.2 CLEANING A. Section 01710 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

END OF SECTION

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16170 – Grounding and Bonding


A. Equipment grounding conductors. B. Bonding.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution

Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use



A. Section 01720 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Procedures for submittals. B. Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE

A. Material: Stranded copper. Unless noted otherwise, provide with green insulation. B. Size: As required by NEC.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-2

2.5 GROUND BUSHING/LUG

A. Insulated metallic grounding bushings, tin-plated open-type lug dual rated for CU-AL conductors, thermoplastic liners rated 105 degree C, die cast zinc, to provide a smooth, well-rounded bearing surface for wires or cable at the end of threaded conduit or a conduit connector as required by the NEC.


A. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each

feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. C. Where multiple ground terminal strips are provided with new panels, run solid bare

#8AWG between all ground terminal strips.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. A. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

END OF SECTION

SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16190 – Supporting Devices


A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads

of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system or expansion anchors

and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps or welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and

hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

2.2 STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturer: Unistrut (P1000 unless otherwise noted) or approved equal. B. Description: Galvanized or painted steel. (1-5/8” square.)

SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-2


A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of

Installation", NFPA 70 and maximum distance between conduit support tables. C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, ceiling support wires, and

conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. F. Do not drill or cut structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use

hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards

one inch off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards

recessed in hollow partitions.

END OF SECTION

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16195 - Identification


A. Nameplates. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit markers.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for

purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.

Screw on type with two self tapping screws. Mastic type nameplates not allowed. B. Locations: 1. Each lighting and appliance panelboard. 2. Each breaker in distribution panel. 3. Each safety switch not in sight of utilization equipment. Indicate correct fuse size

in fusible switches. 4. Each automatic motor starter and variable speed drive. Indicate correct fuse size

for combination starters and drives. 6. Relays and contactors. Indicate loads controlled. 7. Time switches. Indicate load controlled. 8. Fire alarm and mass notification equipment cabinets. 9. Transformers. 10. Where more than two switches are located adjacent to each other or where

switches control loads not in same space. 11. Where noted on plans. C. Letter Size:

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-2

1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads such as safety switches, motor starters, and relays.

2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads such as panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers.

2.2 WIRE MARKERS

A. Description: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers. B. Locations: Each conductor at distribution equipment panelboard gutters, pull boxes,

outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder circuit number. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number corresponding to applicable control

schematics.

2.3 CONDUIT MARKERS A. Location: Conduit couplings and junction box covers shall be painted to indicate system

that conduit serves. B. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange 2. 208 Volt System: Natural conduit. 3. Fire Alarm System: Red. 4. Comm/Data: Blue

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.

3.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Section 09910. D. Field paint colored couplings on each conduit longer than 6 feet and conduit stubs. E. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange 2. 208 Volt System: Natural conduit. 3. Fire Alarm System: Red. 4. Comm/Data: Blue

END OF SECTION

INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16510 – Interior Luminaires


A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Exit signs. C. Ballasts. D. Lamps. E. Luminaire accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector

Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a

standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 – Submittal: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Section 01720 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project

closeout. B. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. C. Warranty for normal ballasts, exit signs, and emergency standby ballasts.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish products as scheduled. Contractors wishing to submit voluntary substitutions shall

submit complete cut sheet information showing fixture dimensions, options and photometrics. Alternate fixtures must be received at engineers’ office minimum two weeks prior to bidding. Engineers’ evaluation shall be final. Fixtures submitted without prior approval will be returned to contractor without comment.

2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Ultra Start or prior approved equal. B. Unless otherwise noted, programmed start fluorescent ballasts shall be General Electric

Ultramax solid state electronic type for use with T8 fluorescent lamps. Ballasts shall have a total harmonic distortion of 10% or less, minimum ballast factor of 0.87 and a minimum power factor of 0.95. Where noted on plans, provide high output General Electric Ultramax ballasts having a ballast factor of 1.15. Maximum input wattage for normal ballast factor ballasts shall be as follows:

277V 1. One lamp: 28 watts 2. Two lamps: 48 watts 3. Three lamps: 76 watts 4. Four lamps: 101 watts C. Certify fluorescent ballast design by Certified Ballast Manufacturer, Inc.

2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY BALLASTS A. Manufacturers: Bodine, ITOA or approved equal. B. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast

compartment of fluorescent luminaire or for remote mounting. C. Ratings: Ballasts to power one F28 lamp: 1100 lumens. Ballasts to power two F28 lamps:

1400 lumens. Provide ballast canister for two lamp ballast for remote mounting above luminaire. Contractor to provide wire and conduit between ballast and luminaire.

D. Battery: Sealed pure lead type, rated for 10 year life. Provide 3 year full warranty. E. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from

the outside of an assembled luminaire.

2.5 LAMPS A. Lamp Manufacturers:


1. General Electric Wattmiser Series or prior approved equal. B. Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. C. Unless otherwise noted 4 foot fluorescent lamps shall be low-mercury premium grade T8

type instant start type rated 28 watts maximum, 2650 lumens minimum, 3500 degrees Kelvin, rendering index (CRI) of 85 or greater. Lamps shall pass federal TCLP criteria (low mercury).

D. Metal halide lamps shall have a constant color temperature of 3000 degrees Kelvin, shall

be pulse and have CRI = 85. E. Lamps of each type shall be by one manufacturer. F. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA’s to toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test;

shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested per NEMA LL1 standards.


A. Support recessed luminaires independent of ceiling framing. For recessed

fluorescent luminaires, provide four hanger wires fastened at corners of luminaires and at structural joists. Provide two hanger wires for recessed downlights. Supports wires shall be same type and gauge as ceiling support wires.

B. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. C. Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure. D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building

lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. G. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130 using flexible

conduit. In exposed grid ceiling areas, use premanufactured wiring systems at contractor’s option.

H. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for

temperature conditions within luminaire. I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. J. Install specified lamps in each luminaire. k. Test emergency standby ballasts to ensure proper operation and duration. Test in the

presence of store manager and fire department representative. Provide written report signed by witnesses indicating acceptance of standby ballast operation.


A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection

and operation.

3.3 ADJUSTING


A. Aim and adjust luminaries as directed. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.

3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01710 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Prior to final acceptance, relamp luminaires that have failed lamps.

END OF SECTION

TESTING 16950-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16950 - Testing


A. Provide:

1. Testing of electrical components and systems: a. Insulation resistance test. b. Continuity test. c. Voltage test. d. Phase relationship verification. e. Fire alarm acceptance test

2. Test reports. 3. Correction of defective components or systems. 4. Retest of corrected components, systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports: Submit seven (7) copies of all test reports to Contracting Officer.

1. Type each test report on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch paper. Include: a. Project Number. b. Project title and location. c. Test performed. d. Date performed. e. Test equipment used. f. Contractor's name, address and telephone number. g. Testing firm's name, address and telephone number if other than

Contractor. h. Name (s) and title (s) of person (s):

1. Performing test. 2. Observing test.

i. Statement verifying each test. j. Nameplate data from each motor and equipment item tested. k. Test results. l. Retest results after correction of defective components, systems.

2. For each copy, assemble all test reports and bind them in a folder. Label each folder,

"Electrical Test Reports". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Furnish all equipment, manpower and casual labor to perform specified testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. When temporary electrical service is used for testing, do not energize any equipment or portion of permanent system that exceeds capacity of temporary service.

B. Ensure that all electrical work is complete and ready for testing.

C. Disconnect all devices or equipment that might be damaged by application of test voltages,

voltage of reversed phase sequence or other test procedures.

TESTING 16950-2

3.2 TESTING: Conduct tests and adjust equipment to verify compliance with specified performance. 3.3 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS

A. Resistance measured; line-to-ground.

B. Perform testing on the following items: Min. Acceptance

Item Tested Voltage of Test Resistance in Megohms 1. No. 2 and larger

cables (600V) 1000V 50 2. Motors 500V 5 3. Switchboard and Panelboard Buses 1000V 25

3.4 CONTINUITY TESTS: Test branch circuits and control circuits to determine continuity of wiring and

connections. 3.5 VOLTAGE TESTS

A. Make and record voltage tests and recorded at the following listed points. Conduct tests under normal load conditions.

1. Service entrance at main panel. 2. Terminals of all motors.

3.7 PHASE RELATIONSHIP

A. Examine connections to equipment for proper phase relationships. Verify proper motor rotation.

3.8 FIRE ALARM ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Have the fire alarm acceptance test performed by the Alarm Company Representative and Installing Contractor in the presence of Fort Leaven Worth Fire Chief's Representative.

B. Acceptance Test Procedures:

EXPECTED INDICATION ON PANEL/RECEIVING STATION PREMISES AND REMOTE STATION

1. Normal Power to Panel (Normal) 2. Disconnect Power to Panel (Trouble) 3. Activate Detection Device (Alarm) 4. Silence Alarm Signaling Devices (Trouble) 5. Return Normal Power to Panel & Reset Panel (Normal) 6. Place Each Function Switch in an Abnormal Position (Trouble) 7. Remove supervised Devices from System (During

this portion of testing, ensure proper wire has been used and devices are properly installed.)

8. Return Supervised Device to System (Normal) 9. Disconnect Normal Power to Panel (Trouble) 10. Activate Detector(s) for each Zone (Alarm) 11. Inspect all Horns Zone Indication, and Auxiliary Devices (Working List) 12. Silence Horns (Alarm/Trouble) 13. Reset System (Trouble) 14. Return Normal Power to System (Normal) 15. Place Panel in Alarm Condition. Disconnect Primary

Power Source for a Minimum of 15 Seconds and Return to Normal Power. (The above transfer procedure shall not cause a loss of an alarm condition at Receiving Station.)

3.9 TESTING OF STANDBY BALLASTS

TESTING 16950-3

A. Test emergency standby ballasts to ensure proper operation and duration. Test in the

presence of store manager and fire department representative. Provide written report signed by witnesses indicating acceptance of standby ballast operation.

3.10 CORRECTION OF DEFECTS

A. When tests disclose any unsatisfactory workmanship or equipment furnished under this Contract, correct defects and retest. Repeat tests until satisfactory results are obtained.

B. When any wiring or equipment is damaged by tests, repair or replace such wiring or

equipment. Test repaired items to ensure satisfactory operation.

END OF SECTION